JP2023057779A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for increasing a performance effect in connection with a title display of a ready-to-win performance.SOLUTION: A performance control CPU 120 can execute a super-ready-to-win performance after a decorative pattern displayed on an image display device 5 becomes a ready-to-win mode. The super-ready-to-win performance is configured while including a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until a performance result is reported. Then, a decorative pattern is displayed in a ready-to-win mode before the title display part in a super-ready-to-win performance, and title characters corresponding to the super-ready-to-win performance are displayed so as to use a display position of a decorative pattern resulting in a ready-to-win mode in the title display part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-32

Description

According to the present invention, variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result, it is possible to control to an advantageous state for the player. related to gaming machines.

As a conventional gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a title indicating the type of ready-to-win effect at the start of the ready-to-win effect (see Patent Document 1, for example). Also, there is a game machine in which a plurality of types of decoration identification information (decorative patterns) are variably displayed in correspondence with the variable display of specific identification information (special patterns) (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2019-118411 A JP 2017-86392 A

In the game machine having the functions and configurations of Patent Documents 1 and 2, there is room for improving marketability.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
game control means;
production control means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The game control means is
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium enters the starting area,
perform variable display of the specific identification information;
Based on the result of the determination, from among a plurality of variation patterns including a first variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state and a second variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state Determine any variation pattern,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means is
It is possible to perform variable display of a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state with a specific reach,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
In one production mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed,
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is capable of executing a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually reduced when executing
When starting variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased,
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, the identification information fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the decoration identification information,
an execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than an execution period of the identification information fade-in display;
The specific reach includes a title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified,
The display means is
After being notified that the specific reach is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed;
displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer time than the title display corresponding to the specific reach;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
in the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the title display part;
In the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the introductory part;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, title display can be preferably performed. Furthermore, since the fade-in display basically gives the impression that the fade-in display is performed in a short period of time, it appears more abruptly. It can be noted that the variable display of the decoration identification information ends when the information fade-in display is performed in a shorter period of time than the background fade-in display. Therefore, marketability can be improved.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a jackpot in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of loss with a time saving. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 131SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine in characteristic part 131SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time reduction frequency|count determination table for every transition opportunity. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern type determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the expectation degree of the reach production|presentation of super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the difference of the expectation degree between reach production|presentations of super reach. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the data holding area for production|presentation control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a state transition diagram for explaining state transition. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice production. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a determination ratio of stop symbols; It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation control pattern according to variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation control pattern according to variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production|presentation during the variable display in a normal state. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production|presentation during the variable display in time saving state A and probability variable state. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production|presentation during the variable display in time saving state B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of the low base weak reach A production. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of the low base weak reach B effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of low base weak reach B effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of the low base strong reach A effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image which shows the bad example of the low base strong reach A effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of the low base strong reach B effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of the low base strongest reach production. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strongest reach production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing transition of images in a modification of the title display part; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of images during execution of high base super reach A to D effects. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the high base super reach A to D effects. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing positions where title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device; It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation time of super reach production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the production|presentation times of a super reach production|presentation. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title character of the super ready-to-win effect and the decoration pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing execution status of expectation level suggestion display; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the transition of images during execution of a selection effect; It is an explanatory diagram showing the number of operations until switching to the next title in the selection effect and the execution ratio of the super ready-to-win effect when the selection effect is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be executed during variable display; It is explanatory drawing about the execution ratio of the production|presentation which can be performed during variable display. It is a figure which shows the display condition of the explanatory note displayed in an explanatory note display effect. It is a timing chart showing the display state of the explanatory note displayed in the explanatory note display effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing timings at which the colors of title characters change in the title color change effect; It is a figure which shows the execution condition of the operation promotion production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution condition of the operation promotion production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution condition of the operation promotion production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution condition of the operation promotion production|presentation D. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an operation prompting image; It is a figure which shows the execution condition of a jackpot start production. It is a figure which shows the display condition of the remaining number of times until play time. It is a figure which shows the execution status of play time start production. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters of the super ready-to-win effect, the explanation text, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, and the operation promotion characters. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters and the like of the super ready-to-win effect and the title characters and the like of the play time start effect. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning state of a game effect lamp. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to an LED driver; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table; It is a figure which shows the brightness|luminance data table used for super reach production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing setting contents of a parent table of weak reach common titles. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of a weak reach system common title. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing setting contents of a grandchild table of weak reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing setting contents of a grandchild table of weak reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing setting contents of a grandchild table of weak reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a parent table for title common chance-up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a title common chance-up red child table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of title common chance up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of title common chance up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of title common chance up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of title common chance-up money. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a child table of title common chance-up money. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of title common chance-up money. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of title common chance-up money. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of title common chance-up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of common titles of strong reach. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a child table of common titles of strong reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of common titles of strong reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of common titles of strong reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of common titles of strong reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of common titles of strong reach. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a child table for introduction of the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of common titles of high base reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing setting contents of a child table of common titles of high base reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of high-base-reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of high-base-reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of high-base-reach common titles. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach type reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of high base reach type reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach type reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach type reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach type reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach type reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of high base reach type reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach type reach C introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of high base reach type reach C introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach type reach D introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of high base reach type reach D introduction. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the engine which comprises the title display part of low base weak reach A and B production, and luminance data. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to Embodiment 1; FIG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of big hit types. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a start winning command buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure for demonstrating a decoration design and a small design. (A1) and (A2) are the first production mode, (B1) and (B2) are the second production mode, (C1) and (C2) are the third production mode, and (D1) and (D2) are the fourth production mode. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the first effect mode, and (B1) and (B2) in the second effect mode. (C1) and (C2) are the third effect mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the fourth effect mode, and (E) is the variable display of the decoration pattern and the small pattern. It is a diagram for explaining the aspect of , (A) is a variation start action of decorative symbols, (B) is a variation stop action, and (C) is a loop action. (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative patterns and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of the lamp. (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an operation example of the hold display. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 1st production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative design following FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 2nd production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative design following FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow of the variable display of the decoration design of FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design as the modification 1. FIG. 42. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative design following FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 3rd production mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the appearance of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of the decoration design in 4th production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the stop display of the decoration design in 1st production|presentation mode (2nd production|presentation mode). FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols following FIG. 47 ; (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols when the number of pending memories is 3 in the first effect mode (second effect mode). (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth effect mode (third effect mode). (A1) is a diagram showing a first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram explaining a background change. It is a figure which shows the flow of a background change in 1st production|presentation mode. It is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the first effect mode. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of each part of the variable display in 2nd production|presentation mode. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of each part of the variable display in 3rd production mode and 4th production mode. (A) is a 1st production mode, (B) is a 2nd production mode, (C) is a timing chart which shows the aspect of each part at the time of the variable display start in a 3rd production mode and a 4th production mode. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a customer waiting demonstration production. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation|movement when starting prize-winning generate|occur|produces during the customer waiting demonstration production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of pseudo consecutive notices; (A) is a diagram showing an example of pseudo-run number display and symbol colors, (B) is a diagram showing pseudo-run number display and symbol color types, and (C) is a diagram showing a pseudo-run number display color determination table. . It is a figure which shows the flow of reach production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the flow of the ready-to-win production following FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation example of each part in reach production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the flow of SP reach production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the flow of SP ready-to-win production following FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation example of each part in SP reach production|presentation. (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing Modification 2 of the present invention. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a modification 3 of the present invention.

[Mode 1]
The game machine of form 1-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display variable display of decoration identification information (decoration pattern) corresponding to variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
The decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach performance), and the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) in the reach mode in the title display part in the specific reach. The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to use the display position of .
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information causes the ready-to-win mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the identification information, the title display can also naturally attract attention, and as a result, the title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1,
Before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), the decoration identification information is displayed in the reach mode of the first size (decorative pattern (large)), and after that, the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) displayed in the reach mode (Large)) is displayed in a second size (decorative pattern (small)) smaller than the first size, and the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed in the second size. It is characterized in that it is displayed so as to use the display position of the displayed decoration identification information (decoration pattern (small)).
According to this feature, the decoration identification information displayed in the first size becomes the second size, thereby attracting the player's line of sight, and using the display position of the decoration identification information in the second size, the display position of the decoration identification information is displayed in a specific reach. By displaying the corresponding title display, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1 or 1-2,
In the title display part in the specific reach, at the timing when the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) in the reach mode is displayed, the specific reach is overlapped with the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) in the reach mode. It is characterized by displaying the corresponding title display (title character).
According to this feature, at the timing when the decoration identification information in the ready-to-reach mode is displayed in the title display part of the specific reach, the title corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap the decoration identification information in the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying , it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach) that is more expected to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach A to C production) and,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear in a state of being overlapped with one decoration identification information (decorative pattern on the left side) of the decoration identification information in the reach form. is characterized by
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear in a state of being overlapped with one decoration identification information among the decoration identification information in the reach mode. It becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-5 is the gaming machine according to form 1-4,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a third reach (low base strongest reach effect) that is expected to be controlled in the advantageous state more than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The title display corresponding to the third ready-to-win state is characterized in that it appears in a state of being superimposed on both decoration identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) in the ready-to-win state.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the third reach, which is expected to be controlled in a more advantageous state than the first reach and the second reach, is overlapped with the decoration identification information of both of the reach modes. Since it appears, the title display corresponding to the third reach can be displayed in a more impactful manner.

The gaming machine of form 1-6 is the gaming machine according to form 1-5,
Title display corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), title display corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) and the third reach (low base strongest reach production ) appears in a state of being overlapped with one of the decoration identification information in the reach mode (decorative pattern on the left side) or both decoration identification information (decorative patterns on both sides), It is characterized in that it is displayed in a fixed position, and is displayed in a state where it overlaps part of the decoration identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) in the reach mode even during the period when it is displayed in the fixed position.
According to this feature, even after the title display is displayed at a fixed position, it is easy to draw attention to the title display.

[Mode 2]
The game machine of form 2-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
a display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12) and determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display variable display of decoration identification information (decoration pattern) corresponding to variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
The first decoration identification information (odd decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low-base weak reach A, B effects), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd number decoration pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), and in the title display part, the reach mode and display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even-numbered decoration pattern),
The first decoration identification information (odd decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd number decoration pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. It is characterized in that the title display (title character) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even-numbered decoration pattern).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information is in the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach and the second reach by using the display position of the decoration identification information in the form, the title display can also be naturally focused, and as a result, the title display is preferably performed. It can be carried out.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1,
When the first decoration identification information (odd-numbered decoration pattern) is displayed in the ready-to-win mode and when the second decoration identification information (even-numbered decoration pattern) is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, the advantageous state (jackpot game state) ) are characterized by different expectations controlled by .
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the degree of expectation for being controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on which decoration identification information results in the ready-to-reach mode, so it is easier to draw attention to the title display. .

[Mode 3]
The game machine of form 3-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
a display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a sixth variation pattern (PA2-13 to 15) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state ) and, determine one of the plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-11 to 13) is sent to the effect control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-13 to 15) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The third reach (low-base strongest reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display variable display of decoration identification information (decoration pattern) corresponding to variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
The first decoration identification information (odd decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low-base weak reach A, B effects), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd number decoration pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), and in the title display part, the reach mode and display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even-numbered decoration pattern),
The first decoration identification information (odd decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd number decoration pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even-numbered decoration pattern),
The first decoration identification information (odd decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect), and in the title display part, the first decoration identification information in the reach mode is displayed. Display the title display (title character) so as to use the display position of the decoration identification information (odd number decoration pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect), and in the title display part, the second decoration identification information in the reach mode is displayed. The feature is that the title display (title character) is displayed so as to use the display position of the decoration identification information (even-numbered decoration pattern).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information is in the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach, the second reach, and the third reach using the display position of the decoration identification information in the reach mode in the display part, the title display can also be naturally noticed. , and as a result, the title can be preferably displayed.

[Mode 4]
The game machine of form 4-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display variable display of decoration identification information (decoration pattern) corresponding to variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
The decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach performance), and the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) in the reach mode in the title display part in the specific reach. Display the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach so as to use the display position of
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information causes the ready-to-win mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the identification information, it is possible to naturally draw attention to the title display as well. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Mode 5]
The game machine of form 5-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state , a third variation pattern (PB1-5-7) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-7-9) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-3) is determined, the second command is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-5 to 7) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 to 9) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) are reach using a plurality of characters,
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) uses the first character (friend character "Mumu") in the first reach and the second character (enemy character "Boingo") in the first reach, Reach for notifying that the first character (ally character "Mumu") is controlled to the advantageous state,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is the first character (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana") in the second reach and the second character (enemy character "Robo") in the second reach. A reach that is used to inform that the first character (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana") will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part in the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first character (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana") in the second reach are on the front side and the second character (enemy character) in the second reach The character "Robo") is displayed on the back side, and the display is started.
In the introduction part in the first reach (low base weak reach B effect), the first character (friend character "Mumu") in the first reach is on the front side and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Boingo") ”) is positioned so as not to be on the far side.
According to this feature, the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is started from an arrangement in which the first character, who is informed that the control will be in an advantageous state, is on the front side, and the second character is on the back side. As a result, the player can empathize with the game, and intuitively recognize that the player has a high degree of expectation. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is the gaming machine according to form 5-1,
The first character is a character (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana") to which benefits are given when winning the battle,
the second character is a character (enemy character "Robo") that does not give a benefit if it wins the battle;
At the start of the introductory part in the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first characters (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana") are displayed with their backs facing forward. A character (enemy character "Robo") is displayed facing the viewer at a position on the far side, and the first character and the second character face each other.
According to this feature, the direction of the player and the direction of the first character are the same for the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation. It makes it easier to recognize that the degree is high.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is the gaming machine according to form 5-1 or 5-2,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first character (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana") and the second character (enemy character "Robo") are displayed in the title display part is displayed at a position including the display area where the title display (title character) was displayed.
According to this feature, the player who has been paying attention to the title display can naturally look at the first character and the second character when the title display disappears.

[Mode 6]
The game machine of form 6-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12) and determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2, PA2-3) is determined, the second command is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects) is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) than the first reach (low-base weak reach A, B effects),
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) has a longer execution time than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The first reach and the second reach are reach in which dialog subtitles are used,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), title display (title character) and dialog subtitles are displayed,
In the introductory part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), continuously displaying the dialogue subtitles displayed in the title display part in the first reach,
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the title display (title characters) is displayed without displaying dialogue subtitles.
According to this feature, the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation and a long execution time, is displayed so as not to cover the title display and dialogue subtitles as much as possible, while having a relatively low degree of expectation and a short execution time. At the first reach, even if the dialogue subtitles and the title display are overlapped, by finishing the title display first, the dialogue subtitles can also be noticed, and the title display and the dialogue subtitles are suitably provided to the player. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is the gaming machine according to form 6-1,
When the title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the title is displayed in the subsequent introduction part It is characterized by the fact that the production scene is not switched until the display of dialogue subtitles displayed at the same time as the display (title characters) is completed.
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to the first reach and the dialog subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the first reach, the dialog subtitles displayed simultaneously with the title display are displayed in the subsequent introductory part. Since the production scene does not change until the end of , it is possible to draw attention to the dialogue subtitles after drawing attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is the gaming machine according to form 6-1 or 6-2,
When the title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitle is output. On the other hand, it is characterized in that the sound corresponding to the title display (title character) is not output.
According to this feature, when the title display and the dialog subtitles are displayed at the same time, the audio corresponding to the dialog subtitles is output, but the audio corresponding to the title display is not output. easier.

[Mode 7]
The game machine of form 7-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach AD effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-base strongest reach effect, high-base reach A to D effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. and an introductory part until the propriety of is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low-base strongest reach performance, high-base reach A to D performance) is a plurality of characters (“Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!”, “Battle reach A (Battle reach B to D)”). is composed of
The display means (image display device 5) displays the title of the specific reach (title characters) in a first size (enlarged size) in which only a part of a plurality of characters is visible in the title display part of the specific reach. is displayed, the display size is gradually reduced from the first size, and the title display (title character) of the specific reach is displayed so that the display size is reduced to the second size (reduced size) in which all of the plurality of characters can be seen. ,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (strongest reach type strongest reach title, high base reach type common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction (high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D (Introduction)) is used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, in the title display part in the specific reach, display is performed in a first size in which only a part of a plurality of characters can be seen, and then the size is gradually reduced to a size in which all characters can be seen. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 7-2 is the gaming machine according to form 7-1,
Before the title display part of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect) is started, the movable object (movable body 32) is superimposed on the front side of the display means (image display device 5),
A background corresponding to the motion of the movable object (background dedicated to the falling effect) is displayed during a period from when the movable object moves until the movable object returns to the initial position (drop effect), and the movable object returns to the initial position. title display (title characters) at the first size (enlarged size) in which all of the plurality of characters are not visible and the display area of the display means is filled up and the background is not visible when the display returns to . It is characterized in that the display is started, and thereafter the title display of the second size (reduced size) and the background corresponding to the title display (background dedicated to title display) are displayed.
According to this feature, the display method of the reach title can give an impact, and at the same time, the background can be switched without a sense of incongruity, and the title display can be preferably shown to the player.

[Mode 8]
The game machine of form 8-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach AD effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-base strongest reach effect, high-base reach A to D effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. and an introductory part until the propriety of is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low-base strongest reach performance, high-base reach A to D performance) is a plurality of characters (“Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!”, “Battle reach A (Battle reach B to D)”). is composed of
The display means (image display device 5) enlarges and displays a plurality of characters from a state in which a plurality of characters are displayed (a state in which a reduced size is displayed at a fixed position) in the title display part of the specific reach. The title display part is ended by (expanding until the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters), and the display corresponding to the introduction part in the specific reach (background at the start of the introduction part) can be visually recognized. displayed as
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (strongest reach type strongest reach title, high base reach type common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction (high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D (Introduction)) is used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the player pays attention to the title display in the title display part, and by suitably using the title display, it is possible to switch to the display corresponding to the next introductory part without discomfort. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Mode 9]
The game machine of form 9-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12) and determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The execution time (T1-1-2) of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) and the execution time of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) Unlike (T2-1 to 3),
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display is started until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position, It consists of the third part (title end period) from the display of the fixed position to the end of the display,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the second part (title display period) is more than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period) displaying a title (title characters) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the second part (title display period) is more than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period) The first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, by making the second part displayed at the fixed position the longest, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title display. can be done. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, the first part until the display at the fixed position is longer than the third part from the display at the fixed position to the end of the display. By setting the time to be long, it is possible to incite which title display is displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, the title display part can be understood by making the relationship of the execution times of the first part, the second part, and the third part common. can be made easier.

[Mode 10]
The game machine of form 10-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern in the normal state), which is the variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern (normal state), which is the variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state ), a third variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state), and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (in a probability variation state Determining any one variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including a deviation variation pattern) and
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command to the effect control means (variation pattern specification command to specify the deviation variation pattern in the normal state) is transmitted,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern in a variable probability state) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, the fourth command to the effect control means (variation pattern specification command to specify the deviation variation pattern in the probability variation state),
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (super reach effect in the probability variable state) is a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
Title display part execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) in the first reach (super reach effect in normal state) and title display in the second reach (super reach effect in variable probability state) Unlike the part execution time (T4),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is a reach executed in the normal state, the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is a special state (variable probability state) that is more advantageous than the normal state is the reach performed at
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display is started until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position, It consists of the third part (title end period) from the display of the fixed position to the end of the display,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in normal state), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period) , displaying a title display (title characters) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period) , the title display (title characters) is displayed such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the second part displayed at the fixed position is the most displayed. By lengthening it, attention can be drawn to the type of title display. Even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the first part is displayed at the fixed position until the first part is displayed at the fixed position. By making the time from the beginning to the end of the display longer than that of the third part, it is possible to stimulate which title display is to be displayed. Even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the relationship between the execution times of the first part, the second part, and the third part can be made common to make the title display part easier to understand.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is the gaming machine according to form 10-1,
The execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is the execution time of the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) (T1-1 to 2, It is characterized by being shorter than T2-1 to 3 and T3).
According to this feature, the execution time of the title display part in the second reach executed in the special state is relatively short. Since the execution time of the title display part is relatively long, it can be strongly stimulated.

[Mode 11]
The game machine of form 11-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display is started until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position, It consists of the third part (title end period) from the display of the fixed position to the end of the display,
The display means (image display device 5), in the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), the second part (title display period) is the first part (title start period) and the third part ( displaying a title (title character) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period), and
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, by making the second part displayed at the fixed position the longest, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title display. Further, by making the first part until the display at the fixed position longer than the third part from the display at the fixed position to the end of the display, it is possible to stimulate which title display is to be displayed. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Form 12]
The game machine of form 12-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to inform that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effect). ,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). ,
The specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C production, low-base strongest reach production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until the propriety is notified,
The display means is
Title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) is the first mode (white mode) and title display corresponding to the specific reach is the first mode It is possible to display in a second mode (red mode) with a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than
In the title display part (the title display part shown in FIG. 11-43) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production), the expectation level suggestion display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first size , and then display the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach in a second size larger than the first size,
When the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode (white mode) and the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the second mode (red mode) In any case when displaying, displaying the expectation level suggestive display in a common manner,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (strongest reach type strongest reach title, strong reach type common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the introductory part (strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is larger in size than the expectation level indication display, and the form suggests the level of expectation, thereby attracting the player's attention. By displaying the expectation level suggestion display earlier than the title display, it is possible to draw the attention to the expectation level suggestion first. In addition, since the expectation level suggestive display is performed in a common manner whether the title is displayed in the first manner or the second manner, it is possible to draw attention to the subsequent title display manner.

[Mode 13]
The game machine of form 13-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-5 to 7) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-7) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state to 9), a third variation pattern (PB1-8 to 10) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10 to 12) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state and, determining one of the plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-5 to 7) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 to 9) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-8 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-10 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is more expected to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach B effect),
The display means is
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach B production), the expectation indication is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach C production), the expectation level indication display is displayed in the second mode (4 stars),
The expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B production) and the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C production) are common display the highlighting on the
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the first reach (strong reach system strong reach B title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach C title),
In the introductory part in the first reach (low base strong reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the first reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction),
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach C introduction). and
According to this feature, even when the expectation level suggestive display is displayed in the first mode in the title display part in the first reach, the expectation level suggestive display is displayed in the second mode in the title display part in the second reach. Even in this case, the development cost can be reduced by making the highlighting common. Further, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, brightness data tables for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 13-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 13-1,
The expectation suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is suggested by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects,
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is suggested by N + 1 (4) objects,
In the expectation indication display, each object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and when one object is highlighted and when 0.5 objects are highlighted, , highlighting is performed in a common manner.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by performing highlighting in a common manner whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted. can be mitigated.

The gaming machine of Form 13-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 13-2,
In the expectation suggestive display, the time for highlighting one object (star-shaped object) and the time for highlighting 0.5 objects (star-shaped object) are common. and
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the time for highlighting one object and the time for highlighting 0.5 objects.

The gaming machine of Form 13-4 is the gaming machine according to Form 13-2 or 13-3,
In the expectation suggestive display, a common emphatic sound ( It is characterized by the output of an expectation-indicating sound.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by outputting a common voice both when one object is highlighted and when 0.5 objects are highlighted. be able to.

[Mode 14]
The game machine of form 14-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance). It is possible to notify
When the second command is received, the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). It is possible to notify
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production) includes a title display part for displaying a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, An introduction part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the specific reach (low-base strong reach A-C production, low-base strongest reach production, high-base reach A-D production), an expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed. is possible and
Emphasis on the first object (star-shaped object) in the expectation indication display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production) After that, while continuing the highlighting of the first object (star-shaped object), the second object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and then the first object (star-shaped object) is highlighted. It is characterized by ending the highlighting of the star-shaped object) and performing the highlighting of the third object (star-shaped object).
According to this feature, in the title display part in the specific reach, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of a plurality of objects, and in the expectation suggestion display, before the highlighting of the first object ends At this time, the highlighting for the second object starts, but the highlighting for the third object does not start until after the highlighting for the first object is finished, so we know the number of objects that indicate the degree of expectation. make it easier to

The gaming machine of Form 14-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 14-1,
In the expectation suggestive display, an emphatic sound (expectation suggestive sound) is output each time an object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and an emphatic sound for highlighting one object (star-shaped object) ( It is characterized in that after the output of the expectation suggestive sound) is completed, the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object (expectation suggestive sound) is output.
According to this feature, the emphasized sound for highlighting one object does not overlap with the emphasized sound for highlighting the next object, so that the number of objects suggesting the degree of expectation can be easily recognized.

The gaming machine of Form 14-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 14-1 or 14-2,
The expectation level suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) and characters (characters "expectation level"),
The highlighting of the object (the star-shaped object) is characterized by being superimposed on the characters (the characters "expectation").
According to this feature, by highlighting the object, attention can be drawn to both the plurality of objects and the characters forming the expectation suggestive display.

[Mode 15]
The game machine of form 15-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance). It is possible to notify
When the second command is received, the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). It is possible to notify
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production) includes a title display part for displaying a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, An introduction part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a plurality of pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low-base strong reach A-C production, low-base strongest reach production, high-base reach A-D production), an expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed. is possible and
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production), the holding display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level indication display,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (strong reach common title, strongest reach strongest reach title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) is used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, while the expectation level suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects is displayed in the title display part in the specific reach, the pending display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestive display. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition as an expectation suggestive display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 15-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 15-1,
The maximum number of active displays corresponding to the pending display and the started variable display is characterized by matching the maximum number (5) of objects (star-shaped objects) forming the expectation suggestive display.
According to this feature, even if it becomes a specific reach in a situation where the maximum number of pending display and active display is displayed, it is mistaken that the maximum number of objects that constitute the expectation indication display is displayed. It is possible to prevent being recognized by

The gaming machine of form 15-3 is the gaming machine according to form 15-1 or 15-2,
The pending display is terminated when the display means (image display device 5) is displayed in a single color before the start of the title display part.
According to this feature, the hold display can be ended without a sense of incompatibility.

[Mode 16]
The game machine of form 16-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-2 to 4/PB1-14) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2-4 to 6/PA2-16), a third variation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state A certain fourth variation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-17), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-8 to 10/PB1-16) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the advantageous state Determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including a sixth variation pattern (PA2-10 to 12 / PA2-18) that is an uncontrolled variation pattern,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (PB1-2 ~ 4 / PB1-14 to specify the variation pattern specification command) to the effect control means is transmitted,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 6 / PA2-16) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 to 9/PA2-17) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, the fifth command (PB1-8 ~ 10 / PB1-16 to specify the variation pattern specification command) to the production control means is transmitted,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A effect / high base reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A effect / high base reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect / high base reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect / high base reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C effect / high base reach C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C effect / high base reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low-base strong reach A effect / high-base reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until the propriety is notified,
The second reach (low-base strong reach B effect / high-base reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until the propriety is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach C effect / high base reach C effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until the propriety is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low-base strong reach A effect / high-base reach A effect), it is possible to display an expectation suggestive display composed of the first number (3) objects (star-shaped objects),
Expectation composed of objects (star-shaped objects) with a second number (3.5) larger than the first number in the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach B effect / high base reach B effect) It is possible to display the degree suggestion display,
In the title display part of the third reach (low base strong reach C effect / high base reach C effect), the expectation level suggestion composed of objects (star-shaped objects) of the third number (4), which is larger than the second number. can display the display,
the number difference between the first number and the second number is the same as the number difference between the second number and the third number (0.5);
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is executed and the second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect) The difference from the expected degree controlled to the advantageous state when the performance) is executed is controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is executed. is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation to be controlled and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part increases from the first number to the second number and from the second number to the third number, the object The amount of increase in the number of is the same number, but the amount of increase in the degree of expectation that is controlled to be more advantageous when the number increases from the second number to the third number than when the number increases from the first number to the second number is As the number of objects increases, it can be expected that the number of objects will be controlled more favorably than the increased number of objects. I don't expect it to be.

The gaming machine of form 16-2 is the gaming machine according to form 16-1,
The plurality of fluctuation patterns are a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13/PB1-17) that is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state ( PA2-13 to 15 / PA2-19) and
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, the seventh command (PB1-11 ~ 13 / PB1-17 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, the eighth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance / high base reach D performance) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance / high base reach D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The fourth reach (low-base strongest reach effect/high-base reach D effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. and an introductory part until the propriety of is notified,
The display means displays an object (star-shaped object) having a fourth number (4.5) larger than the third number in the title display part in the fourth reach (low-base strongest reach effect/high-base reach D effect). capable of displaying configured expectations suggestive display,
the number difference (0.5) between the third number and the fourth number is smaller than the number difference (1) between the first number and the third number;
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state and the third reach (low-base strong reach C effect/high-base reach C effect) when the fourth reach (low-base strongest reach effect/high-base reach D effect) is executed ) is executed, the difference from the expected degree controlled to the advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is executed. is greater than the difference between the expected degree of control to be controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as the degree-of-expectation display in the title display part increases from the third number to the fourth number, more objects are displayed than when the number increases from the first number to the third number. Although the amount of increase in the number of is small, the amount of increase in the degree of expectation that is controlled in an advantageous state is greater when the number is increased from the third number to the fourth number than when the number is increased from the first number to the third number. Therefore, as the number of objects increases, it can be expected that control will be performed in an advantageous state even if the number of objects increased is small.

The gaming machine of Form 16-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 16-2,
The difference in number between the third number and the fourth number is 0.5, and the difference in number between the first number and the third number is 1.
According to this feature, the number of objects displayed as the degree-of-expectation display in the title display part increases by 0.5 from the third number, compared to when the third number is increased by 1 from the first number. The fourth number can be expected to be controlled in a more advantageous state.
The gaming machine of Form 16-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16-1 to 16-3,
Expectation degree controlled to the advantageous state and the second reach (high base reach B effect) when the third reach (high base reach C effect) is executed in a special state (variable probability state) that is more advantageous than the normal state ) is executed, the expected degree of control to be in an advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect) is executed in the normal state. and the expected degree of being controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is executed.
According to this feature, the special state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, can be expected to be controlled to an advantageous state when the number of objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part increases. can.

[Mode 17]
The game machine of form 17-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12) and determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
Both the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are reaches executed in a normal state, and the second reach (low base strong reach Reach A to C production) is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is longer than the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The display means (image display device 5)
Displaying the expectation indication display in the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production),
Do not display the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the first reach (common title for weak reach type),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the second reach (common title for strong reach),
In the introduction part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) is used. to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using the system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the title display part in the second reach with a relatively high expectation is longer than the title display part in the first reach with a relatively low expectation, and the title display part in the second reach While the expectation suggestive display is displayed in the title display part in the first reach, the expectation suggestive display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach, so that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach. be able to. Further, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, brightness data tables for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 17-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 17-1,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period). ,
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period), and consists only of a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period). and
The character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production). It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the second reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach, the second reach is longer than the first reach. It can be made to recognize sensibly that the degree of expectation is high.

The gaming machine of form 17-3 is the gaming machine according to form 17-1 or 17-2,
It is a reach executed in the normal state, and includes a third reach (low base strongest reach performance) that is more expected to be controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance). ,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period). ,
The title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period), and consists only of a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach production) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production). and
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the third reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach, the third reach is longer than the second reach. It is possible to make the user consciously recognize that the degree of expectation is high.

[Mode 18]
The game machine of form 18-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-2, 5, 8), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern (PA2), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state -2 to 3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2-4 to 12) and determine any one of the plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2, 5, 8) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 to 3) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be executed,
When the second command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be executed,
When the third command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) can be executed,
When the fourth command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) can be executed,
Both the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are reach executed in a normal state,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) as the effect result, and the advantageous state (big hit game state) is the effect result. ) is a reach that is notified that it is not controlled, and that another reach (super reach effect) is executed,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) when it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) as a result of the performance. There is a certain reach when it is notified that it will not be
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and notifies whether or not the other reach is executed. It is composed of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The display means (image display device 5)
Displaying the expectation indication display in the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production),
Do not display the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the first reach (common title for weak reach type),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the second reach (common title for strong reach),
In the introduction part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) is used. to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using the system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, while the expectation indication is displayed in the title display part in the second reach where it may be notified that the control will be directly in an advantageous state, the effect that the control will be directly in an advantageous state is displayed. Since the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the first reach, which is not notified, it is possible to prevent the first reach from causing excessive expectations. Further, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, brightness data tables for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 18-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 18-1,
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the title display (title character) in a confirmed mode (gold) that confirms that another reach (super reach production) will be executed It is characterized by being displayable.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention even to the title display part in the first reach, in which the expectation suggestive display is not displayed.

[Mode 19]
The game machine of form 19-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. and an introductory part until the propriety of is notified,
The specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach) is via a selection effect using title display (title characters) corresponding to multiple reaches (super reach effect) including the specific reach. and
The display means is
In the title display part of the specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach) and the selected effect, it is possible to display an expectation level indication display along with the title display (title characters),
When displaying the expectation suggestive display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach), the expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) are displayed step by step,
It is characterized in that, when displaying the expectation level suggestive display in the selection effect, the expectation level suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is not displayed step by step.
According to this feature, when displaying the expectation suggestive display in the title display part of the specific reach, the expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects is displayed in stages, whereas the expected When displaying the degree of suggestion display, the degree of expectation indication display composed of multiple objects is not displayed in stages, so the degree of expectation indication is displayed step by step not only in the title display part but also in the selection effect before that. It is possible to eliminate the annoyance of being displayed in

The gaming machine of Form 19-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 19-1,
The selection effect is a effect that changes in stages from a low expected reach (super reach effect) to a high expected reach (super reach effect) by operating the operation means for effect (push button 31B),
The time required to change one stage in the selection effect (the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach effect) is the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) may be shorter than the time required to display one level of the expectation level suggestive display of the title display part (the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold after being highlighted).
According to this feature, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the gradual change in the selection effect.

The gaming machine of Form 19-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 19-2,
The selection performance is a performance in which the current reach (super reach performance) is changed to a reach (super reach performance) with a level of expectation higher by one stage than the current reach (super reach performance), and each stage is changed to the next stage. It is characterized in that the number of times of operation of the performance operation means (push button 31B) required for the operation is increased.
According to this feature, the higher the expectation of reach, the more impatient the player can be.

The gaming machine of Form 19-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 19-1 to 19-3,
When the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is selected by the selection effect, the title display part is started.
According to this feature, even when the specific ready-to-win is executed via the selection effect, it starts from the title display part, so the player can easily determine which ready-to-win is finally executed.

[Form 20]
The game machine of form 20-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
After being informed that the specific reach (super reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
displaying the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) in a manner with greater movement than the title display corresponding to the specific reach (title characters of the super reach effect);
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, while the situation in which the advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being notified that the player will be controlled to the next level, and by moving the display of the name of the advantageous status more widely, it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to the advantageous status. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 20-2 is the gaming machine according to form 20-1,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach B, C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D), when displaying the title display (title characters), the background dedicated to the title display is displayed,
The background of the advantageous state name display (title characters of the effect for starting the big win) is characterized in that it is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display.
According to this feature, by moving the background of the display of the name of the advantageous state to a greater extent, it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to the advantageous state.

[Form 21]
The game machine of form 21-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation promotion effects B, D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed,
displaying the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect);
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the promotion character display displayed in the introductory part prompts the player to take action. can prompt actions by In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 21-2 is the gaming machine according to form 21-1,
In the introductory part of the specific reach (super reach effect), a special promotion character display (operation is capable of displaying facilitator characters (large),
Both the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) and the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) move more than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). is displayed in a large form.
According to this feature, whether it is promotion character display or special promotion character display, by moving the title display more than the title display displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to take action. .

The gaming machine of form 21-3 is the gaming machine according to form 21-1 or 21-2,
It is characterized in that the number of characters (3) of the prompt character display (operation prompt characters (small)) is smaller than the number of characters (7 to 13) of the title display (title characters).
According to this feature, the number of characters in the promotion character display is smaller than the number of characters in the title display.

[Form 22]
The game machine of form 22-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display an explanation character display (explanation character) that is different from the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) and that explains the content of the specific reach,
displaying the explanatory character display (explanatory character) in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect);
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the additionally displayed explanatory character display is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display, so that attention is also drawn to the addition of the explanatory character display in addition to the title display. can be done. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 22-2 is the gaming machine according to form 22-1,
The explanation character display (explanation character) is characterized by having a content suggesting that the specific reach (super reach effect) is advantageous.
According to this feature, it is possible to further draw attention to the fact that the explanation character display is added.

[Form 23]
The game machine of form 23-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12) and determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is better than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects). is also displayed in a larger font size,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the first reach (common title for weak reach type),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the second reach (common title for strong reach),
In the introduction part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) is used. to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using the system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach with a relatively high expectation is displayed so that the character size is larger than the title display corresponding to the first reach with a relatively low expectation. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize that the second reach is more expected than the first reach, just by displaying the title. Further, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, brightness data tables for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 23-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 23-1,
The number of characters (10) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) corresponds to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effects). The display area (display area size) of the title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C production) is larger than the number of characters (7, 8) that make up the (title character) It is characterized by being larger than the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects).
According to this feature, the display area occupied by one character is larger in the title display corresponding to the second reach, so that the user can perceive that the second reach is more expected than the first reach. be able to.

[Form 24]
The game machine of form 24-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a plurality of characters,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display variable display of decoration identification information (decoration pattern) corresponding to variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
Before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), the decoration identification information (decorative pattern (large)) of the first size is displayed in the reach mode, and then the second size smaller than the first size is displayed. Displaying the decoration identification information (decoration pattern (small)) in a reach mode,
displaying at least one character of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) in a size larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, at least one character of the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a size larger than the decoration identification information reduced to the second size, so that the title display can be noticed in the title display part. can. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 24-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 24-1,
Any character of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is smaller than the first size (decorative pattern (large)) and smaller than the second size (decorative pattern (small)). is also displayed in a large size.
According to this feature, the decoration identification information can be reliably recognized when the ready-to-reach mode is set, and after that, the decoration identification information is reduced, and the title display is configured in a size larger than the decoration identification information. Since each character is displayed, it is possible to draw attention to the title display in the title display part.

[Form 25]
The game machine of form 25-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation promotion effects B, D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed,
After being informed that the specific reach (super reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
displaying the advantageous state name display (title characters for the effect of starting the jackpot) larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is already advantageous This is the situation after being informed that the player will be controlled to the state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the promotion character display, it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 25-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 25-1,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is composed of a first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and a second character string ("BONUS"),
After the first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) is displayed at the first position (top position), the second character string (“BONUS”) is displayed at the second position (bottom position). is,
After the second character string ("BONUS") is displayed at the second position (lower position), the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") displayed at the first position (upper position) ”) and the second character string (“BONUS”) displayed at the second position (lower position) are gradually enlarged and displayed,
The first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) and the second character string (“BONUS”) are displayed at the first position (fixed position top) and the second position (fixed position bottom) Sometimes the font size is displayed in the smallest size,
When the first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) and the second character string (“BONUS”) are displayed at the first position (top position) and second position (bottom position) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the prompting character display (operation prompting characters (small)).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the advantageous state name display are always displayed larger than the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that it is possible to congratulate the control to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 25-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 25-1 or 25-2,
The smallest character in the character string that constitutes the advantageous state name display (the title character of the jackpot start effect) is larger than the largest character in the character string that constitutes the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)). is also characterized by a large
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string that constitutes the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string that constitutes the promotion character display. Even so, since the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the promotion character display, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 25-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 25-1 to 25-3,
It is possible to display a special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is characterized in that it is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect).
According to this feature, the special promotion character display suggesting a situation more advantageous than the promotion character display is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, so that the player can feel the advantageous situation.

The gaming machine of form 25-5 is the gaming machine according to form 25-4,
The smallest character in the character string that constitutes the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is the largest character in the character string that constitutes the advantageous state name display (the title character for the jackpot start effect). characterized by being larger than
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string that constitutes the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string that constitutes the advantageous state name display, so which character should be focused on? Even if it does, the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, so that the player can feel the advantageous situation.

[Form 26]
The game machine of form 26-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
After being informed that the specific reach (super reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) larger than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect);
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being notified that the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 26-2 is the gaming machine according to form 26-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reach with different title displays (title characters),
The advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is characterized in that it is displayed larger than the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so that it is possible to congratulate the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 26-3 is the gaming machine according to form 26-2,
The smallest character in the character string that constitutes the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is the character that constitutes the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect). Characterized by being larger than the largest character in the column.
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string constituting the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. Therefore, regardless of which character is focused on, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, so that it is possible to congratulate the control to the advantageous state.

[Form 27]
The game machine of form 27-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-base weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed. can be,
Displaying the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach system),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion character display before the title display part and displaying the title display to be displayed after that in a larger size than the promotion character display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 27-2 is the gaming machine according to form 27-1,
After the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed, it develops to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), and the title display part in the specific reach is started. .
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion character display before the title display part in a series of flows and displaying the title display to be displayed after that in a larger size than the promotion character display. can.

The gaming machine of form 27-3 is the gaming machine according to form 27-1 or 27-2,
The smallest character in the character string constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) constitutes the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)). Characterized by being larger than the largest character in the string.
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string that constitutes the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string that constitutes the promotional character display. Even if the user pays attention to , it is possible to make the user pay attention to the title display.

[Form 28]
The game machine of form 28-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed. can be,
After notification of control to the advantageous state by the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), an advantageous state name display (title character of big hit start production) corresponding to the advantageous state to be controlled is displayed. is viewable and
displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the big hit start effect) larger than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect);
Displaying the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach system common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, while the situation in which the advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the player will be controlled to the advantage, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state larger than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to the advantageous state. In addition, by displaying the promotion character display before the title display part and displaying the title display to be displayed after that in a larger size than the promotion character display, the title display can be noticed. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 28-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 28-1,
After the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed, it develops into the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the title display part in the specific reach starts, and the specific reach ( It is characterized in that the display of the name of the advantageous state (title characters of the big win start presentation) is displayed after the fact that the advantageous state is controlled by the low base weak reach A, B presentation) is notified.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion character display before the title display part in a series of flows and displaying the title display to be displayed after that in a larger size than the promotion character display. After that, after being notified that the player will be controlled to an advantageous state by the specific reach, by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 29]
The game machine of form 29-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
After being informed that the specific reach (super reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) for a longer time than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect);
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, while the situation in which the advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the control is to be carried out to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer time than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the control to the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 29-2 is the gaming machine according to form 29-1,
The time from when all the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) are displayed until at least part of the character string disappears corresponds to the specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by being longer than the time from when a part of the character string that constitutes the title display (title characters) is displayed until the entire character string is not displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the advantageous state name display with congratulatory meaning can be seen properly is longer than the time during which the title display is displayed for the purpose of arousing the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. can give people satisfaction.

The gaming machine of form 29-3 is the gaming machine according to form 29-1 or 28-2,
After the advantageous state name display (title character of the effect of starting the big win) is displayed, the advantageous state name display is an operation suggestion display that suggests an operation method during the advantageous state (a right-handed promotion image (small) and a right-handed promotion image). image (large)), and after a predetermined period of time from the switching to the operation suggestion display, an operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display (an operation method of hitting a game ball toward the right game area 2R) is operated. Control that is advantageous by
The time for switching from the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start production) to the operation suggestion display (right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large)) corresponds to the specific reach (super reach production). It is characterized by being shorter than the time to end the title display (title character).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display is switched to the operation suggestion display in a short period of time, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an advantageous control is performed by operating in the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by changing the operation method from the period when the advantageous state name display is terminated.

[Mode 30]
The game machine of form 30-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation promotion effects B, D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed,
After being informed that the specific reach (super reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
displaying the advantageous state name display (title characters for the effect of starting the big win) for a longer period of time than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is already advantageous This is the situation after being notified of the control to the state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer time than the promotion character display, it is possible to congratulate the control to the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 30-2 is the gaming machine according to form 30-1,
The prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed until the prompting action is performed or until the time when the prompting action is effective elapses,
During the time when the advantageous state name display (title character of the effect of starting the big win) is displayed, the prompting action is not performed after the prompting letter display (operation prompting letter (small)) is displayed, and the prompting action is performed. is longer than the time until the valid time elapses.
According to this feature, after the prompt character display is displayed, the advantageous state name display is displayed for a longer time than the time during which the prompting action is not performed, thereby controlling the advantageous state. can be blessed.

The gaming machine of form 30-3 is the gaming machine according to form 30-1 or 30-2,
The time from when all the character strings that make up the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) are displayed until at least a part of the character string is not displayed is the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small )) is longer than the displayed time.
According to this feature, the time during which the congratulatory advantageous state name display can be seen properly is set longer than the time during which the promotion character display intended to prompt the player to act is displayed, thereby satisfying the player. can give you a feeling.

The gaming machine of form 30-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 30-1 to 30-3,
It is possible to display a special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that prompts an operation) without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect),
The special operation prompting display (operation prompting characters (large)) is a prompting introduction display (prompting introduction effect) that is displayed, followed by prompting letters (characters prompting an operation),
The time during which the advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start effect) is displayed is longer than the time during which the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is displayed is longer than the time during which the special promotion character display accompanied by the promotion introduction display is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction. be able to.

[Mode 31]
The game machine of form 31-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed. can be,
Displaying the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach system common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the prompting character display is displayed before the title display part, and the title display to be displayed after that is displayed for a longer time than the prompting character display, so that attention can be drawn to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 31-2 is the gaming machine according to form 31-1,
The prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed during the time from when all the character strings forming the title display (title character) are displayed until at least part of the character string disappears. It is characterized by being longer than time.
According to this feature, by making the time during which the title display can be seen properly longer than the time during which the promotion character display is displayed for the purpose of prompting the player to perform an action, the title display can be noticed.

The gaming machine of form 31-3 is the gaming machine according to form 31-1 or 31-2,
It is possible to display a special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that prompts an operation) without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect),
The special operation prompting display (operation prompting characters (large)) is a prompting introduction display (prompting introduction effect) that is displayed followed by prompting characters (characters that prompt an operation).
The time during which the title display (title character) is displayed is longer than the time during which the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, it is possible to attract attention to the title display by making the time during which the title display is displayed longer than the time during which the special promotion character display accompanied by the promotion introduction display is displayed.

[Mode 32]
The game machine of form 32-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act can be displayed. can be,
After notification of control to the advantageous state by the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), an advantageous state name display (title character of big hit start production) corresponding to the advantageous state to be controlled is displayed. is viewable and
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the big hit start performance) for a longer time than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
Displaying the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach system common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, while the situation in which the advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being notified that the control is to be carried out to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer time than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the control to the advantageous state. Further, by displaying the promotion character display before the title display part and displaying the title display to be displayed thereafter for a longer time than the promotion character display, the title display can be noticed. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

[Mode 33]
The game machine of form 33-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2- 4 to 12), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-14) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a sixth variation pattern (PA2-16) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, and the A plurality of variation patterns (PB1-15 to 17), which are variation patterns controlled to an advantageous state, and eighth variation patterns (PA2-17 to 19), which are variation patterns not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine any variation pattern from among the variation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-14) is sent to the effect control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-16) is sent to the effect control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-15 to 17) is sent to the effect control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, the eighth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-17 to 19) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The third reach (high-base reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and a notification of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state. It is composed of an introductory part up to and including
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are reach executed in a normal state,
The third reach (high base reach A effect) and the fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) are reach executed in a special state (variable probability state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the third reach (high base reach A effect),
The third reach (high base reach A effect) has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
The display means is
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), an expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
It is possible to display the expectation level indication display in the title display part in the third reach (high base reach A effect),
It is possible to display the expectation level indication display in the title display part in the fourth reach (high base reach A effect),
It is characterized in that the expectation suggestive display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production).
According to this feature, the first reach in the normal state has a lower expectation level than the second reach in the normal state, so the expectation level suggestive display is displayed in the second reach, but the expectation level suggestive display is displayed in the first reach. By not displaying, it is possible to prevent excessive expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state by the first reach. On the other hand, although the third reach in the special state that is more advantageous than the normal state has lower expectations than the fourth reach in the special state, since the expectation is higher than the first reach in the normal state, even in the third reach the fourth By displaying the expectation level suggestion display even in the reach, it is possible to make the player expect to be controlled in an advantageous state both in the case of the third reach and in the case of the fourth reach.

[Mode 34]
The game machine of form 34-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern in the normal state), which is the variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern (normal state), which is the variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state ), a third variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state), and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state (in a probability variation state Determining any one variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including a deviation variation pattern) and
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command to the effect control means (variation pattern specification command to specify the deviation variation pattern in the normal state) is transmitted,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern in a variable probability state) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, the fourth command to the effect control means (variation pattern specification command to specify the deviation variation pattern in the probability variation state),
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (super reach effect in the probability variable state) is a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The first reach (super reach effect in normal state) is a reach executed in normal state,
The second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is a reach that is executed in a special state (variable probability state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is shorter than the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (super reach production in the normal state), the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the title display part of the first reach (common title for weak reach, common title for strong reach) to control the
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the title display part of the second reach (high base reach system common title),
In the introduction part in the first reach (super reach production in the normal state), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong Reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part in the second reach (super reach production in the variable probability state), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means using reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the title display part of the second reach in the special state is made shorter than the title display part of the first reach in the normal state, so that the special state can proceed at a good tempo. Further, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, brightness data tables for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 34-2 is the gaming machine according to form 34-1,
The frequency of the second reach (super reach production in the variable probability state) in the special state (variable probability state) is higher than the frequency of the first reach (super reach production in the normal state) in the normal state. there is
According to this feature, even if the frequency of the second reach increases in the special state, the special state can proceed at a good tempo.

[Mode 35]
The game machine of form 35-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-4) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state 12), a third variation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-13 to 15) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. and, determining one of the plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 12) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-11 to 13) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-13 to 15) is sent to the effect control means,
A variable display was performed a specific number of times (900 times) in a normal state and a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and the result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result ("jackpot" special display result). It is possible to control to a plurality of states including a special state (time saving state B (free time)) after reaching a specific number of times controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strongest reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A to C production) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until it is notified, and
The second reach (low-base strongest reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base strongest reach production) is more likely to be in the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach A to C production),
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the first reach in the first display operation mode (display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side to the center of the display area) Display the title display (title character) corresponding to
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strongest reach effect), the second display operation mode (display mode in which the title characters are displayed in a reduced size from an enlarged display) different from the first display operation mode. Display the title display (title character) corresponding to the reach,
When the special state (time-saving state B (play time)) is entered after reaching the specified number of times, the display indicating that the special state is entered after reaching the specified number of times (the title character of the play time start effect) is displayed in the second display. It is characterized by displaying in a display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from enlarged display).
According to this feature, when the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times, the display indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is the same as the title display of the second reach, which is relatively expected. Since the display is performed in the 2-display operation mode, it is possible to recognize that the special state after reaching the specific number of times is highly advantageous.

The gaming machine of form 35-2 is the gaming machine according to form 35-1,
When the display (title character of the play time start production) indicating that the special state (time saving state B (play time)) is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is ended, the second reach (low base strongest reach production) It is characterized by ending the title display (title characters) of the title display part in the same display operation mode (the display mode in which the title characters are erased while being enlarged) when ending the title display (title characters).
According to this feature, even when ending the display indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times, the display operation mode is the same as when ending the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation. Since the game is ended in the display operation mode, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special state after reaching the specific number of times is highly advantageous.

[Mode 36]
The game machine of form 36-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
A variable display was performed a specific number of times (900 times) in a normal state and a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and the result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result ("jackpot" special display result). It is possible to control to a plurality of states including a special state (time saving state B (free time)) after reaching a specific number of times controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
When it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times (time saving state B (play time)), it is possible to display a display (title character of play time start effect) indicating that it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times can be,
The size of the characters constituting the display (title character of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). is larger than the size of the characters that make up the
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state, but it is indicated that it will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times. The display shown is a state of being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, and the size of characters constituting the display indicating that it is controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times constitutes a title display corresponding to a specific reach. By making it larger than the character size, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of times. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 36-2 is the gaming machine according to form 36-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reach with different title displays (title characters),
The characters constituting the display (title character of play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times are the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by being larger than the characters that make up the .
According to this feature, the characters constituting the display indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times are displayed larger than the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. You can bless being controlled to a special state after reaching it.

The gaming machine of form 36-3 is the gaming machine according to form 36-2,
The smallest character in the character string that constitutes the display (title character of play time start effect) indicating that it will be controlled to a special state after reaching the specified number of times corresponds to any type of specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by being larger than the largest character in the character string that composes the title display (title character).
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string constituting the display indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times is the character string constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. Since it is displayed larger than the largest character, no matter which character you pay attention to, the display indicating that it will be controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of times will be displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach. Therefore, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times.

[Mode 37]
The game machine of form 37-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
A variable display was performed a specific number of times (900 times) in a normal state and a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and the result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result ("jackpot" special display result). It is possible to control to a plurality of states including a special state (time saving state B (free time)) after reaching a specific number of times controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
When it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times (time saving state B (play time)), it is possible to display a display (title character of play time start effect) indicating that it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times can be,
The display time of the display (title character of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is longer than the display time of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). also long,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in the specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state, but it is indicated that it will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times. The display shown is a situation in which the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times, and the display indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times is displayed longer than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, so that the specified number of times You can bless being controlled to a special state after reaching it. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 37-2 is the gaming machine according to form 37-1,
The time from when all the character strings that make up the display (the title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times until at least part of the character string is not displayed is , is longer than the time from when a part of the character string that constitutes the title display (title character) corresponding to the above-mentioned specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed until the entire character string is not displayed. there is
According to this feature, the title display is displayed for the purpose of arousing the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state during the time when the display indicating that the control to the special state will be performed after reaching a certain number of times with the intention of congratulations can be clearly seen. The player can be given a sense of satisfaction by making the time longer than the required time.

[Mode 38]
The game machine of form 38-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
A variable display was performed a specific number of times (900 times) in a normal state and a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and the result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result ("jackpot" special display result). It is possible to control to a plurality of states including a special state (time saving state B (free time)) after reaching a specific number of times controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of characters until play time),
The size of the characters that make up the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is the display that indicates the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time). Larger than the size of the letters that make up
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) are used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, by making the size of the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specific reach, the specific reach It is possible to draw attention to the title display corresponding to . In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 38-2 is the gaming machine according to form 38-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach) that is more expected to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach A to C production) and,
The display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of characters until play time) is displayed during execution of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), and the second reach It is characterized by not being displayed during execution of (low base strong reach A to C production).
According to this feature, by displaying the remaining number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times in the first reach, which has a low degree of expectation, it is possible to make the user aware of the number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times, while at the same time the degree of expectation is high. In the high second reach, by not displaying the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specified number of times, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance, and when the number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specified number of times is small, the player's feeling of disappointment is reduced. can be mitigated.

The gaming machine of form 38-3 is the gaming machine according to form 38-2,
When it is notified that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining until play time is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) without displaying the number of times character) again,
When it is reported that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is not controlled to the advantageous state, the specific number of times is reached after the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is completed. It is characterized in that the display indicating the remaining number of times up to the post special state (remaining number of times characters up to play time) is displayed again.
According to this feature, when it is notified that the advantageous state is controlled in the second reach, the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specific number of times is not displayed again, so that the number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times is not displayed again. When the number of times is small, the player's sense of regret can be alleviated. Further, when it is notified that the second reach is not controlled to an advantageous state, the remaining number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times is displayed again after the end of the second reach. It can be quickly relieved when there are few.

[Mode 39]
The game machine of form 39-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
A variable display was performed a specific number of times (900 times) in a normal state and a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and the result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result ("jackpot" special display result). It is possible to control to a plurality of states including a special state (time saving state B (free time)) after reaching a specific number of times controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
At the timing (operation promotion effects A to D) related to the specific reach (super reach effect), it is possible to display a promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) that prompts the player to act,
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of characters until play time),
The size of the characters composing the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) is the size of the characters composing the display indicating the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specified number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time). larger than
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) is used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the size of the characters constituting the promotion character display prompting the player to perform an action at the timing related to the specific reach is changed to the characters constituting the display indicating the remaining number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times. By making it larger than the size, it is possible to draw attention to the promotion character display and effectively prompt the player to take action. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 39-2 is the gaming machine according to form 39-1,
When the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed before the title display part (operation promotion production A) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the specific number of times is reached A display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state (remaining number of characters until play time) is displayed at the same time,
When the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed in the introduction part (operation promotion production D) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production), a special state after reaching the specific number of times It is characterized in that the display indicating the number of times remaining until play time (characters of remaining number of times until play time) is not displayed.
According to this feature, before developing to a specific reach, by displaying the promotion text and at the same time displaying the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specific number of times, the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specific number of times is conscious. In the operation promotion display of the introductory part, by not displaying the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times, it is possible to notify that it will be controlled to an advantageous state

[Form 40]
The game machine of form 40-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern designation command for designating a deviation variation pattern) is transmitted to the effect control means,
A variable display was performed a specific number of times (900 times) in a normal state and a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and the result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result ("jackpot" special display result). It is possible to control to a plurality of states including a special state (time saving state B (free time)) after reaching a specific number of times controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of control to the advantageous state is notified. and
The display means (image display device 5)
After being informed that the specific reach (super reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of characters until play time),
Before displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start effect), the display indicating the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specified number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) is finished,
The size of the characters composing the advantageous state name display (title characters for the effect of starting the jackpot) is the same as the size of the characters composing the display indicating the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specified number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time). bigger than the size
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) is used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the situation in which the name of the advantageous state is displayed is the situation after the fact that the control to the advantageous state has already been made, and the display indicating the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specific number of times is unnecessary. Therefore, before displaying the name of the advantageous state, the display indicating the remaining number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specified number of times is ended, and the size of the characters that make up the name of the advantageous state is changed to the special state after reaching the specified number of times. By making the display indicating the remaining number of times to the state larger than the size of the characters constituting the display, it is possible to congratulate the control to the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. As a result, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 40-2 is the gaming machine according to form 40-1,
Display showing the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining number of times to play time) regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching the specified number of times characters) are the same size,
The size of the characters composing the advantageous state name display (title characters for the effect of starting the jackpot) is the same as the size of the characters composing the display indicating the remaining number of times to the special state after reaching the specified number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time). It is characterized by being larger than it is.
According to this feature, regardless of the number of remaining times to reach the special state after reaching the specified number of times, the size of the letters constituting the advantageous state name display indicates the remaining number of times to reach the special state after reaching the specified number of times. By making the size of characters larger than the size of the characters that constitute the display, it is possible to celebrate being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 40-3 is the gaming machine according to form 40-1 or 40-2,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100), after reaching a specific number of times in the special state (time saving state B (play time)) first start area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) game media It is characterized by determining a special variation pattern (time saving B start variation pattern) when (game ball) enters.
According to this feature, when the game medium enters the starting area for the first time in the special state after reaching the specific number of times, an effect corresponding to the special variation pattern can be executed.

[Mode 41]
The game machine of form 41-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be displayed by changing from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red or gold mode). is possible and
In the title display part that displays the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) ) is changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), the specific reach (low base weak reach A, The time when the title display (title character) corresponding to B production) is displayed is the title display ( title character) is displayed longer than the displayed time,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (weak reach system common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, when changing the title display corresponding to the specific reach from the first mode to the second mode in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the specific reach in the second mode By making the time during which the title display corresponding to is displayed longer than the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode, the change to the second mode is ensured. can be recognized. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. can be made As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

The gaming machine of form 41-2 is the gaming machine according to form 41-1,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) ) is changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), or the first aspect (white aspect) is left unchanged,
When changing the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red or gold mode) , when a specific timing has come (when the time t1 has passed since the start of the title display period), the first mode (white mode) is changed to the second mode (red or gold mode) and a specific effect Output a sound (specific sound),
When the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not changed in the first mode (white mode), when the specific timing comes (title display When the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the period), the specific effect sound (specific sound) is output without changing the first mode (white mode).
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to the specific reach changes from the first mode to the second mode at the specific timing, the specific sound effect is output, and when the title display does not change from the first mode at the specific timing. Since the specific sound effect is also output, it can be expected that the output of the specific sound effect will change to the second mode.

The gaming machine of form 41-3 is the gaming machine according to form 41-1 or 41-2,
The second aspect includes multiple types of aspects (red and gold aspects),
When changing the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red, gold mode) , a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output when changing to any of the second modes (red and gold modes).
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to the specific reach changes from the first mode to the second mode at the specific timing, the specific effect sound is output in any type of change to the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to draw the user's attention to which type of second mode is to be changed by outputting the specific sound effect.

[Form 42]
The game machine of form 42-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
and a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to change the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red mode) and display it. can be,
The title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled from the first mode (white mode) to a more advantageous state than the second mode (red mode). It is possible to display by changing to the third mode (golden mode) with high expectation,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) ) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red aspect) or the third aspect (golden aspect), the first aspect (white display mode) to a common display mode (appearing to shine), and then to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode). and
According to this feature, even when the title display corresponding to the specific reach is changed from the first form to the second form in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the first form to the third form , the display mode is changed to the common display mode and then changed to the second mode or the third mode. Alternatively, until the change to the third mode, it is possible to make the user expect to change to the third mode, which has a higher degree of expectation than the second mode, until the end.

The gaming machine of form 42-2 is the gaming machine according to form 42-1,
The common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title display (title characters) are illuminated, and when the light is clear, the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode). Characterized by change.
According to this feature, it is possible to stimulate the change to the second mode or the third mode by shining the characters that constitute the title display.

[Mode 43]
The game machine of form 43-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state , a third variation pattern (PB1-JB), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-3), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a plurality of variation patterns. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-3) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low-base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach (low base weak reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
The brightness data table (weak reach system controlling the light emitting means using a common title);
In the introductory part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction). and
According to this feature, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is made common for two different reach, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part is a brightness data table corresponding to each. By using the data table, it is possible to appropriately set the period until notification of whether or not the player will be in an advantageous state, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Form 44]
The game machine of form 44-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state , a third variation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth variation pattern (PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state A fifth variation pattern (PB1-2 to 4) that is a variation pattern, a sixth variation pattern (PA2-4 to 6) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state The seventh variation pattern (PB1-5 to 7 / PB1-8 to 10), and the eighth variation pattern (PA2-7 to 9 / PA2-10 to 12), which is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, Determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns including
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-3) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 4) is sent to the effect control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 6) is sent to the effect control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, the seventh command to the effect control means (PB1-5 ~ 7 / PB1-8 ~ 10 to specify the variation pattern designation command) is transmitted,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, the eighth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 ~ 9 / PA2-10 ~ 12) is sent to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to inform that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). ,
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to inform that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). ,
The first reach (low-base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low-base weak reach B effect), and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The fourth reach is a title display part for displaying a title display (title character) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and whether it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until the propriety of whether or not is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach A production) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B production / low base strong reach C production) are the first reach (low base weak reach A production) and the second reach Expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
The brightness data table for the first title display part (weak Reach system common title) is used to control the light emitting means,
A second title display part that is common to the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A production) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B production/low base strong reach C production) Control the light emitting means using the luminance data table for (strong reach system common title),
In the introductory part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introductory part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introductory part in the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the third reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction),
In the introduction part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B production / low base strong reach C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction / strong reach system strong reach C introduction) is used to control the light emitting means.
According to this feature, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for the reach of 2 with high expectations and the reach of 2 with low expectations, thereby preventing increases in cost and capacity, By using the corresponding luminance data table, it is possible to preferably lengthen the period until the notification of whether or not an advantageous state is achieved, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable title display. .

[Form 45]
The game machine of form 45-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state , a third variation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth variation pattern (PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state A fifth variation pattern (PB1-2 to 4) that is a variation pattern, a sixth variation pattern (PA2-4 to 6) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state The seventh variation pattern (PB1-5 to 7 / PB1-8 to 10), and the eighth variation pattern (PA2-7 to 9 / PA2-10 to 12), which is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, A ninth variation pattern (PB1-11 to 13), which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a tenth variation pattern (PA2-13 to 15), which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine any variation pattern from among the variation patterns of
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA) is sent to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2) is sent to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JB) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-3) is sent to the effect control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 4) is sent to the effect control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to 6) is sent to the effect control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, the seventh command to the effect control means (PB1-5 ~ 7 / PB1-8 ~ 10 to specify the variation pattern designation command) is transmitted,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, the eighth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 ~ 9 / PA2-10 ~ 12) is sent to the effect control means,
When the ninth variation pattern is determined, a ninth command (variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-11 to 13) is sent to the effect control means,
When the tenth variation pattern is determined, the tenth command (variation pattern designation command for designating PA2-13 to 15) is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to inform that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). ,
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to inform that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). ,
When the ninth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the tenth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low-base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low-base weak reach B effect), and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The fourth reach is a title display part for displaying a title display (title character) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and whether it is controlled to the advantageous state. An introductory part until the propriety of whether or not is notified,
The fifth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fifth reach (low-base strongest reach effect), and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The third reach (low base strong reach A production) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B production / low base strong reach C production) are the first reach (low base weak reach A production) and the second reach Expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The fifth reach (low base strongest reach production) includes the first reach (low base weak reach A production), the second reach (low base weak reach B production), and the third reach (low base strong reach A production). ), the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than any of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
The brightness data table for the first title display part (weak Reach system common title) is used to control the light emitting means,
A second title display part that is common to the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A production) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B production/low base strong reach C production) Control the light emitting means using the luminance data table for (strong reach system common title),
In the title display part in the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the third title display part for the fifth reach (strongest reach type strongest reach title). ,
In the introductory part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introductory part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introductory part in the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part of the third reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction),
In the introduction part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B production / low base strong reach C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction / strong reach system strong reach C introduction) to control the light emitting means,
In the introductory part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach production), the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the introductory part of the fifth reach (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction). .
According to this feature, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for the reach of 2 with high expectations and the reach of 2 with low expectations. By using the brightness data table corresponding to each, it is possible to suitably increase the period until it is notified whether or not it will be in an advantageous state, and the reach with the highest expectation is , the title display part and the introductory part are each provided with dedicated luminance data tables, which enhances interest, and as a result, suitable title display can be performed.

[Form 46]
The game machine of form 46-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be displayed by changing from the first mode (white) to the second mode (red or gold),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), if the title display (title character) is not changed to the second mode (red or gold), the first luminance data table (weak reach system common title (white)) to control the light emitting means,
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), when changing the title display (title character) to the second mode (red or gold), the second luminance data table (weak reach system common title (red) or weak reach system common title (gold)) to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), regardless of whether the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach has changed to the second mode (red or gold), common The light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the brightness data table corresponding to each introduction part is common even when the title display is not changed to the second mode in the title display part of the specific reach and when it is changed to the second mode. , to prevent an increase in cost and capacity, and to use brightness data tables corresponding to the respective title display parts, in the case where the title display is not changed to the second mode and in the case where the title display is changed to the second mode. Each of them can be suitably produced, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Form 47]
The game machine of form 47-1 is
By executing the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving the specific display result ("jackpot" special figure display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
game control means (game control microcomputer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
display means (image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4);
and a light emission control means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning port, second starting winning port),
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, the first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and the second variation pattern which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state (PA2 -2, PA2-3) and determine any one of a plurality of variation patterns including,
When the first variation pattern is determined, the first command to the effect control means ((PA2-2, PA2-3) to specify the variation pattern specification command),
When the second variation pattern is determined, the second command (PA2-2, PA2-3 to specify the variation pattern designation command) to the effect control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low-based weak reach A, B effects) includes a title display part that displays the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an introductory part up to and including
The title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) is
A first part (title start period) from when the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed until it is displayed at a fixed position;
A second part (title display period, title end period) after the title display corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed at the fixed position,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
In the first part (title start period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the light emission using the luminance data table for the first part (weak reach type title start) control means,
In the second part (title display period, title end period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the luminance data table for the second part (weak reach system title display) controlling the light emitting means using
In the introductory part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data table corresponding to the first part from when the title display starts to be displayed at the fixed position in the specific reach, and the second part after the title display is displayed at the fixed position By using the brightness data table corresponding to the , and the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part, the period for displaying the title and the period for notifying whether or not it is in an advantageous state can be suitably set. As a result, suitable title display can be performed.

[Example]
A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

[Basic description]
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

[Configuration, etc. of pachinko machine 1]
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". Incidentally, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying pending display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable piece moves to the winning ball. It is close to the device 6A and becomes a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (the second start winning opening) by moving the movable piece to the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. It is said that the mouth is open.) When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided to operate according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change-over switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the throwing rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17. FIG.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be constructed using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

[Overview of game progress]
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time-saving state) without going through the big win game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided jackpot types in which many prize balls can be obtained, jackpot types with few prize balls, or jackpot types in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability / high base state, a variable probability state is a high probability / high base state, and a normal state is also called a low probability / low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

[Progress of production, etc.]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of informing the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Board configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

[Major Operations of Main Board 11]
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not recovery conditions can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if it is possible to restart the fluctuation of the design.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state for stopping the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the winning symbols or the like, or display corresponding to the game stop state different from the losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation start command and the setting change start command are received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the winning order (also called winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of putting out balls are changed according to set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit and the ball-out rate are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the set value, the throwing rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 7 (A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1 and when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that when the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7 (B), when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that, for the case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "loss with time saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, common While only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the jackpot determination values. A number within the range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6, with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65535 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot determination values, the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65425 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. set in the range. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as those of the first special figure display result determination table.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set in the common numerical range with time reduction and the deviation is the second special symbol, when the game state is the normal state and the time reduction state, the set value Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range for time saving. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is not with the time saving is a common rate for any set value, so the gambling property depending on the set value can be prevented from becoming excessively high. In addition, for time-saving loss to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving loss reference value, in any setting value, variable display It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination of the result as being out of time saving.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the number of setting values that can be set is 6 from 1 to 6, but the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Also, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set values based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. By having different execution ratios of normal reach and super reach depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are executed. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

[Main operations of production control board 12]
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state is used, the interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S175 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

[Modified example of basic explanation]
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may include. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 131SG]
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 131SG will be described. In addition, in the description of each step of the flowchart in the characteristic part 131SG, for example, the place described as "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "131SGS1", and "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach" and "super reach". It may be abbreviated as "SP reach". Further, in the characteristic portion 131SG, "fluctuation" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed description by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side The direction will be used as a reference. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing face facing the player playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

Unlike the description of FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can set one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different display ratios of the jackpot display results. Instead, the game machine is not provided with "loss with time saving" as a variable display result, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1/319.

In addition, after turning on the power to the game machine (when the RAM clearing process is executed) or after the occurrence of the big hit, the variable display is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this embodiment) in a low probability state. Also, when the next big hit does not occur, there is a case where control is performed to a time saving state B (also referred to as a relief time saving state or a relief time saving state) among a plurality of kinds of time saving states. This relief time reduction is provided in order to rescue a player who did not get a big win despite playing the game for a long period of time (for example, to suppress the amount invested in the game). , in this embodiment, the game state is also called "play time".

In this embodiment, when controlled to the jackpot game state of jackpot A among a plurality of types of jackpots, variable display is performed 110 times in time saving state A (low probability/high base state) among a plurality of types of time saving states. Therefore, when the number of times of variable display from the end of the time saving state A to the arrival of the relief time saving is 790 times remaining, while it is controlled to the big win game state of either the big win B or the big win C among a plurality of kinds of big wins. Since 110 times of variable display is performed in the probability variable state (high probability / high base state), the number of variable display times from the end of the probability variable state to the short relief time is 900 times remaining. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times of variable display is 1100 times in the time saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming "0".

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in the lower left part of the image display device 5, it is possible to display the pending display corresponding to the first special figure pending storage in which the variable display has not yet been executed although the starting prize has been won. A first special figure reserved memory display area 130SG005D is provided, and in the lower right part of the image display device 5, a reserved display corresponding to the second special figure reserved memory that has started winning but has not yet been variable display is displayed. A displayable second special figure reservation storage display area 130SG005U is provided. At the bottom center of the image display device 5, an active display area 130SG005F is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

In addition, on the right side of the image display device 5, there is a fourth symbol 131SG005J for informing the player that the variable display is being executed, and in the center of the image display device 5, similarly to the variable display of decorative symbols, It is possible to display a small pattern 131SG005M in which variable display is executed, and in the upper right part of the image display device 5, it is the remaining variable display count until it is controlled to a time saving state B (relief time saving state) described later. It is possible to display the remaining number of relief time reduction arrival times display 131SG005Z indicating the number of relief time reduction arrival remaining times.

The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 is formed in a left game area 2L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed with a game ball. It is formed in the right game area 2R that can flow down. A game ball weakly launched by the shooting device flows down the first path as the left game area 2L, and a game ball strongly launched by the shooting device flows down the second path as the right game area 2R.

Furthermore, in the lower left part of the image display device 5, the first reservation storage display area 131SG005D showing the number of the first special figure reservation storage by the number of display of the reservation display, in the lower right part of the image display device 5, the second special figure reservation A second reserved memory display area 131SG005U is provided to indicate the number of memory by the displayed number of reserved displays. Further, at the lower center of the image display device 5, an active display area 131SG005F is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed with a first big winning hole and a second big winning hole along the flowing direction of the game balls. The first big winning hole is opened and closed so that game balls can enter and closed where game balls cannot enter by driving the solenoid 131SG082A (see FIG. 11-2) to open and close the big winning hole door (not shown). It is possible to change between states. The second big winning hole is opened and closed so that game balls can enter and closed where game balls cannot enter by driving the solenoid 131SG082B (see FIG. 11-2) to open and close the big winning door (not shown). It is possible to change between states.

Furthermore, a first count switch 131SG023A capable of detecting game balls is provided in the first big prize opening, and a second count switch 131SG023B capable of detecting game balls is provided in the second big prize opening. there is

That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 2L (first path) can win the general winning hole 10, the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, and the right game area 2R (first route). 2 path), the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, It is possible to win a prize and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

The switch circuit 110 in this embodiment is connected to the first count switch 131SG023A, the second count switch 131SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 131SG024 incorporated in the jackpot start gate 131SG042.

Between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 2L cannot win the second start winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 2R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIG. 11-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment, a first Special symbol display device 131SG004A, second special symbol display device 131SG004B capable of executing variable display of the second special symbol, first suspension display device 131SG025A capable of displaying the number of first suspension memories, capable of displaying the number of second suspension memories Second holding display device 131SG025B, normal pattern display device 131SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal patterns, normal pattern holding display device 131SG025C capable of displaying normal pattern holding memory number, number of rounds of the jackpot game during the jackpot game (jackpot Type) can be displayed round indicator 131SG131, jackpot game state, high probability / high base state (probability variable state), low probability / high base state (time-saving state), etc. A game that launches game balls toward the right game area 2R In the right-handed lamp 131SG132 that lights up in the state, the probability variable lamp 131SG133 that lights when it is in the high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the high probability / high base state (variable probability state) and the low probability / high base state (time saving state) A game information display unit is provided in which lighted time reduction lamps 131SG134 are collectively arranged. When the game state is the normal state, the right-handed lamp 131SG132 exceptionally lights up from the timing when the variable display stops when the variable display results in a big win.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 transmits game information (signals) to an external device such as a management computer of the game hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed via a terminal board (not shown). An information output circuit for output is installed.

In this embodiment, the second big winning opening is provided with a V winning opening and a discharge opening downstream of the V winning opening. A variable V winning ball device (V lid) is provided upstream of the V winning opening. The variable V winning ball device changes between a closed state and an open state by means of a solenoid. That is, the game ball flowing down in the second big winning hole can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the open state, and can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the closed state. shall flow down to the outlet without being able to pass through the

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 has a V switch 131SG023B1 that can detect, via the switch circuit 110, that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening provided downstream of the second big winning opening. and a discharge switch 131SG023B2 capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the discharge port.

Also, the effect control board 12 is connected with a vibration motor 61 built in the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32 . In addition, the lamp control board 14 has a right-handed LED 131SG031 for prompting a right-handed operation, a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that lights up during variable display of the first special symbol, and a lighted during variable display of the second special symbol. 2nd special figure LED 131SG033, 1st reservation LED 131SG034A that lights up when the number of first reservation storage is 1 to 2, and 1st reservation LED 131SG034B that lights up when the number of 1st reservation storage is 3 to 4 , a second pending LED 131SG035A that lights up when the second pending memory number is 1 to 2, a second pending LED 131SG035B that lights up when the second pending memory number is 3 to 4, and a push button 31B. A button LED 62, a movable body LED 208 built in the movable body 32, and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

FIG. 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the variation pattern type determination Random number MR3 for use, random number MR4 for determining variation pattern, random number MR5 for determining the result of normal map display, and random number MR6 for determining the initial value of MR5 are controlled to be countable. . It should be noted that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR6 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 11-3(A), but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of the random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variable display of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern determination table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns that serve as aspects, and the like are stored.

FIG. 11-3 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM101. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big win" to the big win game state is determined based on the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result. It is a table where

In the special figure display result determination table in the present embodiment, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), the special figure A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result to the big hit game state as "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), "jackpot ” is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/319.68 in this embodiment), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win gaming state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this embodiment /80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to the normal state or time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase the probability.

In the determination table stored in the ROM 101, in addition to the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. For the first special symbol), in addition to the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. ), a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big win (ball throwing rate) does not change according to the set value. may be changed.

[Jackpot type determination table]
Figures 11-3 (C1) and 11-3 (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 11-3 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 11-3 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot types in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3(D). In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are provided in which time-saving control is executed over a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. Also, these jackpots A, jackpots B, and jackpots C are maximized after the jackpot game ends by entering the V prize opening after the game ball enters the second jackpot in the first round of the jackpot game state. It is also a big hit in which probability variable control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) is a short open state (for example, 0.1 seconds) with a short open period and a long open state with a long open period. (eg, 15 seconds). In the big win A, the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the big winning game state, and in the big wins B and C, the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the big winning game state. and

In the jackpot game state by ``jackpot A'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot A", since the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state in the first round, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control cannot be executed. Since it cannot be expected, it becomes a substantial normal jackpot.

In the jackpot game state by the ``big win B'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot B", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so that it is extremely easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit.

In the jackpot game state by ``jackpot C'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to tenth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot C", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so that it is extremely easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this. More than one type may be provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. , and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit B. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening in the first round of the jackpot game state at a rate of 50%, thereby winning the jackpot. Both the variable probability control and the time saving control are implemented after the end of the game. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening in the first round of the big win game state with a probability of 100%, so that the probability change control is performed after the big win game ends. and time saving control are both implemented.

In this embodiment, even in the case of a big hit A, it is possible to win a V prize when the V cover is in a short-circuited open state, but it is extremely rare, so if a big hit A is made , V will not be won and the variable probability control will not be executed. Also, even in the case of the big win B and the big win C, it is possible that the V prize cannot be won when the V lid is in the long open state, but it is extremely rare, so the big win B and the big win C are made. In this case, it is assumed that the V prize is won and the variable probability control is executed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for judging the jackpot type. It may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, 110 times probability variation control and time saving control can be executed after the jackpot game state is finished. The invention is not limited to this, for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, time saving control may be provided 1009 times (probability variable state: 110 times + time saving state A: 899 times). By doing so, the interest is improved because the next big hit is rich, and after the end of the big hit D, even if the big hit does not occur in the 110-time probability change state and the probability change control ends, the time saving state A (low probability After executing 899 times of variable display without generating a big hit in the high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving state) to be described later by executing the variable display only once in the normal state. Therefore, interest increases.

[time reduction number of times]
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition opportunity. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in the present embodiment, when a game ball does not win a prize in the probability variable region due to the occurrence of a big hit A, (1) time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) low Time-saving state A in which definite control is performed 110 times (in this embodiment, it is controlled to a battle rush (BATTLE RUSH) with a time-saving number of times of 110 times. In addition, either a big hit B or a big hit C occurs and the game is played in the probability variable area When the ball wins, (1) time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) probability-variable control is performed 110 times (in this embodiment, a pole battle rush (pole/BATTLE RUSH)).In addition, when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled to the big hit in the low-probability state, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low-probability Control is performed 1100 times in a time-saving state B (in this embodiment, the play time is 1100 times of time-saving).However, after the time-saving state B ends, it is 900 again without being controlled to a big hit in a low-probability state. Even if the change is performed twice, it is not controlled to the time saving state B again based on this.

In addition, the relief time reduction arrival rate is a rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time-saving state via the relief time-saving is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this embodiment) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the relief time-saving arrival rate K is It can be calculated as follows.

K={(1−ML)̂n}×100
(K = time saving arrival rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable display count)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in the present embodiment is approximately 1/319, the relief short-time arrival rate K is 5.9%. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine in which setting values can be set, the lower the jackpot probability is, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate is, so that even if the jackpot probability is a low setting value, the player can be saved. can do.

[Variation pattern]
11-5 and 11-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation patterns in this embodiment. The variation patterns of this embodiment are roughly divided into a losing variation pattern in which the variable display result is a loss and a big hit variation pattern in which the variable display result is a big win.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the loss variation pattern is roughly divided into non-reach loss variation patterns (variation patterns whose variation pattern type is non-reach) and normal reach. Normal reach variation pattern (variation pattern type is normal reach variation pattern), reach performance of low base weak super reach A or reach of low base weak super reach B in normal state (low base state) Low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern) that will be missed when the production is executed, and finally low base strong super reach A reach in the normal state (low base state) Variation pattern of low base strong super reach A (variation pattern type is low base strong super reach A) that is lost after the production is executed, and finally low base strong super reach B in the normal state (low base state) Low base strong super reach B fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is low base strong super reach B fluctuation pattern), which is lost after the reach production is executed, and finally low base strong super in the normal state (low base state) Low base strong super reach C fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is low base strong super reach C fluctuation pattern), which is lost when the reach effect of reach C is executed, and finally low base in the normal state (low base state) Low base strongest super reach fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is low base strongest super reach fluctuation pattern), time saving state A or probability change state (high base state) final The high-base super reach A reach effect is executed on the high-base super reach A fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is high-base super reach A fluctuation pattern), time-saving state A or probability variable state (high base state) Finally, the high base super reach B reach effect is executed and the high base super reach B fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is high base super reach B fluctuation pattern), time saving state A or probability variable state (high In the base state), the high base super reach C fluctuation pattern (variation pattern type is high base super reach C fluctuation pattern), time saving state A or fixed variable In the state (high-base state), a high-base super reach D variation pattern (variation pattern type is a high-base super reach D variation pattern) in which the reach effect of the high base super reach D is finally executed and is lost is provided. ing.

As a variation pattern whose variation pattern type is non-reach, when the special figure variation time is 12000 ms and the number of pending memories of the target special figure of variable display is 2 or less in the normal state, no reach performance is executed. PA1-1, the special figure fluctuation time is 5000 ms, and when the number of pending memories of the target special figure of variable display in the normal state is 3, no reach production is executed PA1-2, the special figure fluctuation time It is 2000 ms, PA1-3 in which no reach effect is executed during time saving control (time saving state A or probability variable state), special figure fluctuation time is 500 ms, and any reach in time saving control (time saving state B) There are provided four types of variation patterns PA1-4 in which no effect is executed.

As a variation pattern with normal reach as the variation pattern type, there is provided one type of variation pattern of PA2-1, which has a special figure variation time of 20000 ms and loses when the reach performance of normal reach is executed.

As a variation pattern with a low base weak super reach, the variation pattern type is a special figure variation time of 43000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed PA2-2, special figure variation time It is 53000 ms, and two types of fluctuation patterns of PA2-3 are provided in which the low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed and loses.

As a variation pattern with a low base strong super reach A variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 63000 ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strong super reach A reach effect is performed. PA2-4, which is executed and lost, has a special figure fluctuation time of 73000 ms, and after the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach performance of low base strong super reach A is executed and lost. PA2-5, the special figure fluctuation time is 40000 ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B. There are provided three types of fluctuation patterns PA2-6.

As a variation pattern with a low base strong super reach B as a variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 78000 ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strong super reach B reach effect is performed. PA2-7, which is executed and lost, has a special figure fluctuation time of 83000 ms, and after the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach performance of low base strong super reach B is executed and lost. PA2-8, the special figure fluctuation time is 45000 ms, and the reach production of low base strong super reach B is executed without executing the reach production of low base weak super reach A and low base weak super reach B. There are provided three types of fluctuation patterns PA2-9.

As a variation pattern with a low base strong super reach C as a variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 88000 ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strong super reach C reach effect is performed. PA2-10, which is executed and lost, has a special figure fluctuation time of 93000 ms, and after the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach performance of low base strong super reach C is executed and lost. PA2-11, the special figure fluctuation time is 50000 ms, and the reach effect of the low base strong super reach C is executed without executing the reach effects of the low base weak super reach A and the low base weak super reach B. There are provided three types of variation patterns PA2-PA12.

As a variation pattern with the lowest base strongest super reach as the variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 98000 ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strongest super reach reach effect is executed. PA2-13, which is missed, has a special figure fluctuation time of 103000 ms, and after the reach production of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach production of low base strongest super reach is executed PA2-14 which is missed , The special figure fluctuation time is 60000 ms, and the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach is executed without executing the reach performance of low base weak super reach A and low base weak super reach B. PA2- 15 three types of variation patterns are provided.

As a variation pattern with a high-base super reach A as a variation pattern type, there is one type of variation pattern of PA2-16, which has a special figure variation time of 30000 ms and is missed when the high base super reach A reach effect is executed. is provided. As a variation pattern with a high-base super reach B variation pattern type, there is one type of variation pattern PA2-17 that has a special figure variation time of 30000 ms and will be missed when the high base super reach B reach effect is executed. is provided. As a variation pattern with a high-base super reach C, the variation pattern type is a special figure variation time of 30000 ms, and there is one type of variation pattern of PA2-18 that will be missed when the high-base super reach C reach effect is executed. is provided. As a variation pattern with a high-base super reach D, the variation pattern type is a special figure variation time of 30000 ms, and there is one type of variation pattern PA2-19 that will be missed when the high-base super reach D reach effect is executed. is provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-6, as the jackpot variation pattern, similar to the loss variation pattern, non-reach, normal reach, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, Variation patterns of variation pattern types of low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D are provided.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the variation pattern type is a non-reach variation pattern, the special figure variation time is 500 ms + 15000 ms, and during time saving control (time saving state B) any reach in There is provided one kind of variation pattern of PB1-18 in which no effect is executed.

As the variation pattern of the normal reach type variation pattern, there is provided one type of variation pattern of PB1-1 which has a special figure variation time of 20000 ms + 15000 ms and is a big hit when normal reach performance is executed.

As a variation pattern with low base strong super reach A as the variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 63000 ms + 15000 ms, and after the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach performance of low base strong super reach A is performed. PB1-2 which is executed and becomes a big hit, the special figure variation time is 73000ms+15000ms, and after the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super reach B is executed, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base strong super reach A is executed to make a big hit. PB1-3, the special figure fluctuation time is 40000 ms + 15000 ms, and the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A is executed without executing the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A and the low base weak super reach B. Three types of variation patterns of PB-4 are provided.

As a variation pattern with low base strong super reach B as the variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 78000 ms + 15000 ms, and after the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach performance of low base strong super reach B is performed. PB1-5 which is executed and becomes a big hit, the special figure variation time is 83000ms+15000ms, and after the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super reach B is executed, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base strong super reach B is executed to make a big hit. PB1-6, the special figure fluctuation time is 45000 ms + 15000 ms, and the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B is executed without executing the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A and the low base weak super reach B. Three types of variation patterns PB1-7 are provided.

As a variation pattern with a low base strong super reach C as a variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 88000 ms + 15000 ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strong super reach C reach effect is performed. PB1-8 which is executed and becomes a big hit, the special figure variation time is 93000 ms + 15000 ms, and after the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super reach B is executed, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base strong super reach C is executed to make a big hit. PB1-9, the special figure fluctuation time is 50000 ms + 15000 ms, and the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C is executed without executing the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A and the low base weak super reach B. Three types of variation patterns PB1-10 are provided.

As a variation pattern with the lowest base strongest super reach as the variation pattern type, the special figure variation time is 98000 ms + 15000 ms, and after the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach is executed. PB1-11 that becomes a big hit, PB1-12 that has a special figure fluctuation time of 103000 ms + 15000 ms, and after the reach performance of the low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach is executed and the big hit PB1-12 , The special figure fluctuation time is 60000 ms + 15000 ms, and the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach is executed without the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A and the low base weak super reach B, and the big hit PB1- Thirteen three types of variation patterns are provided.

As a variation pattern with high base super reach A as a variation pattern type, there is one type of variation pattern of PB1-14, which is a special figure variation time of 30000 ms + 15000 ms, and a hit performance is executed with high base super reach A. is provided. As a variation pattern with a high-base super reach B as a variation pattern type, there is one type of variation pattern of PB1-15, which is a special figure variation time of 30000 ms + 15000 ms, and a hit performance is executed with a high base super reach B. is provided. As a variation pattern of high-base super reach C, the variation pattern type is a special figure variation time of 30000 ms + 15000 ms, and one type of variation pattern of PB1-16 that becomes a big hit by executing the reach effect of high base super reach C. is provided. As a variation pattern with a high-base super reach D as a variation pattern type, there is one type of variation pattern of PB1-17 that has a special figure variation time of 30000 ms + 15000 ms and a hit performance of a high base super reach D is executed. is provided.

[Variation pattern type determination table/Variation pattern determination table]
The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes a plurality of variation pattern type determination tables for determining the variation pattern type according to the game state and the variable display result, the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern type determination table, the game state, the variable It also includes a plurality of variation pattern type determination tables for determining a variation pattern according to the display result and the number of reserved memories of special symbols for which variable display is performed (the number of reserved memories for variable display).

In the variation pattern setting process in this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table is selected according to the game state and variable display result. Next, the selected variation pattern type determination table is compared with the random number MR3 read at step 131SGS55 of the special symbol normal processing to determine the variation pattern type.

For example, if the game state is a normal state and the variable display result is a loss, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss shown in FIG. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing with the value of the numerical value MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3299, the variation pattern type is determined as "non-reach", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 3300 to 4053, the variation pattern type is set to "normal reach". If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4054 to 4073, the variation pattern type is determined to be "low base weak super reach", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4074 to 4081, the variation pattern If the type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A" and the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 4082 to 4089, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B" and the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 4090 to 4094, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strong super reach C", and when the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4095, the variation pattern type is "low base strongest super reach". to decide.

Also, if the game state is the time saving state A or the probability variable state and the variable display result is lost, select the loss variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), and the loss variation pattern determination The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the table B and the value of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3849, the variation pattern type is determined as "non-reach", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 3850 to 4048, the variation pattern type is set to "normal reach". If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4049 to 4066, the variation pattern type is determined as "high base super reach A", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4067 to 4083, the variation pattern If the type is determined to be "high base super reach B" and the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 4084 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C" and the value of random number MR3 is 4095 If it is within the range of , the variation pattern type is determined as "high base super reach D".

Also, if the game state is the time saving state B and the variable display result is lost, select the loss variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the values of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined as "non-reach".

In addition, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing with the value of the numerical value MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 1298, the variation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 1299 to 1934, the variation pattern type is set to "low base strong super Reach A", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 1935-2676, the variation pattern type is decided as "low base strong super reach B", and the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 2677-3706 If there is, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strong super reach C", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 3707 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strongest super reach".

Also, if the game state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state and the variable display result is lost, select the big hit variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7 (E) and determine the big hit variation pattern The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the table B and the value of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 25, the variation pattern type is determined as "normal reach", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 26 to 975, the variation pattern type is set to "high base super reach A", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the variation pattern type is decided to be "high base super reach B", and the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 2076 to 3380 determines the variation pattern type to be "high base super reach C", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, determines the variation pattern type to be "high base super reach D".

Also, if the game state is the time saving state B and the variable display result is lost, select the big hit variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (F), and the loss variation pattern determination table C The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the values of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined as "non-reach".

After determining the variation pattern type as described above, depending on the game state and the variable display result and the reserved memory number of special symbols to execute the variable display (variable display target pending number) Figure 11-8 ~ Figure 11-10 Select one of the variation pattern determination tables shown in , compare the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number MR3 read at step 131SGS55 of the special symbol normal process, and determine the variation pattern type.

For example, if the variable display result is lost, the game state is the normal state, and the variable display target reserved memory number is 0 to 2, select the loss variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 11-8 (A). , the variation pattern is determined by comparing the variation pattern determination table A for failure and the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA1-1. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-1. If the determined variation pattern type is low base weak super reach, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-2 if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 199, and the value of the random number MR4 is 200 to 255. If it is within the range of , the fluctuation pattern is determined as PA2-3.

If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-4, and the value of the random number MR4 is 89 to If it is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-4, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174-255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-5. If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-7, and the value of the random number MR4 is 89 to If it is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-8, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174-255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-9.

If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-10, and the value of random number MR4 is 89 ~ If it is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-11, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174-255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-12. If the determined variation pattern type is the lowest base strongest super reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-13, and the value of the random number MR4 is 89 to 173. If the random number MR4 is within the range of 1743 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-15.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost, the game state is the normal state, and the number of variable display target pending memories is 3, the change pattern determination table B for loss shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is selected, A variation pattern is determined by comparing the deviation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number MR4. At this time, when the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA1-2. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-1.

If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-4, and the value of the random number MR4 is 89 to If it is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-4, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 173-255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-5. If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-7, and the value of the random number MR4 is 89 to If it is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-8, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174-255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-9.

If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-10, and the value of random number MR4 is 89 ~ If it is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-11, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174-255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-12. If the determined variation pattern type is the lowest base strongest super reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-13, and the value of the random number MR4 is 89 to 173. If the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-15.

Also, if the variable display result is lost and the gaming state is the time saving state A or the probability variable state, select the loss variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), and the loss variation pattern determination table A variation pattern is determined by comparing C with the value of the random number MR4. At this time, when the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA1-3. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach A, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-16. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach B, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA2-17. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-18. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach D, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-19.

Also, if the variable display result is lost and the gaming state is the time saving state B, the deviation variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 11-9 (B) is selected, and the deviation variation pattern determination table D A variation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of the numerical value MR4. At this time, when the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PA1-4.

Further, when the variable display result is a big hit and the game state is a normal state, the big hit variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of MR4. At this time, when the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-1.

If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-2, and the value of the random number MR4 is 82 ~ If it is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-3, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167-255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-4. If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-5, and the value of the random number MR4 is 82 ~ If it is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-6, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167-255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-7.

If the determined variation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-8, and the value of the random number MR4 is 82 ~ If it is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-9, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167-255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-10. If the determined variation pattern type is the lowest base strongest super reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-11, and the value of the random number MR4 is 82 to 166. If the random number MR4 is within the range of 167-255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-13.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit and the game state is the time saving state A or the probability variable state, the big hit variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-10 (B) is selected, and the big hit variation pattern determination table A variation pattern is determined by comparing B with the value of the random number MR4. At this time, when the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-1 if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0-255.

When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0-255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-14. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach B, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-15. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-16. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach D, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-17.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit and the game state is the time saving state B, the big hit variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of the numerical value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, the variation pattern is determined as PB1-18 if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0-255.

[Expectation level of super reach performance]
When the variation pattern type and variation pattern are determined as described above, the expected degree of big hit is as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to (C). The degree of expectation of a super reach effect is the ratio of a big hit when the corresponding super reach effect is executed. It is a value calculated by dividing by the sum of the percentage of big hits by executing and the percentage of losing by executing the corresponding super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), among the reach effects of super reach executed when the game state is the normal state, from the reach effects of low base weak super reach A and low base weak super reach B, Since there is no direct hit, the expected hit level is 0%. C, Low Base Strongest Reach) may develop into a reach production, and the expectation of development from low base weak super reach A to other super reach reach production is about 44%, low base weak super reach B to other The degree of expectation for the development of reach performance of super reach is about 68%. The degree of expectation for the development of a super reach effect is the rate at which another super reach effect develops when the corresponding super reach effect is executed. The ratio of development is the sum of the ratio of developing to other super reach effects by executing the corresponding super reach effect and the ratio of losing without developing to other super reach effects by executing the corresponding super reach effect. It is a value calculated by division.

In addition, among the reach effects of the super reach that are executed when the game state is the normal state, the hit expectation level of the reach effect of the low base strong super reach A is about 20%, and the reach effect of the low base strong super reach B is about 20%. The expected degree of big hit is about 25%, the expected degree of reach performance of low base strong super reach C is about 35%, and the expected degree of reach performance of low base strongest super reach is about 55%. In addition, low base strong super reach A to C, low base strongest super reach jackpot expectations for reach performance are when developed from low base weak super reach A, when developed from low base weak super reach B, and low base The expected level of jackpot is different between when it is executed directly without passing through weak super reach A and B, and the expected level of hit performance of low base strong super reach A developed from low base weak super reach A is about 19. Approximately 20%, the reach performance of low-base strong super reach A developed from low-base weak super reach B is about 20%, and the reach performance of low-base strong super reach A is performed directly without going through B. The expectation level is about 21%, and the expectation of the hit performance of low base strong super reach B developed from low base weak super reach A is about 24%, low base strong super reach B developed from low base weak super reach B. The expected hit of the reach effect is about 25%, and the expected hit of the reach effect of the low base strong super reach B, which is directly executed without going through B, is about 27%, and has developed from the low base weak super reach A. Low base strong super reach C has a reach expectation of about 33%, and low base strong super reach C developed from low base weak super reach B. The reach expectation of reach C is about 35%, go through B. The hit expectation of the low-base strong super reach C, which is directly executed without being played, is about 37%, and the hit expectation of the low-base strongest super reach, developed from the low-base weak super reach A, is about 53%. Low base weak super reach B The reach expectation of the low base strongest super reach that developed from B is about 55%. 57%.

As shown in FIG. 11-11(B), the hit expectation of the high-base super reach A reach performance executed when the game state is the time-saving state A is about 14%, and the reach performance of the high-base super reach B is about 14%. The degree of expectation for a big hit is approximately 16%, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the reach performance of the high base super reach C is approximately 27%, and the degree of expectation for a big hit in the reach performance of the high base super reach D is approximately 70%.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (C), the high base super reach A reach performance executed when the game state is a variable probability state The hit expectation degree of the reach performance of the high base super reach A is about 40%, and the reach performance of the high base super reach B is about 40%. The degree of expectation for big hit is about 45%, the degree of expectation for big hit of reach performance of high base super reach C is about 60%, and the degree of expectation of big hit of reach performance of high base super reach D is about 90%.

As will be described later, in the super ready-to-win effect, it is possible to display an expectation indication display that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit of the corresponding super ready-to-win effect by the number of stars. As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), in the reach production of low base weak super reach A and B among the super reach executed when the game state is normal state, the expectation indication display is not displayed, 3 stars for the expectation indication in the reach production of the base strong super reach A, 3.5 stars for the expectation indication in the reach production of the low base strong super reach B, expectations in the reach production of the low base strong super reach C 4 stars are displayed in the degree suggestive display, and 4.5 stars are displayed in the expected degree suggestive display in the reach performance of the lowest base strongest super reach. As shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B) and (C), 3 stars are displayed in the expectation indication display in the reach performance of the high base super reach A that is executed when the game state is the time saving state A and the variable probability state. 3.5 stars are displayed in the expectation indication display in the reach production of high base super reach B, 4 stars are displayed in the expectation indication display in reach production of high base super reach C, and high base super reach 4.5 stars are displayed in the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of D.

The same number of stars are displayed in the expectation indication display in the reach effect of super reach executed when the game state is normal and the reach effect of super reach executed when the game state is variable probability state. However, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and (B), even if the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display is the same, the suggested jackpot expectations are not the same. When the number of stars displayed in the degree indication display is the same, the super which is executed when the gaming state is a probability variable state than the reach effect of the super reach which is executed when the gaming state is a normal state Reach's reach production suggests a higher jackpot expectation.

In addition, even if it is a super ready-to-win reach effect that is executed when the game state is a normal state or a super ready-to-win reach effect that is executed when the game state is a variable probability state, the expectation level indication display Every time the number of stars displayed in increases by 0.5, the suggested jackpot expectation increases, but as shown in FIGS. As the number of stars increases in the expectation degree suggestion display of the reach performance, the suggested increase amount of the jackpot expectation degree increases. Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and (B), when the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display increases from 3 to 3.5, the amount of increase in the expectation of the jackpot is It is the same whether it is a super ready-to-win reach effect executed when the game state is a normal state or a super ready-to-win reach effect to be executed when the game state is a variable probability state, but the degree of expectation When the number of stars displayed in the suggestion display increases from 3.5 to 4 and from 4 to 4.5, the amount of increase in the expected degree of jackpot is performed when the game state is the normal state. The ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win that is executed when the game state is in the variable probability state is larger than the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win.

[Production control command]
FIG. 11-13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIGS. 11-13(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8C00H is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. ``Different EXT data is set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which one of a plurality of types should be used as the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot.

As for the variable display result specifying command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13B, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command with a variable display result of "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result.

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation designation command for designating the stop (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. be.

The command 9000H is an initialization designation (power-on designation) command for displaying an initial screen when the power is turned on in the image display device 5 . The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command for displaying a power failure recovery screen indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered from the power failure (power failure) state on the image display device 5 .

The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the jackpot game state.

In the jackpot start designation command and the jackpot end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command and the jackpot end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data are set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state (for example, "1" to "10").

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify and display the special figure reserved storage number in the first reserved storage display area 132SG005D or the like. Command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number in the second reserved storage display area 132SG005U or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command designating the winning determination result at the start winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command for designating the variable category of the winning determination result at the start winning.

The command D100H is a jackpot start switch passage notification command for notifying that the game ball has passed the jackpot start switch 131SG024 in a state where the variable display result is a jackpot, that is, the start of the jackpot game. The command D200H is a V winning notification command for notifying that the game ball has passed through the V switch 131SG023B1 in the jackpot game state, ie, that the game state is controlled to the probability variable state after the jackpot game ends.

Command E1XXH is a remaining time saving frequency notification command for notifying the remaining time saving control frequency in the time saving state (time saving state A) excluding relief working time saving. Command E2XXH is a remaining probability variable count notification command for notifying the remaining probability variable control count in the probability variable state.

The command F100H is a right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying lighting of the right-handed LED 131SG031. The command F101H is a right-handed LED extinguishing notification command for notifying that the right-handed LED 131SG031 is turned off.

Command 91XXH is a restoration time reduction time number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the value of the relief time reduction counter by converting it into a hexadecimal number at the time of power restoration. In the recovery time reduction time count specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), each digit (1st digit, 2nd digit, 3 digit, fourth digit), different EXT data is set.

In the recovery time reduction time number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction time number designation 1 commands that specify the first digit of the value of the relief time reduction number is. Commands 9110H to 911FH are restoration time reduction number designation 2 commands that designate the second digit of the value of the number of times of restoration. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction number designation 3 commands that designate the third digit of the value of the number of times of reduction in restoration time. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction number designation 4 commands that designate the fourth digit of the value of the number of times of reduction in restoration time.

Command 94XXH is a relief time reduction number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until relief time reduction is achieved. In the relief time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. .

In the relief time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (D), the command 9400H is a relief time reduction number A designation command that designates that the relief time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a relief time reduction number B designation command that designates that the remaining 1 to 125 times until the relief time reduction is reached. The command 947EH is a relief time reduction number C designation command that specifies that there are 126 remaining times until the relief time reduction is reached. The command 947FH is a relief time reduction number D designation command that specifies that the remaining 127 times or more is reached until the relief time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction is achieved. In the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time reduction is 100 times, the command 9601H is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining variable display number is 700 times, relief A command 9607H is transmitted as the time saving number of times 1 designation command. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration display specifying command for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

[Game control data holding area]
The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-2 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 131SG150 as shown in FIGS. It is The game control data holding area 131SG150 shown in FIG. 11-14 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 131SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 131SG152, A game control timer setting unit 131SG153, a game control counter setting unit 131SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A is a special feature that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the upper limit that can store the pending data (holding storage) in the second special figure pending storage unit 131SG151B is always four regardless of the game state. The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 131SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) occurs It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the upper limit that can store the pending data (holding storage) in the second special figure pending storage unit 131SG151B is always four regardless of the game state. The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 131SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to store a maximum of four pending memories as the first special figure pending memory (a pending memory that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 131SG151A), and a second special figure pending memory ( It is possible to store up to four pending memories as a pending memory that can be stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 131SG151B.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) may be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

In addition, at the time of execution of the variable display, the CPU 103, first, if there is a second special figure reservation memory in the special symbol normal processing (see FIG. 6), random numbers MR1 to MR4 from the second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B After reading out, the storage contents of the second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B are shifted. That is, when the numerical values of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as the pending storage of the pending number 1 of the second special figure pending storage unit 131SG151B, the CPU 103 stores the random values stored as the pending storage of the pending number 1. The values of MR1 to random number MR4 are read, the pending memory of the pending number 1 is erased, and the pending memory stored as the pending memory of the pending number 2 is set as the pending memory of the pending number 1 and the pending memory of the pending number 3. The reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 2 and the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 4 are re-stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 3.例文帳に追加

Moreover, CPU103 determines whether the 1st special figure reservation memory exists, when the reservation memory is not memorize|stored in 2nd special figure reservation storage part 131SG151B. When the first special figure reservation storage exists, after reading the random values MR1 to MR4 from the first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A, shift the storage contents of the first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A. That is, when the numerical values of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as the pending storage of the holding number 1 of the first special figure holding storage unit 131SG151A, the CPU 103 stores the random values stored as the holding storage of the holding number 1 The values of MR1 to random number MR4 are read, the pending memory of the pending number 1 is erased, and the pending memory stored as the pending memory of the pending number 2 is set as the pending memory of the pending number 1 and the pending memory of the pending number 3. The reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 2 and the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 4 are re-stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 3.例文帳に追加

Then, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B (if the variable display result is a big hit, the random value Judgment of jackpot type based on MR2) is executed), in the variation pattern determination process (see FIG. 6), a variation pattern that differs according to the number of pending memories of the game state, the variable display result, and the special symbol that executes the variable display After determining the variation pattern type using the type determination table, the variation pattern is determined using a different variation pattern determination table according to the determined variation pattern type, game state, number of retained memories, and the like.

That is, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 can determine a variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of pending memories obtained by subtracting 1 from the pending memory just before the variable display.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 131SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 131SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it was detected by the gate switch 21, and the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 131SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 131SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 131SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 131SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 131SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR6 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

[Production control data holding area]
The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 131SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 131SG190 shown in FIG. 11-15 (A) includes a production control flag setting unit 131SG191, a production control timer setting unit 131SG192, a production control counter setting unit 131SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 131SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 131SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 131SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 131SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 131SG192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 131SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 131SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 131SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 131SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A as shown in FIG. In the startup winning command buffer 131SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory corresponding areas) are provided. In addition, in the start winning command buffer 131SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ) is provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A are the area for storing these start winning prize designation commands and the symbol designation command. The storage area, the area for storing the variable category designation command, the area for storing the pending storage number notification command, and the area for storing the pending display flag are associated with the number of pending storage, and the first special figure pending storage And a storage area (entry) for storing separately in the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition is satisfied is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B in FIG. Deleted. Then, the storage contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted to upper storage areas one by one.

In the active display buffer 131SG194B, as described above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the contents of the reserved memory ( Data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 11-15(C), a storage area similar to the receive command buffer 131SG194A at the time of start winning is provided. That is, an area for storing the start opening winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending memory number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag , is provided.

In this embodiment, if the starting winning is generated when the variable display is not executed and the reserved memory does not exist, the starting opening winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category command, the reserved memory based on the starting winning The number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 131SG194B without going through the reception command buffer 131SG194A at the time of start winning. It should be noted that the pending display flag is set by executing a pre-reading notice setting process (S161) described later by the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

Then, the storage contents of the active display buffer 131SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure per waiting process executed when ending the variable display.

The suspended display flag is a flag indicating the display mode of the active display corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display being executed. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, it is possible to suggest the ratio of control to the jackpot game state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (the value of the pending display flag).

[Start Winning Judgment Process]
FIG. 11-16 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (131SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (131SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (131SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation storage number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation storage number counter provided in game control counter setting section 131SG154, it should have specified the number of the 1st special figure reservation storage. 131SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (131SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "1" (131SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 131SGS101 (131SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage has reached the upper limit at 131SGS102 (131SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (131SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (131SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (131SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, it is sufficient if the number of second special figure reservation memory can be specified. In 131SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (131SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "2" (131SGS106). .

After executing either of the processes of 131SGS103 and 131SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (131SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (131SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 131SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the hit type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154. Random number MR2, random number MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern, and random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (131SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way and the starting port buffer value are stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit (131SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of hit determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit". is used to determine the big hit type/small hit type when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The random number MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern and the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the processing of 131SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 131SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (131SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After the process of 131SGS111, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process (131SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (131SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the processing of 131SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (131SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 131SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 131SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS116), and then the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

[Random value determination process when winning a prize]
FIG. 11-17(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in 131SGS 112 of FIG. 11-17 as the winning random number determination processing. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbols) is set to "big hit" by the special symbol normal processing (FIG. 6), and the state of the jackpot game is entered. A determination is made as to whether or not to control. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 6), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in S112. Then, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a special figure display result. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result will be a "big hit", and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc., As will be described later, pre-reading notice such as panel display effect and pending notice effect will be executed.

11-17, the CPU 103 first identifies the game state (step 131SGS121) and selects the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3(B) (step 131SGS122). . In step 131SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 extracted in step 131SGS109 with the display result determination table, and determines whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range.

If the random number MR1 is out of the jackpot determination range, that is, if the result of the variable display is a loss, transmission setting of a symbol designation command corresponding to the loss is performed (step 131SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 131SGS126b). If the game state is the normal state, select the losing variation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7(A) and proceed to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126c).

If the game state is not the normal state, it is further determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state B (step 131SGS126d). If the gaming state is not the time saving state B, that is, if the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state, select the variation pattern type determination table B for loss shown in FIG. Step 131SGS126e), if the gaming state is the time saving state B, select the losing variation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (C) and proceed to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126f).

Further, in step 131SGS123a, when the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to the jackpot (step 131SGS129). Then, it is determined whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 131SGS130a). If the game state is a normal state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. If the big hit variation pattern type determination table B shown and the gaming state is the time saving state B, select the big hit variation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. , step 131SGS130d, step 131SGS130e).

At step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern type determination table with the random number MR3 extracted at step 131SGS109, and determines the variation category from non-reach, super reach, and others (normal reach). For example, if the random value MR3 is a non-reach variation pattern type, the variation category is determined as non-reach, and if the random value MR3 is a normal reach variation pattern type, the variation category is determined as other (normal reach), and random Numerical value MR3 is low base weak super reach A/B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strong super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B. , high base super reach C, or high base super reach D, the fluctuation category may be determined as super reach. Then, the variable category designation command (any one shown in FIGS. 11-17(B)) according to the determination result is set to be transmitted, and the random value determination process at the time of winning is completed (step 131SGS132).

In addition, the command set for transmission is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing shown in FIG. 5 by the CPU 103 .

[Game control main processing]
11-18 are flow charts showing the game control main processing in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, when the effect control command for instructing recovery from power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction number counter for counting the remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction. Then, the value obtained by converting the current relief time reduction counter value into hexadecimal is set, and control is performed to transmit a recovery time relief time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the current value of the relief time-saving number counter and performs control to transmit a relief time-saving number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0014). For example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 125 times, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9401H as a relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the RAM clear processing is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the recovery processing is executed, the relief time reduction number designation command is transmitted, and the remaining variable until the current relief time reduction You will be notified of the number of impressions.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when power is restored, aside from the command at the time of restoration, the command for specifying the number of times of recovery and the number of times of recovery is transmitted. do not have. For example, in the EXT data of the recovery command (eg, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7, a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened may be set and transmitted. .

Also, when RAM clear is requested in step S3, when there is no backup data in step S4, when there is an abnormality in the backup RAM in step S5, in the initialization process of step S8, the area of the relief time reduction counter Perform clear processing on the included area.

In addition, when the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 131SGS0015). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, "900" is set in the relief time saving number counter. That is, in the present embodiment, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is turned on, even if the variable display is executed 900 times, if no big hit occurs, the relief time is shortened and the time saving state B is entered. will be controlled. In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control command for instructing initialization to be transmitted in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set to the relief time reduction number counter, so the CPU 103 initializes It is also possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction number counter based on the transmission of the effect control command that instructs.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter ("900" in this embodiment), sets the value obtained by converting the current relief time reduction counter value into hexadecimal, and restores the time relief. Control is performed to transmit the number of times of working hours designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0016).

In this way, the setting of the relief time reduction number counter is executed before the timer interrupt processing, which is the progress processing of the game, is executed, so that the variable display is not started before the relief time reduction number counter is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably manage the number of times until relief time is shortened.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the RAM clear processing is executed at the time of turning on the power to the game machine, the case of initial setting is set to "900" in the relief time reduction counter. Not limited to this, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is not performed when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the relief time reduction number counter of the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed, and the RAM When an abnormality is detected (steps S4 and S5; No) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter may be performed.

[Time saving flag, variable probability flag]
In the present embodiment, the time saving flag can be set when any one of the conditions for being controlled to the time saving state is satisfied. The time saving flags include a time saving flag A and a time saving flag B. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) the flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The time saving flag A is set when it is controlled to the time saving state A via the big win A, the big win B, and the big win C. This time-saving flag A is set when the big hit game state of the big hit A ends, and when the time-saving state A ends (when the big hit occurs during the time-saving state A, 110 times of time-saving control ends and the normal state controlled timing).

The time saving flag B is set when it is controlled to the time saving state B controlled via the relief time saving. This time-saving flag B is when variable display is executed 900 times in which the display result does not become a big hit pattern after RAM clearing, or when the display result does not become a big win pattern in a low probability state after the end of the big win game state, variable display is performed 900 times. is executed, and when the time-saving state B ends (the timing of the big hit during the time-saving state B, the timing of the time-saving control ending 1100 times and being controlled to the normal state, etc.) .

The variable probability flag is set when the variable probability state is controlled. In this embodiment, when V is won in the first round of the big win game, when the big win game ends, the game state is controlled to the variable probability state, and a variable probability flag is set. This variable probability flag is erased at the timing when the variable probability state ends (the timing when the variable probability state becomes a big hit, the timing when the variable probability control is executed for the 110th time and the timing is controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, the variable probability flag is erased based on the 110th time since the variable display is controlled to the variable probability state when step 131SGS69A in FIG. 11-20 described later is YES.

[Special symbol normal processing]
FIGS. 11-19 and 11-20 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved memory number (step 131SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 131SGS52). Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 131SGS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 131SGS54).

In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps 131SGS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in the present embodiment, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening It may be configured to

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 131SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random random A numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 131SGS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage number buffer shift the contents of Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the contents of each save area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. , is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 131SGS57). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for winning determination from the random number buffer area (step 131SGS61), and executes the big winning determination module (step 131SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit. In this case, if the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is not set (if it is in a low probability state), the CPU 103 uses the low probability jackpot determination value to perform the big hit determination. Further, if the variable probability flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 uses the high-probability big-hit determination value to perform the big-hit determination. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the big hit determination values.

If it is determined to be a jackpot (step 131SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 131SGS64). The type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) corresponding to the value matching the random number is determined as the jackpot type (step 131SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for type determination extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a big hit (step 131SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 131SGS66.

In this embodiment, by performing the special symbol normal processing, the relief time reduction condition for controlling the relief time reduction regardless of the variable display result (big hit, loss) (the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted and set to "0") It is a configuration that can occur. In this embodiment, the time-saving state A is entered based on the big hit A, and the next big hit does not occur even if the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this embodiment). Although it is controlled to the time saving state B, it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving condition is established becomes a big hit. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving condition is established becomes a big hit, it is configured to control to the time saving state A based on the big win.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time saving state is 0 (step 131SGS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 131SGS67), and confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended when the variable display ends (step 131SGS69).

In addition, in the present embodiment, steps 131SGS66 to 131SGSS69 are executed before the counting process of the number of times of variable display until the relief time saving after step 131SGS71 to perform the subtraction process of the time saving number counter. The processing mode is not limited. For example, after executing the counting process of the number of times of variable display until the relief time saving in step 131SGS71 and thereafter, the subtraction process of the time saving number counter may be executed. In this case, for example, if it is a variable display that will be a relief time saving, if the subtraction process is executed after setting "110" to the time saving number counter (see step 131 SGS172), the value of the time saving number counter will be 1 extra Since the value is subtracted, the value of the time saving number counter may be incremented by 1 again after the subtraction process in the variable display for saving time. Moreover, you may comprise so that "111" which is one more may be set to the number-of-hours-saving counter beforehand.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 131SGS69A). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. In this embodiment, by executing the process of step 131SGS69A, when it is in the variable probability state, the processing after step 131SGS70 (especially the processing of step 131SGSS71) is not performed, so when the gaming state is the variable probability state Even if the variable display is executed (in this embodiment, during pole/battle rush), the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not subtracted. If the variable probability flag is not set (that is, if it is in the non-variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70.

In this embodiment, when the probability variation flag is set, the processing after step 131SGSS70 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. If set, the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70, but the process of step 131SGSS71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the relief time-saving number counter is not updated, the relief time-saving number designation command or the relief time-saving number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving number counter that has not been updated may be transmitted.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the relief time-saving counter is 0 at this point, the timing after it has already been controlled to the time-saving state (time-saving state B) via the relief time-saving (time-saving state B or time-saving state B The timing is controlled to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations in ), and the big hit that triggers 900 to be set to the relief time reduction number counter has not occurred. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (step 131SGS70; No), the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 131SGS71). In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the process of step 131SGS71, it is related to whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Instead, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72). If the value of the relief time-saving counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 131 SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving counter to the EXT data, and produces a relief time-saving number designation command. Control for transmission to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 131SGS73). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9401H as a relief time-saving number designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 947EH as a relief time-saving number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating control to the time reduction state B at the end of fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 131 SGS75 ). Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as EXT data, and outputs command 957FH as a relief time reduction number designation command for effect control. Control for transmission to the CPU 120 is performed (step 131SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines that the number of times the remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times (in this embodiment, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times ) (step 131SGS77). Incidentally, whether or not the number of variable display times remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by confirming the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the number of variable display times remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter to the EXT data, and produces a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control for transmission to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 131SGS78). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9601H as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608H as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) counts the number of remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction, and transmits a relief time reduction number designation command or a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to count the number of remaining variable display times until relief time saving and execute the later-described fanning effect or countdown effect.

Also, for example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "900") at the timing of the relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction is configured to occur continuously, only when the relief time reduction occurs for the first time It is configured to transmit a relief time-saving number designation command and a relief time-saving number of times 2 designation command, and when the relief time becomes short after the second time, it is configured not to transmit the relief time-saving number designation command and the relief time-saving number of times 2 designation command. Also good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step 131SGS84). In this case, for example, when it is determined to be a big win A, the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "2", and when it is determined to be a big win B, the special symbol stop symbol is "3". When it is determined to be a big win C, the stop pattern of the special design is determined to be ``7'', and when it is determined to be a loss, the stop design of the special design is determined to be ``-''. Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 131SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 131SGS86).

[Special symbol stop processing]
FIG. 11-21 is a flow chart showing special symbol stop processing (step S113) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the symbol fixing period timer is in operation (step 131SGS131). When the symbol fixation period timer is not in operation, the stop symbol of the special symbol is derived and displayed (step 131SGS132). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 131SGS133).

When the jackpot flag is set, the game state flags such as the time saving A flag, the time saving B flag, and the probability variation flag are cleared (step 131 SGS134), the time saving number counter is cleared (step 131 SGS135), and the number of times of the time saving is cleared (step 131 SGS135). The transmission setting of the jackpot start designation command is performed, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS147 (step 131SGS136). In addition, the big hit start designation|designated command by which transmission setting was carried out is transmitted with respect to the production|presentation control board 12 by CPU103 performing command control processing (refer FIG. 5).

Moreover, when the jackpot flag is not set in step 131SGS133, CPU103 determines whether the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 131SGS140). If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 131SGS147. When the relief working hours determination flag is set, the relief working hours determination flag is cleared, and the working hours saving B flag indicating that it is the working hours saving state B is set (step 131SGS141, step 131SGS142). Furthermore, while setting 1100 corresponding to the time saving state B (relief time saving) to the time saving number counter, transmission setting of the time saving state B designation command is performed (step 131SGS143, step 131SGS144). In addition, the time saving state B specification command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

In addition, the lighting of the right-handed lamp 131SG132 is started, and transmission setting of the right-handed LED lighting notification command is performed (step 131SGS145, step 131SGS146). In addition, the right hitting LED lighting notification command set for transmission is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

Then, a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, which is the symbol determination period, is set in the symbol determination period timer, and transmission setting of the symbol determination designation command is performed, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS149 (step 131SGS147, step 131SGS148). It should be noted that the symbol determination designation command set for transmission is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

In step 131SGS149, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the game state designation command according to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop processing. In addition, the game state designation command set for transmission is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

Then, in step 131SGS131, when the pattern fixing period timer is in operation, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the pattern fixing period timer by 1 (step 131SGS150), and determines whether or not the pattern fixing period timer has timed out ( Step 131SGS151). When the symbol fixing period timer has not timed out, the special symbol stopping process is terminated, and when the pattern fixing engine timer has timed out, it is determined whether or not the derived stopped symbol is a lost symbol (step 131SGS152). . When the derived stop symbol is a winning symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 131 SGS153), and the derived stop symbol is a jackpot symbol. If so, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-process, and the special symbol stop process is terminated (step 131SGS154).

[state change]
Next, state transitions in this embodiment will be described. 11-22 are state transition diagrams for explaining state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 11-22, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), when a big hit B occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability region (V switch 131SG023B1), it is controlled to the variable probability state, and the big hit is achieved. When A occurs, it is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via big hit (low probability/high base state)). In addition, although not shown, even when the big hit B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability region (V switch 131SG023B1), it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit). Also, even if it is lost, if the relief time is reduced (after RAM clear processing or the end of the probability variable state, the number of variable display times reaches 900 times without the occurrence of the next big hit, or the time reduction state After the end of 110 variable displays in A, if the number of variable displays reaches 790 times without the occurrence of the next big hit), time-saving state B (time-saving state via relief time-saving (low accuracy / high base state) ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-22, in the variable probability state (high probability/high base state), when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability region, the variable probability state is entered again. controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-22, in the time saving state A (low probability / high base state), when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable region, the probability variable state controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is again controlled. Further, in the time-saving state A, when the variable display is completed 110 times without the occurrence of a big hit, the state is controlled to the normal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-22, in the time saving state B (low probability / high base state), when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable region, the probability variable state controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is again controlled. Further, in the time-saving state B, when the variable display is completed 1100 times without occurrence of a big hit, the state is controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even if it is lost, if the relief time is reduced (after the RAM clear process or the probability change state ends, the variable display count reaches 900 times without the next big hit occurring, or if the time is reduced) When the number of times of variable display reaches 790 times without occurrence of the next big hit after completion of 110 times of variable display in state A), control is made to time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a big hit occurs during the time saving state B and the game ball does not enter the variable probability area, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A. In such a control mode, I can't limit it. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time saving number and the time saving number of times (in this embodiment, 110 times) corresponding to the case where the game ball does not enter the probability variable area (V switch 131SG023B1) are compared, and the current time saving number of times If the remaining number of times is larger, the present time saving state B may be continued as it is.

In addition, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol during the time saving state or during the variable probability state, it is a disadvantageous game for the player, so during the time saving state or during the variable probability state The state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed.

[Production control process processing/pre-reading notice]
As shown in FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24, in the pre-reading notice setting process of the present embodiment, the timing at which the start winning is generated (holding storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) By setting the pending display flag to any of 0 to 2 at the timing when the starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and pending memory number notification command are newly stored), active display or pending display is determined, and the ratio of control to the big hit game state can be suggested by the display modes of the active display and the pending display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "missing" and the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "non-reach", the pre-reading notice is not executed ( The value of the pending display flag is set to "0") is determined at a rate of 95%, and the execution of the pre-reading notice with the production pattern α (the value of the pending display flag is set to "1") is 5%. , and execution of the pre-reading notice in the effect pattern β (set the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "missing" and the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "other (normal reach)", the pre-reading notice is not executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to " 0") is determined at a rate of 90%, execution of the pre-reading notice with the production pattern α (setting the value of the pending display flag to "1") is determined at a rate of 10%, and pre-reading Execution of the notice in the performance pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "miss" and the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "super reach", the pre-reading notice is not executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0" ) is determined at a rate of 70%, execution of the pre-reading notice with the production pattern α (setting the value of the pending display flag to "1") is determined at a rate of 20%, and pre-reading notice Execution in the production pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a rate of 10%.

In addition, when the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "big hit", non-execution of pre-reading notice (setting the value of the pending display flag to "0") is determined at a rate of 5%, and pre-reading notice is executed in the effect pattern α (set the value of the pending display flag to “1”) at a rate of 30%, and the pre-reading notice is executed in the effect pattern β (the value of the pending display flag is set to “2” ) at a rate of 65%.

In addition, after the execution of the pre-reading notice setting process, the pending display/active display update process (131SGS162), the relief time reduction etc. remaining number display update process (step 131SGS163), and the relief time reduction arrival notification effect execution process (step 131SGS164) are executed. do. In the pending display/active display update processing, the processing of starting the display of the pending display or the active display in a display mode according to the value of the pending display flag, and erasing the active display from the active display area 131SG005F at the end timing of the variable display. Processing, processing of hiding or starting to display the pending display or the active display according to the progress of the effect during the variable display is executed. In the relief time-saving arrival remaining number display update process, the value of the relief time-saving arrival remaining number display 131SG005Z (see FIG. 11-1) displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced every time the variable display is started. A process of hiding or starting to display the relief time reduction reach remaining number display 131SG005Z is executed according to the progress of the production in the middle. In the relief time-saving arrival notification effect execution processing, from the end timing of the variable display when the number of variable displays reaches 900 times, the processing for executing the relief time-saving arrival notification effect for notifying that the control is made to the time-saving state B is performed. .

[Variable display start setting process]
11-25 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS601). When the first variable display start command reception flag is set, various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B. (131SGS602). In addition, the first special figure reservation storage (various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") in the reception command buffer 131SG194A at the time of starting winning is shifted one by one. (Step 131 SGS603). At this time, the various command data stored in the buffer number "1-1" are erased because there is no shift destination.

In step 131SGS601, if the first variable display start command reception flag is not ON, it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS604). When the second variable display start command reception flag is set, various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B. (131SGS605). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is shifted one by one. (Step 131 SGS 606). At this time, the various command data stored in the buffer number "2-1" are erased because there is no shift destination.

In addition, when the second special figure variable display start command reception flag is not ON, the variable display start setting process is terminated.

After executing step 131SGS603 or step 131SGS6060, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 131SGS607). Furthermore, the stop pattern of the decoration pattern is determined according to the read variation pattern designation command and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 131SGS608).

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26, when the variable display result is "missing" and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reaching loss), the stop pattern is 100% "124" or "578 , etc. (non-reach mode, non-reach out-of-range mode). Also, if the variable display result is "missing" and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach missing), 95% of the stop symbols are combined with even numbers such as "242" and "676" ( Determined as even number reach mode, even number reach out mode), and at a rate of 5% Determined as a combination of odd numbers other than 7 such as "131" and "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach out mode) do.

Also, if the variable display result is "missing" and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach missing), the stop pattern will be 80% of the even number "reach" such as "242" or "676" Determine the combination (even number reach mode, even number reach out mode), and at a rate of 19%, "131" or "545" etc. Other than 7 "Reach" combination (odd number reach mode, odd number reach out mode) , and at a rate of 1%, it is determined to be a combination of "reach" in 7 patterns such as "767" and "787" ("7" reach mode, "7" reach loss mode).

Then, when the variable display result is "big hit", the stop pattern is determined to be a combination of even numbers of "reach" such as "222" and "666" (even number reach mode, even number reach jackpot mode) at a rate of 20%. Then, at a rate of 50%, the combination of "reach" with an odd number other than 7 such as "111" and "555" is determined (odd reach mode, odd reach jackpot mode), and at a rate of 30% "777" A combination of "reach" in 7 patterns ("7" reach mode, "7" reach jackpot mode) is determined.

In other words, when the decorative pattern is "7" pattern, the probability of hitting the jackpot is the highest. It is set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit decreases in order (expectation of a big hit by decorative patterns: reach with "7" pattern > reach with odd numbered patterns other than "7" > reach with even number > no reach). Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the decoration pattern is in a ready-to-win state, and to which pattern to achieve a ready-to-win state.

In addition, in this embodiment, there is illustrated a form in which the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether the combination of even numbers of decorative patterns results in a reach or the combination of an odd number of decorative patterns results in a reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. The degree of expectation for big win may be the same regardless of the combination of decorative patterns, and the degree of expectation for big win when the degree of reach is achieved according to the size of the numbers indicated by the decorative patterns. may be different.

Returning to FIG. 11-25, the effect control CPU 120 after determining the stop pattern of the decorative pattern determines whether or not to execute the notice effect during variable display suggesting the possibility that the result of variable display will be a big hit during variable display. is executed (step 131SGS609).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table (effect control pattern) according to the variation pattern, the game state, the result of the variable display, and the determination result of the notice effect determination process during variable display (step 131 SGS610), and starts the process timer. Start (step 131SGS611).

A production control pattern is set in each process table. Specifically, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and sound control for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (131SGS612). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to commands.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern specification command (131SGS613). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (131SGS614). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172) (131SGS615).

Incidentally, in the effect processing during variable display, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each decremented by one. Then, the effect device is controlled according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and the decorative pattern is realized according to the value of the variable display time timer. Stop the variable display and set the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (S173).

[Regarding effects during variable display]
When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command designating the start of variable display in the variable display start waiting process of step S170, the variable display start setting of subsequent step S171 is performed. Based on the variable display results such as the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command in the process, the special pattern and the decoration pattern specified by the variable display result specification command, the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern (fixed decoration pattern), The mode of variable display of decorative patterns, the presence or absence of execution of ready-to-win performance, its mode, the execution start timing, etc. are determined, the performance control pattern reflecting the determination result etc. is set, and based on the set performance control pattern, decoration is performed. It controls variable display of symbols, ready-to-win production, and the like.

[Regarding production control patterns]
As shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28, the effect control pattern is set for each of the variation patterns PA1-1-4, PA2-1-19 and PB1-1-18.

As effect control patterns corresponding to the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, patterns of non-reach 1 to 4 are set in which the decoration pattern does not become the ready-to-win state and becomes non-to-win. Variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are variation patterns specified in the normal state, PA1-3 is a variation pattern selected in the time saving state A or the probability variation state, and PA1-4 is the time saving state B In the non-reach 1 to 4 patterns corresponding to each, the time until the variable display of the decorative pattern is completed is set to be different depending on the variation time according to the variation pattern. ing.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-1, a pattern is set in which a normal ready-to-win ready-to-win effect ("Normal" in the figure) is executed in which the decoration pattern is in a ready-to-win mode, and then the ready-to-win is lost. Variation pattern PA2-1 is a variation pattern specified in normal state, time saving state A, probability variation state.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-2, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach A ("low base weak A" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is lost. is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-3, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach B ("low base weak B" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is lost. is set.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-4, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach effect of the low base strong reach A ("low base strong A ”) is executed, and the pattern is set to be out of reach after that. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-5, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and further the reach effect of the low base strong reach A is executed, and then the reach is lost. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-6, a pattern is set in which after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base strong reach A is executed, and then the reach is lost.

As a production control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-7, after the reach production of normal reach, the reach production of low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach production of low base strong reach B ("low base strong B ”) is executed, and the pattern is set to be out of reach after that. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-8, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and further the reach effect of the low base strong reach B is executed, and then the reach is lost. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-9, a pattern is set in which after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base strong reach B is executed, and then the reach is lost.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-10, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach effect of the low base strong reach C is executed, and then the reach is lost. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-11, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and further the reach effect of the low base strong reach C is executed, and then the reach is lost. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-12, a pattern is set in which after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base strong reach C is executed, and then the reach is lost.

As a production control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-13, after the reach production of the normal reach, the reach production of the low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach production of the strongest low base super reach ("low base strongest" in the figure) ) is executed, and a pattern is set in which the reach is lost after that. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-14, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and further the reach effect of the low base strongest super reach is executed, and then the reach is lost. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-15, a pattern is set in which after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the lowest base strongest super reach is executed, and then the reach is lost.

All of the fluctuation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-15 are fluctuation patterns specified in the normal state.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-16, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the high base reach A ("high base A" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is lost. there is As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-17, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the high base reach B ("high base B" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is lost. there is As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-18, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the high base reach C ("high base C" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is lost. there is As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-19, after the reach effect of the normal reach, the reach effect of the high base reach D ("high base D" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is lost. there is

Variation patterns PA2-16 to 19 are all variation patterns selected in the time saving state A and the probability variation state.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-1, a pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed and then a big hit is set.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-2, after the reach performance of the normal reach, the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach performance of the low base strong reach A is executed, after which a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-3, after the reach performance of the normal reach, the reach performance of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and further the reach performance of the low base strong reach A is executed, and then a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-4, a pattern is set in which after the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach, the ready-to-win effect of the low-base strong reach A is executed, and then a big win is made.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-5, after the ready-to-reach performance of the normal reach, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super reach A is executed, and further the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base strong reach B is executed, after which a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-6, after the ready-to-reach performance of the normal reach, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super reach B is executed, and further the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base strong reach B is executed, after which a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-7, a pattern is set in which after the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach, the ready-to-win effect of the low-base strong reach B is executed, and then a big win is made.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-8, after the reach performance of the normal reach, the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach performance of the low base strong reach C is executed, after which a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-9, after the ready-to-reach performance of the normal reach, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super-reach B is executed, and further the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base strong reach C is executed, after which a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-10, a pattern is set in which after the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach, the ready-to-win effect of the low-base strong reach C is executed, and then a big win is made.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-11, after the reach performance of the normal reach, the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A is executed, and further the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach is executed, and then a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-12, after the ready-to-reach performance of the normal reach, the ready-to-reach performance of the low-base weak super-reach B is executed, and further the ready-to-reach performance of the strongest super-reach to the low-base is executed, after which a big hit is achieved. A pattern is set. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-13, a pattern is set in which after the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach, the ready-to-win effect of the lowest base strongest super ready-to-win is executed, and then a big win is made.

All of the fluctuation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-13 are fluctuation patterns selected in the normal state.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation patterns PB1-14, a pattern is set in which after the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach, the ready-to-win effect of the high base reach A is executed, and then a big win is made. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-15, a pattern is set in which after the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach, the ready-to-win effect of the high base reach B is executed, and then a big win is made. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-16, a pattern is set in which after the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the reach effect of the high base reach C is executed, and then a big win is made. As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-17, a pattern is set in which after the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the reach effect of the high base reach D is executed, and then the big hit is achieved.

The variation patterns PB1-14 to 17 are all variation patterns selected in the time saving state A and the probability variation state.

As an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-18, a pattern that results in a big hit without executing the reach effect of normal reach or super reach is set. Variation patterns PB1-18 are variation patterns selected in the time saving state B.

[About the flow of production during variable display]
FIG. 11-29 is a diagram showing the flow of effects during variable display in the normal state. The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA1-1 or PA1-2, decoration Control is performed so that the pattern is not in a ready-to-win mode and is out of reach-to-win state.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, decoration A ready-to-win performance of normal ready-to-win is executed in which the pattern is in a ready-to-win mode, and then control is performed so that if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1, the reach is lost, and specified by the variation pattern specification command. If the variation pattern is PB1-1, it is controlled so as to be a big hit.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-2, the reach effect of normal reach. After the execution, the ready-to-reach performance of the low base weak super reach A is executed, and after that, loss is reported as the performance result of the ready-to-reach performance of the low base weak super reach A, and the reach is controlled to be lost.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-3, the reach effect of normal reach. After the execution, the ready-to-reach performance of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and then the loss is reported as the performance result of the ready-to-reach performance of the low base weak super reach B, and control is performed so that the ready-to-win is lost.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-4 or PB1-2, normal reach After executing the reach effect, execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command PA2- If it is 4, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-2, the low base A big hit is notified as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance of the strong super reach A, and control is performed to achieve a big win.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-5 or PB1-3, normal reach After executing the reach effect, execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command PA2- If it is 5, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, and control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-3, the low base A big hit is notified as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance of the strong super reach A, and control is performed to achieve a big win.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-6 or PB1-4, normal reach After executing the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-6, the reach effect of low base strong super reach A Loss is notified as a performance result, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-4, a big hit is reported as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A. It is controlled so that it becomes a big hit.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-7 or PB1-5, normal reach After executing the reach effect, the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command PA2- If it is 7, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-5, the low base A big hit is reported as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance of the strong super reach B, and control is performed so as to achieve a big win.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-8 or PB1-6, normal reach After executing the reach effect, the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command PA2- If it is 8, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, and control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-6, the low base A big hit is reported as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance of the strong super reach B, and control is performed so as to achieve a big win.

Effect control CPU120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-9 or PB1-7, normal reach After executing the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, and then, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-9, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is performed. Loss is notified as a performance result, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-7, a big hit is reported as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B. It is controlled so that it becomes a big hit.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-10 or PB1-8, normal reach After executing the reach effect, execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, and then, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command PA2- If it is 10, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-8, the low base A big hit is notified as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance of the strong super reach C, and control is performed to achieve a big win.

Effect control CPU120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-11 or PB1-9, normal reach After executing the reach effect, the reach effect of the low base weak super reach B is executed, and the reach effect of the low base strong super reach C is executed, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command PA2- If it is 11, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-9, the low base A big hit is notified as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance of the strong super reach C, and control is performed to achieve a big win.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-12 or PB1-10, normal reach After executing the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, and then, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-12, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is performed. Loss is reported as a performance result, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-10, a big hit is reported as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C. It is controlled so that it becomes a big hit.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-13 or PB1-11, normal reach After executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, after that, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-13. If so, the deviation is notified as a result of the reach production of the low base strongest super reach, control is performed so that the reach is deviated, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-11, the low base strongest super A big hit is notified as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance, and control is performed so that the big win is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-14 or PB1-12, normal reach After executing the reach performance of low base weak super reach B, the reach performance of low base strongest super reach B is executed, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-14. If so, the deviation is notified as the production result of the reach production of the lowest base strongest super reach, control is performed so that the reach becomes deviation, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-12, the low base strongest super A big hit is notified as a performance result of the ready-to-win performance, and control is performed so that the big win is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-15 or PB1-13, normal reach After executing the ready-to-reach production of low base strongest super reach, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-15, the production result of low-based strongest super reach ready-to-reach production If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-13, the big win is reported as the performance result of the reach performance of the strongest super reach at the low base, and the big win is reported. Control so that

In this way, in the normal state, a big hit is notified as a production result in the reach production of the low base weak super reach A and B, and the reach production of the low base weak super reach A and B is passed through without being controlled to the big hit. Low base strong super reach A to C, low base strongest reach, low base weak super reach A, low base strong super reach A to C, low base strongest super reach executed without going through the reach production of B Only in the reach performance of the super reach, a big hit is notified as a result of the performance, and controlled to the big hit.

FIG. 11-30 is a diagram showing the flow of effects during variable display in the time saving state A and the variable probability state. Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA1-3, decoration Control is performed so that the pattern is not in a ready-to-win mode and is out of reach-to-win state.

Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1 or PB1-1 , the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and then, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1, the reach is lost, and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is If it is PB1-1, it is controlled to be a big hit.

Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-16 or PB1-14 , after executing the reach production of normal reach, execute the reach production of high base super reach A, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-16, the reach of high base super reach A Loss is notified as the effect result of the effect, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-14, the big hit is the effect result of the reach effect of the high base super reach A. It is notified and controlled to be a big hit.

Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-17 or PB1-15 , after executing the reach effect of normal reach, execute the reach effect of high base super reach B, and then if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-17, the reach of high base super reach B Loss is notified as the effect result of the performance, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-15, the big hit is the effect result of the reach performance of the high base super reach B. It is notified and controlled to be a big hit.

Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-18 or PB1-16 , After executing the reach production of normal reach, execute the reach production of high base super reach C, and then reach high base super reach C if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-18 Loss is notified as the effect result of the effect, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-16, the big hit is the effect result of the reach effect of the high base super reach C. It is notified and controlled to be a big hit.

Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-19 or PB1-17 , After executing the reach production of normal reach, execute the reach production of high base super reach D, and then reach high base super reach D if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-19 Loss is notified as the effect result of the effect, control is performed so that the reach is lost, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-17, the big hit is the effect result of the reach effect of the high base super reach D. It is notified and controlled to be a big hit.

In this way, in the time-saving state A and the variable probability state, the performance result of a big hit or a loss is notified in the reach performance of the high base super reach A to D controlled after the normal performance or the normal performance, and then controlled to the big hit or loss. Further, another ready-to-reach effect is not executed from the high base super reach A to D controlled after the normal effect.

11-31 is a diagram showing the flow of effects during variable display in time saving state B. FIG. The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state B, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA1-4, the decorative pattern reaches. It is controlled so that non-reach is out of range without becoming a mode.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state B, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-18, the decorative pattern reaches It controls so that it becomes a big hit without becoming a mode.

In this way, in the time-saving state B, it is controlled so as to always be non-reach in the case of a loss and in the case of a big hit.

[About super reach performance]
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of super reach during the variable display. The reach effect of super reach is performed in the normal state as described above. Includes high base super reach A-D reach renditions performed in . In the following, the reach effects of normal reach and super reach may be simply referred to as normal reach effects and super reach effects, respectively. Base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach reach effects, respectively, simply low base weak reach A effect, low base weak reach B effect, low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach It is sometimes called B production, low base strong reach C production, low base strongest reach production, and the reach production of high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D are respectively. They may simply be referred to as a high base reach A effect, a high base reach B effect, a high base reach C effect, and a high base reach effect.

In the super reach production, a production that suggests the possibility of a big hit is executed, and the production result of whether it will finally be a big hit (for low base weak super reach A and B, low base strong super reach A to C, This is an effect in which the result of developing to the strongest super reach at a low base or losing) is notified.

In addition, a title is set for each type of super reach effect, and in the super reach effect, the title display part where the title of the super reach effect is displayed and the effect result are notified after the title display part. It consists of an introductory part up to and.

[Regarding modified examples of low base weak reach A and B effects]
In this embodiment, as a variation pattern for executing a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, after executing a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, it develops into another super reach effect. However, after the execution of the low-base weak reach A performance, the variation pattern PB1-JA that becomes a big hit without developing into another super reach performance, and the low-base weak reach B performance. After the execution of , the configuration may include a variation pattern PB1-JB that becomes a big hit without developing into another super ready-to-win effect.

In such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-JA, After the normal reach performance is executed, the low base weak reach A performance is executed, a big hit is notified as a performance result of the low base weak reach A performance, control is performed to make the big win, and the first variable display start command or the When the second variable display start command is received and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-JB, after executing the normal reach performance, the low base weak reach B performance is executed, and the low base weak reach B performance is executed. A big win is reported as a performance result of the performance, and controlled to be a big win. Therefore, in such a configuration, in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A production, it is notified whether or not the production result will be a big hit, or it develops into another super reach production. Thus, in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach B effect, whether or not a big hit will be achieved as a result of the effect is notified, or another super reach effect develops.

In addition, after the execution of the low base weak reach A, B production, it may be a configuration that does not include a variation pattern that develops into another super reach production, and in such a configuration, in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A, B production , whether or not a big hit will be achieved as a result of the effect is notified.

Also, in the following embodiments, after the execution of the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to apply a configuration including a variation pattern that results in a big hit without developing into another super reach effect. , low base strong reach A ~ C production, low base strongest reach production, low base weak reach A production, low base weak reach A production, low base weak reach A production, low base weak reach A production , a variation pattern that becomes a loss after execution of B performance, and a determination ratio of a variation pattern that becomes a big win without developing into other super reach performance after execution of low-base weak reach A and B performances are determined.

[About low base weak reach A effect]
FIG. 11-32 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low base weak reach A effect, and FIG. 11-33 shows the execution status of the low base weak reach A effect. It is a timing chart.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base weak super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, relative As shown in FIG. 11-32(a1), the type of decorative pattern (large) designated by the variable display result designation command is displayed at a predetermined timing. ) are stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R of the image display device 5 to perform a normal ready-to-win effect in a ready-to-win mode. After that, an operation prompting effect A, which will be described later, is executed, and as shown in FIG. , the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect is started after executing the white flash effect of displaying the entire display area in white.

As shown in FIGS. 11-32 (a1) to (a3), the background (background of the sky in the daytime) during the fluctuation of the decoration pattern (large) in the normal state displayed before the white flash effect is changed to the white flash effect. After that, the background (corridor background) of the low base weak reach A production is switched to, and the decorative pattern (large) that was displayed in the reach mode before the white flash production is larger than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash production. It switches to the reach mode of the small decorative pattern (small).

As shown in FIG. 11-33, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect, a part of the title characters of the low base weak reach A effect “Catch Bakuchu!” The title start period from when it is done until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when the title character "Catch Bakuchu!" Catch it!" disappears and the title end period until it switches to the introduction part.

When shifting to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the display of the title start period. In the title start period of the low base weak reach A production, as shown in FIGS. Out of the left and right decorative patterns (small), they are made to overlap with the left decorative pattern (small), and then the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!" Let When the title character "Catch Bakuchu!" is stationary at a fixed position, part of the title character "Catch Bakuchu!" be done.

As the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base weak reach A production During the start period, even if the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the reach mode are numbers "1" to "9", part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" Will be the left and right decorations of the reach mode Among the patterns (small), it appears in a manner that overlaps with the decoration pattern (small) on the left side, and when the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" It is displayed in a mode in which a part overlaps with both the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!" In the title display period of the low base weak reach A effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (a4) to (a5), the enemy character " Bakuchu" appears, and below the title text "Catch Bakuchu!", the subtitle "Try to catch it if you can!" The voice of the words displayed as subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-33, the voice reading out the title is not output. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-33, the title display period of the low base weak reach A effect is executed over a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach A effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11- 48).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect, as shown in FIGS. to the right of until all the title characters disappear. As shown in FIG. 11-33, the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach A effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11 -48). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-33, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect, the expectation level suggestion display, which will be described later, is not displayed.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect. As shown in Figure 11-32 (a6) to (a7), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production is the same as the background of the title display part (corridor background), and from the title display part The scene of the video that has started (the scene where the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears) continues throughout the introduction part, and the line displayed in the title display part "Try to catch it if you can!" , the voices of the lines output from the speakers 8L and 8R are also continuously output. After that, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (a7) to (a8), at the timing when the voice output of the line displayed in the title display part "Try to catch it if you can!" The scene changes to a video scene (a scene in which the friendly character "Mumu" chases the enemy character "Bakuchu").

The effect control CPU 120 is introduced when a variation pattern that develops into one of low base strong super reach A to C and low base strongest super reach after low base weak super reach A is specified by a variation pattern specification command. At the end of the part, after executing the drop performance of dropping the movable body 32, it develops into one of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, the low base strong reach C performance, and the low base strongest reach performance. . On the other hand, if a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command, after the low base weak super reach A, the reach is lost, the ally character "Mume" will catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introduction part. is not possible, the effect result of the low base weak reach A effect is notified as the result of the effect to the effect that it is not a big hit, and after that, the image display device 5 is displayed with a decorative pattern indicating the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result specifying command. Display the combination of (Large).

In addition, after the execution of the low-base weak reach A effect, in a configuration including a variation pattern that becomes a big hit without developing into another super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the low-base weak super reach A effect by a variation pattern designation command. Later, after the execution of the low base weak reach A production, if a variation pattern that becomes a big hit without developing into another super reach production is specified, at the end of the introduction part, the ally character “Mume” will be the enemy character “Baku "Chu" is caught, and as a result of the effect of the low-base weak reach A effect, the effect result of a big win (control to a big win game state) is reported, and then the image display device 5 is given a variable display result designation command. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating a specified kind of jackpot is displayed.

[About low base weak reach B effect]
FIG. 11-34 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low base weak reach B effect, and FIG. 11-35 shows the execution status of the low base weak reach B effect. It is a timing chart.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base weak super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, decoration The variation of the pattern (large) is started, and as shown in FIG. 11-34(b1), the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specifying command is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing. , the normal ready-to-win performance is executed in which the game stops at the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R to set the ready-to-win mode. After that, an operation prompting effect A, which will be described later, is executed, and as shown in FIG. , the white flash effect for displaying the entire display area in white is executed, and then the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect is started.

As shown in FIGS. 11-34 (b1) to (b3), the background (background of the sky in the daytime) during the fluctuation of the decoration pattern (large) in the normal state displayed before the white flash effect is changed to the white flash effect. After that, the background changes to a low-base weak reach B production background (a background in which the characters “Mume” and the character “Boingo” face each other on both sides of the hockey table), and the decoration pattern that was displayed in the reach mode before the white flash production. (Large) switches to the reach state of the decorative pattern (small) smaller in size than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-35, in the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect, part of the title characters "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" of the low base weak reach B effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when the title character "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is displayed at the fixed position, and the title character "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" which was displayed at the fixed position and a title end period until it disappears and switches to the introductory part.

When shifting to the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the display of the title start period. In the title start period of the low base weak reach B production, as shown in FIGS. The decoration patterns (small) are made to appear overlapping the left decoration pattern (small), and then the entire title character ``Biribiri Hockey Confrontation'' is moved toward a fixed position and stopped at the fixed position. When the title characters ``Biribiri Hockey Showdown'' are stationary at a fixed position, a part of the title characters ``Biribiri Hockey Showdown'' is displayed in a manner overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small) in the reach mode.

As the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base weak reach B production During the start period, even if the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode are numbers "1" to "9", part of the title characters "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" will be displayed in the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode ( Small) appears in a form that overlaps with the decoration pattern (small) on the left side, and in the state where the title character "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is stationary at a fixed position, part of the title character "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is in the reach mode. It is displayed in a manner overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small).

The effect control CPU 120 causes the title characters "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" to be displayed at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. In the title display period of the low base weak reach B production, as shown in FIGS. ' are displayed on the left and right sides of the screen, and the subtitles corresponding to the scene "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-35, the voice reading out the title is not output. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-35, the title display period of the low base weak reach B effect is executed over a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach B effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11- 48).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the low base weak reach B effect, as shown in (b5) to (b6), the title characters "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" displayed at the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area. Move until everything disappears. As shown in FIG. 11-35, the title end period of the low base weak reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach B effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11 -48). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-35, in the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect, the expectation level suggestion display, which will be described later, is not displayed.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect. As shown in FIGS. 11-34 (b6) to (b7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base weak reach B production is the background of the title display part (with the hockey table in between the characters “Mume” and the character “ Boingo" facing left and right), and the scene in the video that started from the title display part (the scene where the ally character "Mume" and the enemy character "Boingo" face left and right) continues throughout the introduction part. Then, the line displayed in the title display part, "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" is also continuously displayed, and the voice of the line output from the speakers 8L and 8R is also continuously output. After that, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (b7) to (b8), the introductory part is started at the timing when the voice output of the line "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" displayed in the title display part is finished. The scene switches to the next video scene (a scene in which the ally character "Mu Yume" hits the puck back).

The effect control CPU 120 is introduced when a variation pattern that develops into one of the low base strong super reach A to C and the low base strongest super reach after the low base weak super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command. At the end of the part, after executing the drop performance of dropping the movable body 32, it develops into one of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, the low base strong reach C performance, and the low base strongest reach performance. . On the other hand, if a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command, after the low base weak super reach B, the reach is lost. A performance result to the effect that it is not a big hit is reported as a performance result of the low-base weak reach B performance, and then the type of reach failure designated by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加A combination of decoration patterns (large) is displayed.

In addition, after the execution of the low-base weak reach B effect, in a configuration including a variation pattern that becomes a big hit without developing into another super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the low-base weak reach B effect by the variation pattern designation command. After the execution, if a variation pattern that results in a big hit is specified without developing into another super reach effect, at the end of the introductory part, the ally character "Mume" wins the game with the enemy character "Boingo", and the low A performance result of a big win (to be controlled to a big win game state) is reported as a performance result of the base weak reach B performance, and then the big win of the type specified by the variable display result specifying command is sent to the image display device 5.例文帳に追加Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[About low base strong reach A effect]
FIG. 11-36 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low base strong reach A effect, and FIG. 11-37 shows the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect. It is a timing chart.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the If the variation pattern develops from normal reach through low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after execution of normal reach production, low base weak reach A production or low base weak reach B production is executed. , Develop into low base strong reach A production. Further, when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops directly from the normal reach, after the execution of the normal reach effect, the selection effect described later Execute and develop into a low base strong reach A production.

When the performance control CPU 120 develops from the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance, the falling performance of dropping the movable body 32 is performed at the end of the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect is started. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c1), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F While maintaining the pending display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A effect or low base weak reach B effect to the background dedicated to the fall effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when directly developing from normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes a selection effect described later, as shown in FIG. do. Although the details of the selection effect will be described later, in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the reserved display and active display of the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title display part of the low-base strong reach A production is the prologue display period before the title characters of the low-base strong reach A production “Two people catch the explosion!” , a title start period from when a part of the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with two people!" Catch!" is displayed at the fixed position, and the title ending period until the title text "Two people catch Bakuchu!" disappears and switches to the introduction part ,including.

When shifting to the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the display of the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach A production that transitioned from the fall production, the background dedicated to the fall production (background with a pattern that spreads radially from the center), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, and the first reserved memory While maintaining the suspended display and active display of the display area 131SG005D, the second suspended memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the ally character "Muyume" is displayed as a background dedicated to the falling effect (background with patterns radially spreading from the center). , is displayed on a layer in front of the suspended display and the active display, and then the ally character "Mumu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

Also, in the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach A effect that has been transferred from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low-base strong reach A effect), the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Mumu'' is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character ``Mumu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the title start period.

As shown in Fig. 11-36 (c1) to (c3), during the prologue display period after transition from the fall effect, the display area is exclusively for the fall effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Muyume". After the prologue display period ends, the background (background with a pattern that spreads radially from the center) will switch to a background with a low-base strong reach A effect (background in which the allied characters "Mume" and "Jam" are displayed in the corridor). , the pending display and the active display, which were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Mumu", are hidden after the prologue display period ends. The display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period after transition from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Muyume" is displayed at the end of the prologue display period. After that, the background is switched to a low base strong reach A effect (background in which friendly characters "Muyume" and "Jam" are displayed in the corridor). The display of the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends, and the suspension display and active display that were hidden in the selection effect are maintained as they are.

In the title start period of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in FIGS. Out of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, the left decorative pattern (small) is made to appear in a manner that overlaps, and then the entire title character "Catch Bakuchu with two people!" and let it rest at a fixed position. When the title characters "Two people catch Bakuchu!" is displayed in an overlapping manner.

As the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base strong reach A production During the start period, even if the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode are numbers from "1" to "9", part of the title character "Catch Bakuchu with two people!" Out of the left and right decorative patterns (small), the left decorative pattern (small) appears in a manner that overlaps with the left decorative pattern (small). Catch Bakuchu with your people!” is displayed in a form overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small) in the reach form.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Two people catch Bakuchu!" In the title display period of the low base strong reach A production, first, as shown in FIG. The state of being displayed at the fixed position is maintained for a predetermined time, during which the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as shown in FIG. 11-37. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (c5) to (c6), below the title characters "Two people catch Bakuchu!" Display the expectation indication. As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title display period of the low base strong reach A effect is executed over a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach A effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48). ).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in FIGS. to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear. In addition, the title character and the expectation indication display are moved to the right side of the display area until all disappear. As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach A effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11 -48). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-37, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A production, the caption of the dialogue is not displayed like the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production, and the speaker 8L, 8R does not output the voice of the dialogue.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect. As shown in FIGS. 11-36 (c3) to (c8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production is the background after the title start period in the title display part (the friendly character "Mume" in the corridor) and the background where "Jam" is displayed), and the scene of the video that started from the title display part (the scene where the friendly characters "Muyume" and "Jam" are displayed in the corridor) continues throughout the introduction part. do. Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-36(c8) and 11-37, after the start of the introductory part, the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, and the dialogue corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears A caption "Catch it if you can!" is displayed, and the voice of the words displayed in the caption is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach A effect, while the title display part outputs the voice reading out the title from the speakers 8L and 8R, the caption of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is not displayed, and the subtitles are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introductory part starts, the subtitle of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the introductory part is displayed, and the scene of the introductory part is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice of the dialogue corresponding to the is output.

The effect control CPU 120, when a variation pattern that becomes a big hit after a low base strong super reach A is specified by a variation pattern specification command, the ally characters "Muyume" and "Jam" are the enemy characters at the end of the introductory part. Catch the ``bakuchu'', notify the effect result of the effect of the low base strong reach A effect to the effect that it is a big hit (to the effect that it is controlled to the big win game state), and then designate the variable display result to the image display device 5. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the command is displayed. On the other hand, if a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command, after the low base strong super reach A, the reach is lost, at the end of the introduction part, the friendly characters “Mume” and “Jam” will be the enemy character “Bakuchu”. ' is not caught, and as the result of the low-base strong reach A performance, a performance result indicating that it is not a big hit is reported, and then the image display device 5 is notified of the reach specified by the variable display result specification command. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[Regarding the indication of the expectation level of the low base strong reach A production]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach A production, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Two people catch Bakuchu!" A hint is displayed. The expectation indication displayed in the title display part is, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the normal state in which the low base strong reach A effect is executed, the image display device 5 may display an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating active display. On the other hand, since the expectation indication displayed in the title display part also suggests the expectation by a plurality of objects, the pending indication, the active indication, and the expectation indication indication are displayed at the same time in the title display part. In this case, there is a possibility that objects forming the pending display and the active display may be misidentified as objects of the expectation level suggesting display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A production where the expectation indication is displayed, the suspension indication and active indication are configured by not displaying the suspension indication and active indication at the same time as the expectation indication indication. This prevents the object to be misidentified as the object of the expectation level indication display.

In addition, since there is almost no game ball entering the second start winning opening in the normal state, when the number of reservations of the first special figure is the maximum (4) and during variable display, the reservation display and active display A maximum of 5 objects may be displayed as , and it will match the number of objects indicating that the expectation is the maximum in the expectation indication display, but the title display part of the low base strong reach A production However, since the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestive display, even if the low base strong reach A effect is executed in a situation where a maximum of 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, It is possible to prevent the object displayed as the pending display and the active display from being confused with the object of the expectation level suggestive display and misunderstanding that the expectation level is the maximum in the expectation level suggestive display.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-36, the pending display and the active display are displayed during the prologue display period before the expectation indication display is displayed in the title display part, but the prologue display period starts. Sometimes, it is also possible to configure the suspension display and the active display to be hidden, and even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the object constituting the suspension display and the active display from being misidentified as the object of the expectation level suggestive display.

Also, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, as shown in FIGS. , After displaying the friendly character "Muyume" on the layer in front of the reserved display and the active display, the allied character "Muyume" is enlarged until the display area is completely filled, and the allied character "Muyume" is enlarged. Since the suspended display and active display displayed before the display area is completely filled with the display are hidden after the prologue display period ends, the suspended display and active display can be hidden without discomfort. In the example shown in FIG. 11-36, the character is displayed on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display, and is displayed before the entire display area is filled by expanding the display until the entire display area is filled. It is a configuration in which the pending display and active display are hidden, but when executing the low base strong reach A effect, the entire display area is displayed in a single color such as white except for the reach mode decorative pattern (small) etc. Monochromatic To hide the reserved display and the active display without giving a sense of incongruity even in such a configuration, by executing the display presentation to erase the reserved display and the active display displayed before the single-color display presentation. can be done.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in FIG. is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in FIGS. display. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c5), in the initial stage, the colors of the five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation suggestive display are all displayed in black. As shown in 36 (c6), by changing the color of the three star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strong reach A effect from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects, the low-base strong reach A effect is obtained. The expectation of the jackpot in is suggested.

When developing from a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect to a low base strong reach A effect, as shown in FIGS. Until the display area is completely filled by the enlarged display of "Dream Dream", if the number of reservations remains, the pending display and the active display are displayed, and in the subsequent title display part, the expectation indication display is hidden. As shown in FIGS. !” At the same time, five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation suggestive display are displayed. After that, when the color of the star-shaped objects is changed from black to gold, the objects constituting the pending display and the active display become non-existent. Objects forming the expectation level suggestive display are displayed immediately after they are displayed, and there is a risk of confusion between the pending display and the active display and the expectation level suggestive display. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 11-36, after the expectation level suggestion display is hidden in the prologue display period, the expectation level suggestion display is hidden in the title display period, and the title characters "Two people Catch Bakuchu!" is displayed at a fixed position for a predetermined period of time, and after that, an expectation suggestive display is displayed below the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with two people!" Also, it is possible to prevent confusion between the active display and the expectation suggestive display.

[About low base strong reach B effect]
FIG. 11-39 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low base strong reach B effect, and FIG. 11-40 shows the execution status of the low base strong reach B effect. It is a timing chart.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the If the variation pattern develops from normal reach through low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after execution of normal reach production, low base weak reach A production or low base weak reach B production is executed. , Develop into low base strong reach B production. Further, when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops directly from the normal reach, after the execution of the normal reach effect, the selection effect described later Execute and develop into a low base strong reach B effect.

When the performance control CPU 120 develops from the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance, the falling performance of dropping the movable body 32 at the end of the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect is started. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d1), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F While maintaining the pending display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A effect or low base weak reach B effect to the background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when directly developing from normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes a selection effect described later, as shown in FIG. do. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden at the start of the selection effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect is the prologue display period before the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" of the low base strong reach B effect is displayed, and the image display device 5 The title start period from when a part of the title character "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed in the display area until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when the title character "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed at the fixed position, and the fixed position Including the title end period until the display of the title character "Gekishin Robo Battle" that was displayed in the 1 disappears and it switches to the introduction part.

When shifting to the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the display of the prologue display period.

In the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach B production that has been shifted from the fall production, the background dedicated to the fall production (background with a pattern radially spreading from the center), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, and the first reserved memory While maintaining the suspended display and active display of the display area 131SG005D, the second suspended memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the ally character "Muyume" is displayed as a background dedicated to the falling effect (background with patterns radially spreading from the center). , is displayed on a layer in front of the suspended display and the active display, and then the ally character "Mumu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

Also, in the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B effect that has been transferred from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach B effect), the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Mumu'' is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character ``Mumu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the title start period.

As shown in Figure 11-39 (d1) to (d3), during the prologue display period after transition from the fall effect, the display area is exclusively for the fall effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Muyume". After the prologue display period ends, the background of the (background with a pattern that spreads radially from the center) is a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach B production (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" The background displayed on the left and right), and the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Mumu" will disappear after the prologue display period ends. . The display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, in the prologue display period after transition from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Muyume" is displayed at the end of the prologue display period. After that, the background is switched to a title display-dedicated background of low-base strong reach B effect (background in which friend characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" are displayed at left and right positions). The display of the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends, and the suspension display and active display which were hidden in the selection effect are maintained as non-display.

In the title start period of the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in Fig. 11-39 (d3) to (d4), a part of the title character "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed from the left side of the display area, and the left and right decorations of the reach mode The decoration pattern (small) on the left side of the patterns (small) is superimposed, and then the entire title character ``Gekishin Robo Battle'' is moved toward a fixed position and stopped at the fixed position. In a state where the title characters ``Gigantic Robo Battle'' are stationary at a fixed position, a part of the title characters ``Gigantic Robo Battle'' is displayed so as to overlap both the left and right decoration patterns (small) in the reach mode.

As the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base strong reach B production During the start period, even if the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9", part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" will be displayed in the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. ), and when the title character ``Gekishin Robo Battle'' is stationary in a fixed position, part of the title character ``Gekishin Robo Battle'' appears on the left and right decorations in reach mode. It is displayed in a manner overlapping both of the patterns (small).

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. In the title display period of the low base strong reach B effect, first, as shown in Fig. 11-39 (d4), the title character "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed at a fixed position in a manner in which the expectation indication display is hidden. This state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, during which the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as shown in FIG. 11-40. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-39(d5) to (d6), an expectation suggestive display is displayed below the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle". As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display period of the low base strong reach B effect is executed over a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach B effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48). ).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in Fig. 11-39 (d6) to (d7), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" displayed at the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area. Move until all the title characters disappear. In addition, the title character and the expectation indication display are moved to the right side of the display area until all disappear. As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title end period of the low base strong reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach B effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11 -48). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-40, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, subtitles of dialogue are not displayed unlike the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production, and the speaker 8L, The voice of the dialogue is not output from 8R.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect. As shown in FIGS. 11-39 (d3) to (d8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect is the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (friend characters "Jam" and "Nana ” and the enemy character “Robo” are displayed in the left and right positions), at the start of the introduction part, from the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part to the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production (Background where ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" confront each other in town). In the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect, the enemy character "Robo" faces the front at the back side as seen from the player, and the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" are at the front side as seen from the player. starts with a video scene in which the two face each other with their backs turned. At this time, both the enemy character "Robo" located on the far side from the player's point of view and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" located on the near side from the player's point of view are titled during the title display period of the title display part. The character "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed at the position where it overlaps with the fixed position where it was displayed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (d8) and 11-40, after the start of the introductory part, the dialogue "Lose" corresponds to the scene in which the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" confront the enemy character "Robo". I'm not here!" is displayed, and the voice of the words displayed by the subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach B effect, while the title display part outputs the voice reading out the title from the speakers 8L and 8R, the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the subtitles are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introductory part starts, the subtitle of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the introductory part is displayed, and the scene of the introductory part is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is designed to output the voice of the dialogue according to.

The effect control CPU 120 determines that when a variation pattern that becomes a big hit after a low-base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the friend characters "Jam" and "Nana" are the enemy characters "Jam" at the end of the introduction part. After winning the battle with "Robo", the effect result of the low base strong reach B effect is reported to the effect that it is a big hit (to the effect that it is controlled to the big win game state), and then the image display device 5 displays it in a variable manner. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the kind of jackpot specified by the result specifying command is displayed. On the other hand, if a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command that results in a loss of reach after a low base strong super reach B, at the end of the introduction part, the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" become the enemy character "Robo". is defeated in the battle, and the performance result of the low base strong reach B performance is reported to the effect that it is not a big hit, and then the image display device 5 is shown the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result specification command. A combination of decoration patterns (large) is displayed.

[Regarding the indication of the expectation level of the low base strong reach B production]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, the image display device 5 displays the title characters ``Gekishin Robo Battle'' and the expectation suggestive display in a size smaller than the title characters ``Gekishin Robo Battle''. The expectation indication displayed in the title display part is, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the normal state where the low base strong reach B effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reservations and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the degree suggestive display and are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that the objects forming the pending display and the active display may be misidentified as the expected degree suggestive display object. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B production where the expectation indication is displayed, the suspension indication and active indication are configured by not displaying the suspension indication and active indication at the same time as the expectation indication indication. This prevents the object to be misidentified as the object of the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display, so if a maximum of 5 objects are displayed as pending display and active display, Even when the base strong reach B effect is executed, the object displayed as the pending display and the active display is confused with the object of the expectation suggestive display, and the expectation is mistakenly recognized as being the highest in the expectation suggestive display. You can prevent it from slipping.

In addition, from the time the prologue display period starts in the low base strong reach B effect, it may be configured to hide the pending display and the active display. It is possible to prevent the object from being misidentified as an object of the suggestive display.

Also, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in FIGS. , After displaying the friendly character "Muyume" on the layer in front of the reserved display and the active display, the allied character "Muyume" is enlarged until the display area is completely filled, and the allied character "Muyume" is enlarged. The suspended display and active display displayed before the display area is completely filled with the display are hidden after the prologue display period ends, so that the suspended display and active display can be hidden without discomfort. In addition, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, by executing the single color display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white except for the decorative pattern (small) etc. of the reach mode, before the single color display effect A configuration may be employed in which the displayed pending display and active display are erased, and in such a configuration as well, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing a sense of discomfort.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, as shown in FIG. The state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-39(d5) to (d6), an expectation suggestive display is displayed below the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5), in the initial stage, the colors of the five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation suggestive display are all displayed in black. As shown in 39 (d6), by changing the color of 3.5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the low base strong reach B effect from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects, the low base strong reach The degree of expectation for a big hit in the B performance is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation suggesting display from being confused.

[About low base strong reach C effect]
Since the low base strong reach C effect has many points in common with the low base strong reach B effect described above, a drawing of the low base strong reach C effect is omitted.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach C is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the If the variation pattern develops from normal reach through low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after execution of normal reach production, low base weak reach A production or low base weak reach B production is executed. , Develop into low base strong reach C production. Further, when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach C is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops directly from the normal reach, after the execution of the normal reach effect, the selection effect described later and develop into a low base strong reach C effect.

When the performance control CPU 120 develops from the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance, the falling performance of dropping the movable body 32 at the end of the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect is started. In the drop effect, while maintaining the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the low base is maintained. After switching from the background at the end of the weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect to the background dedicated to the falling effect (background with patterns radially spreading from the center), the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is moved to the initial position. up to

Further, when directly developing from normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect after executing the selection effect described later. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden at the start of the selection effect.

The title display part of the low base strong reach C production is the prologue display period before the title characters "great earthquake robo battle" of the low base strong reach C production are displayed, and the title characters "great earthquake" in the display area of the image display device 5 The title start period from when a part of "Robo Battle" is displayed until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when the title text "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is displayed at the fixed position, and the title that was displayed at the fixed position Including the title end period until the display of the characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" disappears and it switches to the introduction part.

When shifting to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the display of the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach C production that transitioned from the fall production, the background dedicated to the fall production (background with a pattern radially spreading from the center), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, and the first reserved memory While maintaining the suspended display and active display of the display area 131SG005D, the second suspended memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the ally character "Muyume" is displayed as a background dedicated to the falling effect (background with patterns radially spreading from the center). , is displayed on a layer in front of the suspended display and the active display, and then the ally character "Mumu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

Also, in the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach C effect that has been transferred from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low-base strong reach C effect), the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Mumu'' is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character ``Mumu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the title start period.

During the prologue display period after transitioning from the fall effect, the background exclusively for the fall effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Muyume" will be displayed in the prologue display. After the period ends, the background will switch to a low base strong reach B effect (background in which the ally characters "Mume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right), and the ally character "Mume" The suspended display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled by the enlarged display of , are hidden after the prologue display period ends. The display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, in the prologue display period after transition from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Muyume" is displayed at the end of the prologue display period. After that, the background is switched to a title display-dedicated background with a low base strong reach C effect (a background in which the friendly characters "Muyume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed at left and right positions). The display of the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends, and the suspension display and active display which were hidden in the selection effect are maintained as non-display.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach C production, a part of the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" overlaps with the left side decoration pattern (small) of the reach mode left and right decoration patterns (small) from the left side of the display area. After that, the entire title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is moved toward a fixed position and stopped at a fixed position. In the state where the title characters ``great earthquake robo battle'' are stationary at a fixed position, a part of the title characters ``great earthquake robo battle'' is displayed so as to overlap both the left and right decoration patterns (small) in the reach mode.

As the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) is displayed, but during the title start period, the reach mode Even if the left and right decorative patterns (small) are numbers "1" to "9", part of the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is the left side of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in reach mode. Appears in a form that overlaps with the design (small), and when the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is stationary in a fixed position, a part of the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is a reach form Left and right decoration design (small) is displayed in a manner that overlaps both of the

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts to the display during the title display period. In the title display period of the low base strong reach C production, first, the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is displayed at a fixed position in a mode in which the expectation level suggestion display is hidden, and is maintained for a predetermined period of time. , the speakers 8L and 8R output the voice for reading the title. Next, below the title characters ``Great Vibration Robo Battle'', an expectation suggestive display is displayed in a size smaller than the title characters ``Great Vibration Robo Battle''. The title display period of the low base strong reach C effect is executed over a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach C effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the low-base strong reach C presentation, the title characters ``Big Earthquake Robo Battle'' displayed at a fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear. In addition, the title character and the expectation indication display are moved to the right side of the display area until all disappear. The title end period of the low base strong reach C effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach C effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48). In addition, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach C effect, subtitles of words are not displayed unlike the low-base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and the voice of the words is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect. The background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production is the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (ally characters "Mume" and "Nana" and enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right. background), at the start of the introduction part, from the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part to the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production (ally characters "Mume" and "Nana" and enemy characters Switch to the background where the "large robots" confront each other in the town). In the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect, the enemy character "Dai Robo" faces the front on the back side from the player's point of view, and the friendly characters "Mume" and "Nana" on the front side from the player's back. Start from a video scene where the two face each other. At this time, both the enemy character "Dai Robo" located on the far side from the player's point of view and the ally characters "Mume" and "Nana" located on the near side from the player's point of view are displayed during the title display period of the title display part. , the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is displayed in a position that overlaps with the fixed position where it was displayed. In addition, after the introduction part starts, subtitles of the line "I will never lose!" From 8R, the voice of the lines displayed with subtitles is output.

In this way, in the low base strong reach C effect, while the title display part outputs the voice reading out the title from the speakers 8L and 8R, the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R The sound of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introductory part starts, the subtitle of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the introductory part is displayed, and the scene of the introductory part is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is designed to output the voice of the dialogue according to.

The effect control CPU 120 designates a variation pattern for a big hit after a low base strong super reach C by a variation pattern specification command, and the allied characters "Mume" and "Nana" are the enemy characters at the end of the introductory part. After winning the battle with the ``big robot'', the effect result of the effect of the low base strong reach C effect to the effect that it is a big win (to the effect that it is controlled to a big win game state) is reported, and then the image display device 5, A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the kind of jackpot designated by the variable display result designation command is displayed. On the other hand, when a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command after low base strong super reach C, reach is lost, at the end of the introduction part, the friendly characters "Mume" and "Nana" become the enemy character "Large Robo ”, the effect result of the low base strong reach C effect is notified as the result of the effect that it is not a big hit, and then the image display device 5 is notified of the reach specified by the variable display result specifying command. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[Regarding the indication of the expectation level of the low base strong reach C effect]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach C production, the image display device 5 displays the title characters ``Great Vibration Robo Battle'' and the expectation suggestive display in a size smaller than the title characters ``Great Vibration Robo Battle''. The expectation indication displayed in the title display part is five star-shaped objects, and is displayed above the star-shaped object, and the characters "expectation The degree of expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state where the low base strong reach C effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reservations and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the degree suggestive display and are displayed at the same time, there is a possibility that the objects constituting the pending display and the active display may be misidentified as the expected degree suggestive display object. For this reason, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach C production where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the suspension display and active display are configured by not displaying the suspension display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents the object to be misidentified as the object of the expectation indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C production, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display, so if a maximum of 5 objects are displayed as pending display and active display, Even when the base strong reach C effect is executed, the object displayed as the pending display and the active display is confused with the object of the expectation level suggestive display, and the expectation level is misunderstood as being the maximum in the expectation level suggestive display. You can prevent it from slipping.

In addition, from the time the prologue display period starts in the low base strong reach C effect, it may be configured to hide the pending display and the active display. It is possible to prevent the object from being misidentified as the object of the suggestive display.

Also, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, during the prologue display period, the background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern that spreads radially from the center), the ally character “Yume After displaying "Yume", the friendly character "Muyume" is displayed in an enlarged manner until the entire display area is filled, and the reserved display and Since the active display disappears after the prologue display period ends, it is possible to hide the pending display and the active display comfortably. In addition, when executing the low base strong reach C effect, by executing the monochromatic display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, before the monochromatic display effect A configuration may be employed in which the displayed pending display and active display are erased, and in such a configuration as well, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach C production, the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is displayed at a fixed position in a mode in which the expectation indication is hidden for a predetermined period of time, and then the title character is displayed. An expectation indication is displayed below "Great Earthquake Robo Battle". At this time, in the initial stage, the colors of the five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation suggestive display are all displayed in black, and then, among the five star-shaped objects, the low base strong reach C effect is displayed. By changing the color of the corresponding four star-shaped objects from black to gold, the expectation of a big hit in the low base strong reach C performance is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation suggestive display from being confused.

[About low base strongest reach performance]
FIG. 11-41 is a diagram showing transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 when the low-base strongest reach effect is executed, and FIG. 11-42 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach effect. is.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a variation pattern corresponding to the lowest base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the variation If the pattern is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach through low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after execution of normal reach production, low base weak reach A production or low base weak reach B production is executed, Develop into a low base strongest reach production. Also, when the variation pattern corresponding to the lowest base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops directly from the normal reach, after the execution of the normal reach production, the selection production described later Execute and develop into a low-base strongest reach production.

When the performance control CPU 120 develops from the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance, the falling performance of dropping the movable body 32 is performed at the end of the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance. After execution, start the title display part of the low base strongest reach production. In the falling effect, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e1), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F While maintaining the pending display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A effect or low base weak reach B effect to the background dedicated to the fall effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when directly developing from the normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect after executing the selection effect described later as shown in FIG. . Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden at the start of the selection effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect is part of the title characters of the low-base strongest reach effect "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" The title start period from when it is displayed until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" Including the title end period until the display of "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" disappears and it switches to the introductory part.

When shifting to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the display of the title start period.

In the title start period of the low base strongest reach production, as shown in Fig. 11-41 (e3), the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode is maintained, and the title text "6 people catch the explosion" !” is displayed in an enlarged size in which only part of the characters are visible in the display area. At this time, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!". In addition, the part displayed in the display area of the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" After that, as shown in Fig. 11-41 (e4), the title characters "Six people catch Bakuchu!" The reduced-sized title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" are fixed at a fixed position. When the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" It is displayed in a manner overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small).

As the decoration pattern (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base strongest reach production will start. During the period, even if the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode are numbers from "1" to "9", the title characters that appear in enlarged size "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" The title text "6 people catch Bakuchu!" It is displayed in a form overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the reach form.

As shown in FIGS. 11-41 (e1) to (e4), during the title start period after the transition from the drop effect, the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged size title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" The background for the fall effect that was displayed before it was displayed in an exhausted manner (background with a pattern that spreads radially from the center) is part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" While the display area is completely filled, the title display background with the strongest reach at low base (background with 6 allied characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" displayed on the left and right) , and when the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 People!" Also, during the title start period after transitioning from the drop effect, it was displayed before the display area was completely filled with a part of the enlarged title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" The suspended display and the active display are hidden while the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged size title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!". The display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period.

Also, during the title start period after transitioning from the selection effect, it was displayed before the display area was completely filled with a part of the enlarged title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" The selection result image of the selection effect (here, the title image of the low base strongest reach effect) is displayed in a manner in which the entire display area is filled with a part of the enlarged size title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" While it is being done, it switches to the background dedicated to the title display of the low base strongest reach production (background where 6 friendly characters and the enemy character “Bakuchu” are displayed on the left and right), and the title character “Bakuchu with 6 people” is displayed. Catch!" is displayed at a fixed position in a reduced size, the background dedicated to the title display with the strongest reach at the lowest base is displayed as the background. The display of the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the ready-to-win mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection effect are maintained as they are.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" in a reduced size at a fixed position in the title start period, and then shifts to display in the title display period. In the title display period of the low base strongest reach production, first, as shown in FIG. The state of being displayed at the position is maintained for a predetermined time, during which the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as shown in FIG. 11-42. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (e5) to (e6), below the title characters "6 people catch Bakuchu!" Display the expectation indication. As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display period of the low base strongest reach effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strongest reach effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strongest reach effect, as shown in Fig. 11-41 (e6) to (e7), the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" , is expanded until the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!". At this time, the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" In a manner different from the case where "Catch Bakuchu!" Expand until the display area is completely filled. That is, during the title start period, the trajectory passed by each part of the title characters in the process of shrinking the title characters "Six people catch Bakuchu!" expands during the title end period. It is different from the trajectory that each part of the title character passes through in the process. Therefore, the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" in a manner different from the manner in which the entire display area is filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title end period of the low-base strongest reach effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48). reference). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-42, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, the caption of the dialogue is not displayed like the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. The voice of the dialogue is not output from.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect. As shown in FIGS. 11-41 (e4) to (e8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach production (the background in which six friendly characters chase the enemy character “Bakuchu” in the city) is the title Unlike the background dedicated to the title display in the display part (the background in which 6 friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right), the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" After the title end period is over, the background dedicated to the title display is completely filled by part of the, and then it switches to the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strongest reach production. The introductory part of the low base strongest reach production starts with a video scene in which six friendly characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu". Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (e8) and 11-42, after the start of the introduction part, the line corresponding to the scene where six friendly characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu" is "Catch it if you can!" !” is displayed, and the voice of the lines displayed by the subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low-base strongest reach effect, while the title is read out from the speakers 8L and 8R in the title display part, the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the title is read from the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the display part is also not output. The voice of the corresponding line is output.

The effect control CPU 120 designates a variation pattern that becomes a big hit after the strongest super reach at a low base by the variation pattern specification command, the six friend characters catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, A performance result of a big win (to be controlled to a big win game state) is notified as a performance result of the low-base strongest reach performance, and then a big win of the type specified by a variable display result specifying command is sent to the image display device 5.例文帳に追加Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating . On the other hand, when a variation pattern was specified by the variation pattern specification command, after the strongest super reach at a low base, the reach was lost. After that, the image display device 5 is notified of a performance result indicating that it is not a big hit as the performance result of the low base strongest reach performance, and then displays a decoration pattern (large) indicating the type of reach loss designated by the variable display result designation command. Display combinations.

[Regarding the indication of the expectation level of the strongest reach performance at the low base]
In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, the title characters "6 people catch Bakuchu!" display is displayed. The expectation indication displayed in the title display part is, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the normal state where the low-base strongest reach effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reservations and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and in the title display part, the reservation display, the active display, and the degree of expectation If the suggestive display and are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that the object that constitutes the pending display and the active display will be misidentified as the object of the expectation level suggestive display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the hold display and active display are configured by not displaying the hold display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents the object from being misidentified as the object of the expectation indication display.

Also, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, since the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display, even if a maximum of 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, the low base Even when the strongest reach effect is executed, the object displayed as the pending display and the active display is confused with the object of the expectation level suggestion display, and the expectation level suggestion display is mistakenly recognized as the highest level of expectation. can be prevented.

In addition, when executing the low-base strongest reach effect, as shown in FIGS. Only some characters are displayed in an enlarged size that is visible in the display area, and then all characters are displayed in a reduced size that is visible in the display area. Sometimes, the pending display and the active display that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the pending display and the active display can be hidden without a sense of discomfort. In addition, when executing the low base strongest reach effect, by executing the single color display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white except for the decoration pattern (small) of the reach mode, it is displayed before the single color display effect. A configuration may be employed in which the suspended display and the active display that have been displayed may be erased, and even in such a configuration, the suspended display and the active display can be hidden without causing a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, as shown in FIG. The displayed state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in FIGS. display. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-41(e5), in the initial stage, the colors of the five star-shaped objects that constitute the expectation suggestive display are all displayed in black. As shown in 41 (e6), by changing the color of 4.5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strongest reach production out of the five star-shaped objects from black to gold, the low-base strongest reach production is achieved. The expectation of a big hit in is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation suggesting display from being confused.

[Regarding the modification of the title display part]
FIG. 11-43 is a diagram showing the transition of images in the modification of the title display part of the low-base strong reach A effect, the low-base strong reach B effect, the low-base strong reach C effect, and the low-base strongest reach effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the title display part of the corresponding super reach effect, first, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f1), the display area A blackout effect is executed to display the entire image in black. If the pending display and the active display were displayed before the execution of the blackout effect, the pending display and the active display disappear with the start of the blackout effect.

After continuing the blackout effect for a predetermined period of time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the expectation suggesting display (Fig. 11- At 43 (f2), an expectation suggestive display of the strongest reach performance at the low base) is displayed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the background of the entire display area is displayed in black and the expectation level suggestion display is displayed for a predetermined time, and as shown in FIGS. The title character of the effect (in FIGS. 11-43 (f3) and (f5), the title character of the strongest reach effect at the low base) is displayed at a fixed position in a size larger than the expectation level indication display.

When the corresponding title characters of the super ready-to-win effect are displayed at fixed positions, part of the title characters is displayed in a form overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the ready-to-win mode. As the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the left and right decorative patterns in the reach mode ( In any case where the small) is a number from "1" to "9", the title characters of the corresponding super reach effect when displayed in a fixed position are part of the left and right decorative patterns in the reach mode (small) is displayed in an overlapping manner with both of the

Also, the title characters are displayed in one of the white mode (FIG. 11-43 (f3)) and the red mode (FIG. 11-43 (f5)). Whether the title characters are to be displayed in the white mode or the red mode is determined by the previously described notice effect determination process during variable display at step 131 SGS609. In the notice effect determination processing during variable display, when a variation pattern including execution of a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, and a low base strongest reach effect is specified, a big hit is achieved. Whether the title characters are displayed in white or in red is determined with a probability according to whether or not the title characters are present, and a big hit is achieved when the title characters are displayed in red. Whether the title characters are displayed in a white mode or in a red mode is determined with the probability that the rate is higher than the rate of a big hit when the title characters are displayed in the white mode. Therefore, in the title display part of the corresponding super ready-to-win performance, when the title characters are displayed in a red mode, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the title characters are displayed in a white mode.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the expectation level suggestion display and the title characters of the corresponding super reach effect, and then, as shown in FIGS. The background corresponding to the title display part of the corresponding super reach performance is displayed while the display of the title characters of the reach performance is maintained, and the voice for reading the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, in the title display part, subtitles of words are not displayed unlike the low-base weak reach A effect and the low-base weak reach B effect, and the voice of the words is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, in the title display part, the title characters are displayed for a longer period of time than the time until the title characters are displayed after the blackout effect is started (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the title end period. Incidentally, the control of the title end period is the same as that of each super ready-to-win effect described above, so the explanation here is omitted.

In this way, in the modified example of the title display part, the title character of the corresponding super reach effect is larger in size than the expected level indication display, and the expected Since the level is suggested, the player's attention is attracted. By displaying the expectation level suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the expectation level suggestion first.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f2), regardless of whether the title characters are displayed in white or in red, if the type of super ready-to-win effect is the same, a common mode is used. An expectation indication is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the user pay attention to whether the mode of the title characters after the expectation level suggestive display is displayed is the white mode or the red mode.

[About high base reach A to D production]
FIG. 11-44 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the high base reach A to D effects, and FIG. 11-44 shows the execution status of the high base reach A to D effects. is a timing chart showing Note that the high base reach A to D productions are common except for the types of enemy characters that appear, the title names, and the expectations suggested by the expectation level suggestion display. Therefore, the high base reach A production will be explained here. However, the explanation of the high base reach B to D effects is omitted.

Production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A or the probability variable state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the high base super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command 11-44 (g2), the type of decorative pattern (large) designated by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing. A normal ready-to-win performance is executed in which the game stops at the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R and is in a ready-to-win mode. After that, the title display part of the high base reach A effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display part of the high base reach A effect is fixed after part of the title characters "Battle reach A" of the high base reach A effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period until the title character "Battlereach A" is displayed at the position, the title display period when the title character "Battlereach A" is displayed at the fixed position, and the title character "Battlereach A" that was displayed at the fixed position disappears. and a title end period until switching to the introductory part.

When shifting to the title display part of the high base reach A effect, the effect control CPU 120 first starts displaying the title start period.

In the title start period of the high base reach A production, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g2), while maintaining the display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode, the title character "Battle reach A" is changed to that The characters are displayed in an enlarged size in which only part of the characters are visible in the display area. At this time, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Battlereach A". In addition, the portion of the title character "Battle Reach A" that is displayed in the display area appears in a mode that overlaps both the left and right decoration patterns (small) of the reach mode. After that, as shown in Fig. 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are gradually reduced to a reduced size in which all the characters of the title characters "Battle Reach A" are visible in the display area. The title character "Battle Reach A" is fixed at a fixed position. When the title character "Battle Reach A" is reduced in size and is stationary at a fixed position, a portion of the title character "Battle Reach A" is displayed in a form overlapping both the left and right decoration patterns (small) in the Reach form. be.

As the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the high base reach A production will start. During the period, the title character "Battle Reach A" that appears in an enlarged size will be the left and right decorations of the reach mode, regardless of whether the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode are numbers "1" to "9". The title character "Battle Reach A", which appears in a form that overlaps both the patterns (small) and is displayed in a reduced size when stationary in a fixed position, is part of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach form. is displayed in an overlapping manner with both of the

As shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the time saving that was displayed before the display area was completely filled with part of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A" The changing background (night sky background) of the decorative pattern (large) in the state A or the variable state is displayed in a manner in which the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A". While there, it switches to a title display background with a high base reach A effect (a background in which the ally character “Mume” and the enemy character “Maskman” are displayed on the left and right), and the title character “Battle reach A” shrinks. In the state of being stationary at a fixed position at the size, a background dedicated to title display with high base reach A effect is displayed as the background. In addition, the suspended display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title character "Battlereach A" will be replaced with the enlarged title character "Battlereach A". A” is hidden while it is being displayed in a state in which the entire display area is completely filled. The display of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts to display during the title display period. In the title display period of the high base reach A production, first, as shown in FIG. This state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, during which the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as shown in FIG. 11-45. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation suggestive display is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a size smaller than the title characters "Battle Reach A". As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display period of the high base reach A effect is executed over a longer time than the title start period of the high base reach A effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the high base reach A effect, as shown in Fig. 11-44 (g5) to (g6), the title character "Battle reach A" displayed in a fixed position in a reduced size is replaced with the title character "Battle reach A". Expand until the entire display area is filled with a part of Reach A'. At this time, when the title characters "Battlereach A" are displayed in reduced size during the title start period, instead of being enlarged and displayed in the opposite manner as when the title characters "Battlereach A" are displayed in reduced size during the title start period. In a mode different from the reverse mode, the title characters "Battle reach A" are expanded until the entire display area is filled with a part of the title characters "Battle reach A". In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title character passes during the process of shrinking the title character "Battle reach A" during the title start period is the same as the trajectory that each part of the title character passes during the process that the title character "Battle reach A" expands during the title end period. is different. Therefore, the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Battlereach A" in a manner different from the manner in which the entire display area is filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title end period of the high base reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the high base reach A effect (FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48 reference). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-45, in the title display part of the high base reach A production, subtitles of dialogue are not displayed unlike the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production, and speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. The voice of the dialogue is not output from.

After the end of the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the high base reach A effect. As shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g3) to (g7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the high-base reach A production (the background in which the ally character "Mume" and the enemy character "Maskman" are fighting) , unlike the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (the background where the ally character "Mume" and the enemy character "Maskman" are displayed on the left and right), the title character "Battle Reach A" during the title end period. After the title end period ends after the title display-dedicated background is partially filled up, the background is switched to the background at the start of the introductory part of the high base reach A effect. The introductory part of the high-base-reach-A production starts with a moving image scene in which the ally character "Mume" and the enemy character "Maskman" are fighting. Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g7) and 11-45, after the start of the introductory part, the line "Fight !” is displayed, and the voice of the words displayed in the subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the high base reach A effect, the title is read out from the speakers 8L and 8R in the title display part, while subtitles of dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the title is read from the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the display part is also not output. The voice of the corresponding line is output.

The effect control CPU 120, when a variation pattern that becomes a big hit after high-base super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, causes the ally character "Mume" to fight against the enemy character "Maskman" at the end of the introduction part. After winning the battle, a performance result of a big win (control to a big win game state) is notified as a performance result of the high base reach A performance, and then specified by a variable display result specifying command to the image display device 5.例文帳に追加A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the types of jackpots selected is displayed. On the other hand, when a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command after the high base super reach A, the reach is lost. A performance result to the effect that it is not a big hit is reported as the performance result of the base reach A performance, and then a combination of decoration patterns (large) indicating the type of reach loss designated by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5.例文帳に追加display.

[Regarding the indication of expectations for high base reach A to D productions]
Since the expectation level suggestion display of high base reach A to D production is common except that the expectation level suggested by the expectation level suggestion display is different, here we will explain the expectation level suggestion display of high base reach A production, The explanation of the expectation level suggestive display of the base reach B-D effects will be omitted.

In the title display part of the high base reach A production, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Battle reach A" and the expectation indication display in a size smaller than the title characters "Battle reach A". The expectation indication displayed in the title display part is, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the time-saving state A or the probability variable state in which the high base reach A effect is executed, an object indicating the number of pending and an object indicating active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the pending display and active display in the title display part , and the expectation level suggesting display are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that the object that constitutes the pending display and the active display will be misidentified as the object of the expectation level suggesting display. Therefore, in the title display part of the high base reach A production where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the suspension display and active display are configured by not displaying the expectation level suggestion display and the suspension display and active display at the same time. This prevents the object from being misidentified as the object of the expectation indication display.

In addition, in the time saving state A or the probability variable state, the game ball hardly enters the first start winning opening, so if the number of reservations of the second special figure is the maximum (4) and is being displayed variable, the reservation A maximum of 5 objects may be displayed as display and active display, and it will match the number of objects indicating that the expectation level is the maximum in the expectation level indication display, but the high base reach A production In the title display part, since the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display, when a maximum of 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, the high base reach A effect is executed. However, it is possible to prevent the object displayed as the pending display and the active display from being confused with the object of the expectation level suggestion display, and misunderstanding that the expectation level is the maximum in the expectation level suggestion display.

Further, when the high base reach A effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the title characters "Battle reach A" are displayed only in part during the title start period. Displayed in an enlarged size that is not visible in the area, then reduced in size so that all characters are visible in the display area, and when the background dedicated to title display with high base reach A effect is displayed, the title start period Since the suspended display and the active display that were displayed before are hidden, the suspended display and the active display can be hidden without a sense of discomfort. In addition, when executing the high base reach A effect, by executing the single color display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white except for the decorative pattern (small) etc. of the reach mode, it is displayed before the single color display effect. A configuration may be employed in which the suspended display and the active display that have been displayed may be deleted, and even in such a configuration, the suspended display and the active display can be hidden without causing a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the high base reach A production, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle reach A" are displayed in place in a manner in which the expectation level indication display is hidden. The state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation suggestive display is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g4), in the initial stage, the colors of the five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation suggestive display are all displayed in black. 44 (g5), 3 of the 5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the high base reach A effect (3.5 for the high base reach B effect, 4 for the high base reach C effect, and 4 for the high base reach C effect) By changing the color of the star-shaped object (4.5 in the reach D production) from black to gold, the expectation of a big hit in the high base reach A production is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation suggestive display from being confused.

[Regarding the display position of the title character]
11-46 is a diagram showing positions where title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 11-46(A) and 11-46(B), the image display device 5 has a rectangular display area 5L. The visual recognition area in the display area 5L is an area that can be visually recognized from the opening 24 formed in the game board 2, that is, an area that is not covered by members constituting the game board 2. FIG.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!" At this time, the fixed position where the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!" The position overlaps with the intersection of the diagonal lines of 5L, and as shown in FIG. It overlaps with the intersection of the diagonals of a certain visible rectangular area 5S.

Similarly, the title characters for the low base weak reach B production "Biribiri Hockey Showdown", the title characters for the low base strong reach A production "Two people catch the explosion!", The title characters for the low base strong reach B production "Shock Robo Battle", low-base strong reach C production title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle", low base strongest reach production title character "6 people catch the explosion!", high base reach A production title character "Battle Reach A" , the title character "Battle reach B" for high base reach B production, the title character "Battle reach C" for high base reach C production, and the title character "Battle reach D" for high base reach D production. As shown in FIG. 11-46(A), the fixed position where the title characters are displayed during the title display period is the position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5. As shown in 11-46(B), the intersection of the diagonals of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area that is not obstructed by the members of the game board 2 within the visible area of the image display device 5, and the It is in an overlapping position.

The design of game machines is often changed in the development stage, and the area where the display area 5L of the image display device 5 is covered by the members constituting the game board 2 changes due to the change in the design of the game board 2. The visible area of the display area 5L may be changed. In addition, there are cases where a game machine installed in a game store is taken over, repaired, and resold. The visible area of the display area 5L may be changed by changing the area covered with the display area 5L. In such a case, if the placement of the title characters in the super ready-to-win effect is determined based on the display area 5L of the image display device 5, the display position of the title characters may deviate greatly from the center of the visible area. .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in any title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the fixed positions where the title characters are displayed during the title display period are the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5. It is a position that overlaps with the intersection point and also overlaps with the intersection point of the diagonals of the visible rectangular area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area that is not obstructed by the members of the game board 2 within the visible area of the image display device 5. Therefore, the title character displayed at a fixed position during the title display period is displayed at a position overlapping both the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L and the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible rectangular area 5S. Even if the design of the game board 2 is changed when the machine is reused, it is possible to prevent the display position of the title characters from deviating greatly from the center of the visual recognition area.

[About the duration of Super Reach production]
FIG. 11-47 is a diagram showing the effect time of each super ready-to-win effect, and FIG. 11-48 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the effect times of each super ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47, the overall presentation time of the low base weak reach A presentation (the time from the start of the title display part to the end of the introduction part) is T1-1, and the presentation of the title display part The time is Tt1, the effect time of the title start period is Tt1a, the effect time of the title display period is Tt1b, and the effect time of the title end period is Tt1c.

The overall effect time of the low base weak reach B effect is T1-2, the effect time of the title display part is Tt1, the effect time of the title start period is Tt1a, and the effect time of the title display period is Tt1b. There is, and the performance time of the title end period is Tt1c.

Although the overall presentation time differs between the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, the effect time of the title display part, the effect time of the title start period, the effect time of the title display period, and the title end The presentation time of each period is the same time.

As shown in FIG. 11-47, the overall effect time of the low base strong reach A effect is T2-1, the effect time of the title display part is Tt2, and the effect time of the title start period is Tt2a, The effect time of the title display period is Tt2b, and the effect time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall effect time of the low base strong reach B effect is T2-2, the effect time of the title display part is Tt2, the effect time of the title start period is Tt2a, and the effect time of the title display period is Tt2b. There is, and the performance time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall effect time of the low base strong reach C effect is T2-3, the effect time of the title display part is Tt2, the effect time of the title start period is Tt2a, and the effect time of the title display period is Tt2b. There is, and the performance time of the title end period is Tt2c.

In addition, although the total performance time is different for the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect, the effect time of the title display part, the effect time of the title start period, the title The rendering time of the display period and the rendering time of the title end period are the same.

The overall effect time of the low base strongest reach effect is T3, the effect time of the title display part is Tt3, the effect time of the title start period is Tt3a, the effect time of the title display period is Tt3b, and the title The rendering time of the end period is Tt3c.

The overall performance time of the high base reach performances A to D is T4, the performance time of the title display part is Tt4, and the performance time of the title start period is Tt4a. The presentation time is Tt4b, and the presentation time during the title end period is Tt4c.

Comparing the overall performance time of the low-base middle (normal state) super reach performance in this form, as shown in FIG. The total performance time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of the low-base strong reach A performance, the low-base strong reach B performance, and the low-base strong reach C performance with high expectations for big hits is the low-base weak reach A Longer than the overall performance time (T1-1, T1-2) of the production, low base weak reach B production, and expects a bigger hit than low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach production B, low base weak reach C production The total production time (T3) of the high-level low-base strongest reach production is the total production time (T2-1, T2- 2, T2-3) is set longer.

In addition, among the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production, the total production time (T1 -2) is set longer than the entire presentation time (T1-1) of the low base weak reach A presentation. In addition, low base strength reach A production, low base strength reach B production, and low base strength reach C production, low base strength reach A production and low base strength reach C production, which have higher expectations for big hits than low base strength reach A production and low base strength reach production B. The overall production time (T2-3) is longer than the overall production time (T2-1, T2-2) of the low base strong reach A production and the low base strong reach B production (T2-1, T2-2), and the low base strong reach A production, Of the low-base strong reach B effects, the total effect time (T2-2) of the low-base strong reach B effect, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the low-base strong reach A effect, is the total effect time of the low-base strong reach A effect. It is set longer than (T2-1).

Comparing the production time of the title start period, title display period, and title end period in the title display part in this form, as shown in FIG. production, low base strong reach A-C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A-D production), the production time during the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b/Tt4b) is the same as the production during the title start period. Longer than the time (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) and the production time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c), and the production time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) is longer than the title end period is set longer than the presentation time (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c).

Comparing the production time of the title display part in the super reach production in this form, as shown in FIG. The production time (Tt2) of the title display part of the strong base reach A production, the low base strong reach B production, and the low base strong reach C production is the production of the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production. The production time (Tt3) of the title display part of the low-base strong reach A production, the low-base strong reach production B, and the low-base strong reach production with a higher expectation for a big hit than the low-base weak reach C production, which is longer than the time (Tt1). is set longer than the effect time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect. In addition, the production time (Tt4) of the title display part of the high base reach A to D production is the production of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B production, the low base strong reach A to C production, and the low base strongest reach production. It is set shorter than the time (Tt1, Tt2, Tt3).

In this form, when comparing the title start period and title display period in the low base strongest reach production and high base reach A to D productions, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (D), the title in the low base strongest reach production The production time (Tt3a) of the start period is set longer than the production time (Tt4a) of the title start period in the high base reach A to D productions, and as shown in FIG. The effect time (Tt3b) of the title display period in the reach effect is set longer than the effect time (Tt4b) of the title display period in the high base reach AD effects.

In this form, when comparing the performance time of the title start period in the super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state), As shown in FIG. 11-48 (F), low base weak reach A production, low base weak reach B production, low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, low base strong reach, which have higher expectations for big hits than low base weak reach B production The production time (Tt2a) of the title start period of C production is longer than the production time (Tt1a) of the title start period of low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach B production, and is longer than low base strong reach A production and low base. Strong reach B, low base Weak reach C It is set longer than the effect time (Tt2a) of the title start period of the base strong reach C effect.

In this form, when comparing the title display period in the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during low base (normal state), As shown in FIG. 11-48 (G), low base weak reach A production, low base weak reach B production, low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, low base strong reach B production with higher expectations for big hit than low base weak reach B production The effect time (Tt2b) of the title display period of C effect is longer than the effect time (Tt1b) of the title display period of low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and is longer than the low base strong reach A effect and low base. Strong reach B, Low base Weak reach C It is set longer than the effect time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the base strong reach C effect.

In this form, when comparing the performance time during the title end period in the super reach performance (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) during low base (normal state), As shown in FIG. 11-48 (H), low base weak reach A production, low base weak reach B production, low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, low base strong reach B production with higher expectation for big hit than low base weak reach B production The effect time (Tt2c) in the title end period of the C effect is longer than the effect time (Tt1c) in the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and is longer than the low base strong reach A effect and the low base. Strong reach B, low base Weak reach C It is set longer than the effect time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the base strong reach C effect.

In this form, the character display period of the title display part (title display A period that does not include the prologue period described later in a part, and is a period that includes the title start period, title display period, and title end period). The performance time (Tt2d) of the character display period of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance, which have higher expectations for big hits than the weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, is Longer than the effect time (Tt1d) of the character display period of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and the hit is greater than the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach effect B, and the low base weak reach C effect. The effect time (Tt3d) of the character display period of the low base strongest reach effect with high expectation is the character display period (Tt2d) of the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect. ) is set longer than

In this form, the title start period and the title display period in the super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) When comparing, as shown in FIGS. 11-48 (J) (K), any super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production in low base (normal state) , Strongest reach effect at low base), the effect time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b) is longer than the effect time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a), and the effect time of the title start period (Tt1a /Tt2a/Tt3a) is set longer than the effect time (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c) of the title end period.

In this form, super reach performance during low base (normal state) (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) and high base (time saving state A and variable state) Comparing the overall production time of the medium super reach production (high base reach A to D production), as shown in Figure 11-48 (L), the super reach production in the high base (time saving state A and variable state) The total production time (T4) of (high base reach A to D production) is the super reach production during low base (normal state) (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low It is set shorter than the entire performance time (T1-1, T1-2, T2-1, T2-3, T3) of the base strongest reach performance).

[Regarding the title character of the Super Reach effect]
FIG. 11-49 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters of the title display part and the decorative design in the super ready-to-win effect.

As shown in Fig. 11-49 (A), the title character of the low-base weak reach A production is "Catch Bakuchu!" The standard size of title characters) is FJ, and the size of the display area in which the title characters are displayed (the size of the area including all the title characters) is EJA.

The title character of the low base weak reach B effect is "Biribiri Hockey Showdown", the number of characters in the title is 10, the font size of the title character is FJ, and the display area size in which the title character is displayed is EJB. .

The title characters of the low base strong reach A production are "Catch Bakuchu with two people!" The size is EKA.

The title characters of the low-base strong reach B effect are "Gekishin Robo Battle", the number of characters in the title is 7, the font size of the title characters is FK, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed is EKB.

The title characters of the low base strong reach C effect are "Great Earthquake Robo Battle", the number of characters in the title is 8 characters, the font size of the title characters is FK, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed is EKC. .

The title character of the low base strongest reach effect is "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" is ESK.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (A), the font size of the decorative pattern (large) before developing into the super reach effect is KD, and the font size of the decorative pattern (small) after developing into the super reach effect is KS.

Comparing the font sizes of the title characters in this form, as shown in FIG. , the font size FK of the title characters of the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect is a font size larger than the font size FJ of the title characters of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect. . Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title characters of the low-base strong reach A effect, the low-base strong reach B effect, and the low-base strong reach C effect is the low-base weak reach A effect, the low-base weak reach. The character size is larger than the largest size character among the characters constituting the title character of the reach B effect.

In addition, the font size FSK of the title character of the low base strong reach A production, the low base strong reach A production, the low base strong reach production B, and the low base strong reach production A production, the low base strong reach A production, the low base strong reach A production, the low base strong reach A production, The font size is larger than the font size FK of the title characters of the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect. Furthermore, the smallest character size among the characters composing the title characters of the low-base strongest reach effect constitutes the title characters of the low-base strong reach A effect, the low-base strong reach B effect, and the low-base strong reach C effect. The size is larger than the size of the largest sized character.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), the font size FJ of the title character of the low base weak reach A production, the low base weak reach B production, the low base strong reach A production, the low base strong reach B production, the low The font size FK of the title character of the strong base reach C effect and the font size FSK of the title character of the low base strongest reach effect are both smaller than the font size KD of the decorative pattern (large) before developing into the super reach effect. The font size is larger than the font size KS of the decoration pattern (small) after developing into the super ready-to-win effect. In addition, the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A effect, low base weak reach B effect, low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, low base strong reach The size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the C production, and the largest size of the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strongest reach production, both develop into a super reach production. The size is smaller than the size of the smallest size character among the characters that can be taken by the previous decorative pattern (large), and it is the smallest of the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect. Small size character size, low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, low base strong reach C effect The size of the smallest size character among the characters that make up the title characters, low base strongest reach effect The size of the smallest size character among the characters that make up the title characters is larger than the size of the largest size character among the characters that can be used in the decoration pattern (small) after developing the Super Reach effect. .

When comparing the display area size of the title character in this form, as shown in FIG. The display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of title characters for production, low base strong reach B production, and low base strong reach C production are the display area sizes EJA for low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach B production. , Larger than EJB, low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B, low base weak reach C production with higher expectations for big hits Low base strongest reach production title character display area size ESK is a low base It is larger than the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title characters of the strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect.

[About indication of expectation level]
FIG. 11-50 is a diagram showing the execution status of the expectation suggestive display in the title display part of the super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the expectation indication displayed in the title display part is five star-shaped objects and is displayed above the star-shaped object. The degree of expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects. be.

11-50(A), the effect control CPU 120 first displays five star-shaped objects in black, and the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation. After displaying the characters "Expectation" to indicate that the object is the object, a plurality of star-shaped objects to be changed from black to gold are changed from black to gold step by step in order from the left side. When the effect control CPU 120 changes the color of the star-shaped object from black to gold, the effect control CPU 120 highlights the corresponding star-shaped object, and then changes the color to normal display in gold.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-50(B), the effect control CPU 120 enlarges and displays the star-shaped object whose color is to be changed, changes the color to white so as to shine from the center toward the periphery, and After changing the entire enlarged object to white until disappears, display a star-shaped object whose whole or half has changed to gold. In particular, for the second to third star-shaped objects, a part of the enlarged display of the star-shaped object is part of the characters "expectation" to indicate that the star-shaped object indicates the degree of expectation. Enlarge to a size that overlaps with the In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs highlighting in a common manner when changing the entire black star object to gold and when changing half of the star object to gold.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the effect control CPU 120 changes the color of a plurality of star-shaped objects to gold. At the timing (t1) before normal display, the next star-shaped object is started to be highlighted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not start highlighting the two adjacent star-shaped objects until the timing (t2) when the highlighting of the star-shaped object whose highlighting started earlier ends, and highlights it first. At the timing (t2) when the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started . That is, two adjacent star-shaped objects are highlighted at the same time, but three star-shaped objects are not highlighted simultaneously.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the effect control CPU 120 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the expectation suggesting sound at the timing when the star-shaped object is started to be highlighted, and a plurality of star-shaped objects are displayed. When changing the object to gold, the output of the expectation suggestive sound associated with the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first is terminated before the highlighting of the next star-shaped object is started, and the next star-shaped object is highlighted. It is designed not to be output overlapping with the expectation suggestive sound accompanying the highlighting of the star-shaped object.

[About selection effect]
FIG. 11-51 is a diagram showing the execution status of the selection effect. The selection effect is from the normal reach effect to the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect directly without going through the low base strong reach A to C effects or the low base strongest reach effect, any kind of super It is the production|presentation which specifies whether reach production|presentation is performed.

When the selection effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the normal reach effect as shown in FIG. A window is displayed in the display area of , and the title of the selection effect is displayed in the window. In the title of the selection effect, a message "Upgrade your reach!" is displayed, suggesting that the selection effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the title image of the super reach effect in the window, the button image imitating the push button 31B, and the continuous operation of the push button 31B. and an operation prompting image consisting of the operation prompting characters "Consecutive hits!" The title image of the super reach effect is an image with the same content as the display content of the title display period in the title display part of each super reach effect. , the expectation indication is also displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 selects the title image of the low base weak reach A effect, which has a jackpot expectation level of 0 as the title image of the super reach effect displayed in the window and has the lowest level of expectation for development to other super reach effect. is first displayed, and each time the operation of the push button 31B is detected for the number of times corresponding to the title image of the displayed super ready-to-win effect, the super ready-to-win effect corresponding to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is performed. Switch to the title image of the next super reach effect until the title image is reached.

As shown in Figure 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the title image of the super reach effect displayed in the window is the lowest low base weak reach A effect with the lowest development expectation for other super reach effects After the title image, expectations for development to other super reach effects are higher than low base weak reach A effects Expectations for big hits are higher than low base weak reach B effects, title images for low base weak reach B effects, and low base weak reach A and B effects Title image of low-base strong reach A production, low-base strong reach B production title image with higher expectations for big hits than low-base strong reach A production, low-base strong reach B productions with higher expectations for big wins than low-base strong reach B production The title image of the C production and the title image of the low base strongest reach production having a higher expectation for a big hit than the low base strong reach C production are switched in order.

Then, when the title image of the super ready-to-win effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the type specified by the variation pattern specifying command, the effect control CPU 120 pushes the number of push buttons corresponding to the title image of the displayed super ready-to-win effect. When the operation of 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h9), the confirmation image in which the operation promotion image disappears and only the title image of the super reach effect is displayed in the window is displayed. It is notified that the super ready-to-win effect of the title image will be executed, and then the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-52, the number of operations of the push button 3B to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect is three times, and the title image of the low base weak reach B effect is changed to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect. The number of operations of the push button 31B for switching to the title image of the low base strong reach A effect is 4 times, and the number of operations of the push button 31B to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach A effect to the title image of the low base strong reach B effect is 8 times. The number of operations of the push button 31B for switching from the title image with low base strong reach B effect to the title image with low base strong reach C effect is 10 times, and the title image with low base strong reach C effect is changed to the title image with low base strong reach effect. The number of operations of the push button 31B for switching to the image is 15 times, and the higher the attitude of the super reach performance of the title image to be switched to another super reach performance or the higher the expectation of the big win, the more necessary it is to switch to the next title image. Therefore, the push button 31B must be operated many times.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-52, when the selection effect is executed, the low base weak reach A and B effects are not executed, and the expected degree of jackpot is always higher than the low base strong reach A effect. It is confirmed that the super reach effect will be executed, the ratio of executing the low base strong reach A effect is about 32.18%, the ratio of executing the low base strong reach B effect is about 30.16%, and the low base The ratio of executing the strong reach C effect is about 30.30%, and the ratio of executing the low base strongest reach effect is about 7.36%.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the title image of the low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach effect in the selected effects to display the expectation suggestive display in the same way as the title display part. In the expectation indication display in the part, five star-shaped objects are displayed in black, and multiple star-shaped objects that change from black to gold are gradually changed from black to gold in order from the left. , In the expectation suggestion display displayed in the selection effect, the number of star-shaped objects indicating the expectation level of the corresponding super reach effect out of the five star-shaped objects is displayed in gold from the beginning. .

The minimum time required for switching from the title image of the super ready-to-win effect displayed in the selection effect to the title image of the next super ready-to-win effect is the number of times corresponding to the title image of the super ready-to-win effect, and pressing the push button 31B once. This is the time obtained by multiplying the time required for the operation. The time required for one operation of the push button 31B is about 80 ms, and the push button 31B needs to be operated three times when switching from the title image with the low base weak reach A effect to the title image with the low base weak reach B effect. , and the minimum required time is about 240 ms.

On the other hand, in the expectation indication of the title display part, the time for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold after being highlighted, that is, the time for the suggested expectation to change by one level is about 300 ms, and the low base weak reach A It is set longer than the minimum required time for switching from the title image of the effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect. For this reason, in the selected effect, the effect control CPU 120 changes the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the low base in a time shorter than the time in which the degree of expectation suggested in the degree of expectation suggestive display of the title display part changes by one step. It is possible to switch to the title image of the weak reach B effect.

[About effects that can be executed during variable display]
FIG. 11-53 is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during variable display. Effects that can be executed during variable display include description display effects, title color change effects, and operation promotion effects AD, as shown in FIG. 11-53.

The explanation display effect is an effect that can be executed during the prologue display period in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, and is an effect for displaying an explanation suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high.

The title color change effect is a effect that can be executed during the title display period in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect and B effect, and is the effect of changing the color of the title characters from the initial white to red or gold.

The operation promotion performance A is a performance that can be executed in the normal reach performance, displays an operation promotion image prompting the operation of the push button 31B, and develops into the low base weak reach A performance and B performance according to the operation of the push button 31B. It is a production that informs whether or not. In addition, in the operation promoting effect A, depending on the operation of the push button 31B, not only the low base weak reach A effect and B effect, but also the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect can be developed. good.

The operation promotion effect B is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation promotion image (small) or an operation promotion image (large) that prompts the operation of the push button 31B. , and indicates whether or not it will develop into one of the low base strong reach A to C effects according to the operation of the push button 31B. In addition, in the structure in which a big win is reported as a performance result in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the performance result as to whether or not a big win is reported in response to the operation of the push button 31B in the operation promotion performance B. It may be configured.

The operation promotion effect C is an effect that can be executed in the middle of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the strongest reach effect. This is an effect in which one of a plurality of types of cut-in images is displayed according to.

The operation promotion effect D is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation promotion image (small) or an operation promotion image (large) that prompts the operation of the push button 31B. , is an effect for notifying the effect result of whether or not a big hit is achieved according to the operation of the push button 31B.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect during the variable display, whether or not to execute the title color change effect and which color to change to, and whether or not to execute the operation promotion effect A. , which of the operation prompting image (small) or the operation prompting image (large) is to be displayed in the operation prompting effect B, whether or not the operation prompting effect C is to be executed, and the cut-in image (A) or the cut-in image (B) In the advance notice effect determination process of the variable display start setting process, it is determined which of the above is to be displayed and which of the operation prompt image (small) and the operation prompt image (large) is to be displayed in the operation prompt effect D.

As shown in FIG. 11-54(A), in the advance notice effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach A to C effects are executed is specified, whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect is determined. At this time, when a variation pattern that results in a failure of the performance result is specified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when a variation pattern is specified in which the effect result is a big hit, non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution is determined at a rate of 80%. In this way, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a big hit is specified, the execution of the explanatory text display effect is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a loss is specified, so low base strong reach A Execution of the explanation text display effect during the prologue display period in the title display part of the ~C effect suggests that the possibility of a big hit is high.

In this embodiment, the description display effect is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part, and regardless of whether the description display effect is executed in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects. However, the execution time of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the execution time of the title display part do not change, but as a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach A to C effects are performed, the first variation pattern, A second variation pattern in which the variation time is set longer than the first variation pattern, and when the first variation pattern is specified, the explanation display effect is not executed, and the second variation pattern is specified. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the explanation text display effect is executed using a variation time set longer than the first variation pattern. In such a configuration, it is not determined whether or not the explanation display effect is executed in the notice effect determination process, but the explanation is determined by whether the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern is specified. It is determined whether or not to execute the display effect. At this time, by determining the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern so that the expectation of the big hit is higher when the explanation display effect is executed than when the explanation portion effect is not executed, low base strong reach It is suggested that the possibility of a big hit is high by executing the description display effect in the title display parts of the effects A to C.

As shown in FIG. 11-54(B), in the advance notice effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base weak reach A and B effects are executed is specified, whether or not the title color change effect is executed , and which color is to be changed when the title color change effect is executed is determined. At this time, if a variation pattern is identified that results in a failure, non-execution (white) is determined at a rate of 80%, execution (red) is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution (gold) is determined. Not determined. Also, if a variation pattern that develops into a low-base strong reach A to C production and a low-base strongest reach production is specified, non-execution (white) is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution (red) at a rate of 75% ) is determined, and execution (gold) is determined at a rate of 5%. In this way, when a variation pattern that develops into a low-base strong reach A to C effect and a low-base strongest reach effect is specified, the title color change effect is executed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a deviation is specified. has been decided, it is highly likely that by changing the color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B productions, it will develop into a low base strong reach A to C production and a low base strong reach production. It is suggested. In addition, since the execution (gold) is decided only when the variation pattern that develops to the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach production is specified, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A, B production By changing the color of the title letters to gold, it is confirmed that it will develop into a low base strong reach A to C production and a low base strongest reach production.

In addition, after the low-base weak reach A and B effects are executed, in a configuration including a variation pattern that leads to a big hit without developing into another super reach effect, if a variation pattern that leads to a big win is specified, a variation that results in a loss. The execution of the title color change effect is decided at a higher rate than when the pattern is specified, and the possibility of a big hit is high due to the change in the color of the title characters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A, B effect. may be suggested. In addition, in such a configuration, execution (gold) is determined only when a variation pattern that becomes a big hit is specified, and the color of the title characters changes to gold in the title display part of the low base strong reach A, B production. The jackpot may be determined by doing so.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (C), in the notice effect determination process, when a variation pattern that deviates from the normal reach effect and a variation pattern that develops from the normal reach effect to the low base weak reach A and B effects are specified. , whether or not to execute the operation prompting effect A is determined. At this time, when a variation pattern that results in a deviation is specified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution is determined at a rate of 50%. Also, when a variation pattern that develops into low base weak reach A and B effects is identified, execution is determined at a rate of 100%. In this way, the execution is always determined when a variation pattern that develops into a low base weak reach A, B effect is specified, and the execution may be determined even when a variation pattern that results in a deviation is specified. , the possibility of developing into low base weak reach A and B effects is suggested by executing the operation promotion effect A in the normal reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (D), in the notice effect determination process, the effect result of the low base weak reach A, B effect is a variation pattern, the low base weak reach A, B effect to the low base strong reach When a variation pattern that develops into the A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect is specified, it is determined whether to display the operation prompting image (small) or the operation prompting image (large). At this time, when a variation pattern that results in a deviation is specified, the operation prompting image (small) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the operation prompting image (large) is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when a variation pattern that develops into a low-base strong reach A to C production and a low-base strongest reach production is specified, an operation promotion image (small) is determined at a rate of 10%, and an operation promotion image is determined at a rate of 90%. The image (large) is determined. In this way, when a variation pattern that develops into a low-base strong reach A to C production and a low-base strongest reach production is specified, the operation prompting image (small) is displayed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that becomes a deviation is specified. And since the operation promotion image (large) is determined among the operation promotion images (large), the operation promotion image (large) was displayed in the operation promotion effect B at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B productions. In this case, it is suggested that there is a high possibility of developing into low-base strong reach A to C effects and low-base strongest reach effects than when the operation prompting image (small) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (E), in the advance notice effect determination process, when a variation pattern is specified in which the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect are executed, the operation promotion effect C and whether to display the cut-in image (A) or the cut-in image (B) when the operation prompting effect C is to be executed. At this time, if a variation pattern is identified that results in a failure, non-execution is determined at a rate of 50%, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined by the ratio. In addition, when a variation pattern that results in a big hit is specified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined at a rate of 65%. , execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined. In this way, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a big hit is specified, the execution of the operation promotion performance C is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a loss is specified, so the low base strong reach A Execution of the operation promotion effect C at the end of the introductory part in the ~C effect suggests that the possibility of a big hit is high. In addition, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a big hit is specified, a cut-in image ( Since B) is displayed, the cut-in image (A) is displayed when the operation promotion effect C is executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A to C effects and the cut-in image (B) is displayed. It is suggested that the possibility of a big hit is higher than if the

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (F), in the notice effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect are executed is specified, an operation promotion image ( It is decided whether to display the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large). At this time, when a variation pattern that results in a failure of the performance result is specified, the operation prompting image (small) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the operation prompting image (large) is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, when a variation pattern is specified in which the effect result is a big hit, the operation prompting image (small) is determined at a rate of 10%, and the operation prompting image (large) is determined at a rate of 90%. In this way, when a variation pattern in which the production result is a big hit is specified, the operation promotion image (small) and the operation promotion image (large) are selected at a higher rate than in the case where the variation pattern that results in a loss is specified. Since the image (large) is determined, when the operation promotion image (large) is displayed in the operation promotion production D at the end of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach production, the operation promotion It is suggested that the possibility of winning a big hit is higher than when the image (small) is displayed.

[Description display effects]
FIG. 11-55 is a diagram showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display effect, and FIG. 11-56 is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display effect. .

During the prologue display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the effect control CPU 120 displays the ally character "Muyume" as shown in FIGS. 11-55(A) to (I). After that, the ally character "Muyume" is enlarged until the display area is completely filled, and when performing an explanatory text display effect during the prologue display period, the background in which the ally character "Muyume" is enlarged and displayed is displayed on the front side. Display the explanation characters "Surprise!", "Peach Tree", and "Great Lucky!" in order on the layers. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-55(A), the effect control CPU 120 first causes the explanation character "Surprise!" 11-56 (t1)), as shown in FIG. 11-55 (B), when it is moved to the vicinity of the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at a low speed (FIG. 11-56 (t2)), and then , as shown in FIG. 11-55(C), it is displayed while being moved leftward again at high speed until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56(t3)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-55(D), the effect control CPU 120 causes the explanation character "peach tree" to be displayed while moving leftward at high speed from the right side of the display area toward the center (see FIG. 11 -56 (t4)), as shown in Fig. 11-55 (E), when it is moved to the vicinity of the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at low speed (Fig. 11-56 (t5)), and then, As shown in FIG. 11-55(F), it is displayed while being moved to the left at high speed again until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56(t6)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-55(G), the effect control CPU 120 causes the explanation character "Big Lucky!" -56 (t7)), as shown in Fig. 11-55 (H), when it is moved to the vicinity of the center, it is displayed while moving leftward at a low speed (Fig. 11-56 (t8)), and then, As shown in FIG. 11-55(I), it is displayed while being moved to the left at high speed again until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56(t9)).

[About the title color change effect]
FIG. 11-57 is a diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect, and FIG. 11-58 is a diagram showing the timing at which the color of title characters changes in the title color change effect.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a title color change effect for changing the white title characters to red or gold in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 causes part of the white title characters to appear from the left side of the display area during the title start period, move them toward the fixed position, and move them to the fixed position. to stop. Thereafter, during the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 causes the white title characters to be displayed stationary at a fixed position, as shown in FIG. 11-57(A). Then, when the execution of the title color change effect is not determined, the effect control CPU 120 causes the specific sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R after the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period. As shown in -57 (B) and (C), the white title character is kept stationary at a fixed position, and then the white title character displayed at the fixed position during the title end period is moved from the fixed position. Move it to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear.

On the other hand, when the execution of the title color change effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R after the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period. As shown in -57 (D), if the title character displayed at the fixed position is changed to appear to glow, and after the time of t2 has elapsed, it is decided to change to red, As shown in FIG. 11-57(E), the title characters are changed to red, and if change to gold is determined, the title characters are changed to gold as shown in FIG. 11-57(F). After that, the title characters are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear while maintaining the changed color displayed at the fixed position during the title ending period. In the case where the title characters are changed from shining to red or gold, the title characters are changed to red or gold when the light of the title characters shines.

As shown in FIGS. 11-58 (A) and (B), the effect time T1 of the title start period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects is 500 ms, the effect time T2 of the title display period is 2200 ms, and the title ends. The rendering time T3 of the period is set to 300 ms, and the time t1 from the start of the title display period until the title character changes to appear to glow is 800 ms. The time t2 until the title characters change to red or gold after they become visible is set to 200 ms, and the time t3 until the title display period ends after the title characters change to red or gold is set to 1200 ms. there is

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-58(C), when the color of the title characters changes from white to red or gold, the time (t1) during which the title characters are displayed in white during the title display period is reduced. Also, in the title display period, the time (t3) during which the title characters are displayed in the changed red or gold form is longer than the time (T1+t1) during which the title characters are displayed in the white form in the title display part. Also, the time (t3+T3) during which the title characters are displayed in the changed red or gold color in the title display part is longer.

[Regarding operation prompting effect A]
FIG. 11-59 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation prompting effect A. FIG.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promoting effect A for prompting the operation of the push button 31B in the normal ready-to-win effect.

The performance control CPU 120 is executing a normal ready-to-win effect in which the decoration pattern (large) is in a ready-to-win mode, as shown in FIGS. , an operation facilitating image (small) consisting of a button image (small) simulating the push button 31B and an operation facilitating character (small) urging the operation of the push button 31B "Press!" is displayed.

The button image (small) is formed with a remaining time meter indicating the remaining time of the effective period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid. When the operation of the push button 31B is detected or the remaining amount of the remaining time meter becomes 0, in the case of a variation pattern that develops into a low base weak reach A, B production, as shown in FIG. 11-59 (C) , a white-out effect for displaying the entire display area in white is executed, and then, as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a failure, the effect control CPU 120 erases the operation prompting image (small) and stops the decoration pattern (large) in a failure mode, as shown in FIG. 11-59(E). Let

[Regarding operation promotion effect B]
FIG. 11-60 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation prompting effect B. FIG.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promoting effect B for prompting the operation of the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part in the low base weak reach A and B effects.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the operation promotion performance B is to be executed and that the operation promotion image (small) is to be displayed, the introduction part is displayed as shown in FIG. At the end of , an operation facilitating image (small) consisting of a button image (small) simulating the push button 31B and operation facilitating characters (small) urging the operation of the push button 31B "Press!" is displayed.

11-60 (B) and (C) when it is determined that the operation promotion effect B is to be executed and the operation promotion image (large) is to be displayed. , at the end of the introductory part, an image simulating the push button 31B, a button image (large) that is larger in size than the button image (small) and an operation facilitating character (large) prompting the operation of the push button 31B, "Press! ” is displayed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-60(B), the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of button images (large) with a transparent background, unlike the case where the operation prompting image (small) is displayed. After performing the promotion introduction effect in which these plural button images (large) are combined into one button image (large), the button image (large) and the operation promotion character (large) prompting the operation of the push button 31B, "Push!" to display an operation prompting image (large) consisting of .

A remaining time meter is formed on both the button image (small) and the button image (large). Or, when the remaining time of the remaining time meter becomes 0, in the case of a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C production and a low base strongest reach production, as shown in FIG. 11-60 (D), the operation The promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) is erased, and a drop effect of dropping the movable body 32 is executed, and then, as shown in FIG. Execute production, low base strongest reach production.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 erases the operation prompting image (small) or the operation prompting image (large) as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-60(G), a failure is notified as a result of the effect.

[Regarding operation prompting effect C]
FIG. 11-61 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation prompting effect C. FIG.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promoting effect C to prompt the operation of the push button 31B in the middle of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect.

11-61 (A) (B), the effect control CPU 120, when the execution of the operation promotion effect C is determined, the button image (small ) and an operation prompting character (small) “Push!” prompting the user to operate the push button 31B.

The effect control CPU 120 has decided to display the cut-in image (A), and when the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time of the remaining time meter reaches 0, the operation of the push button 31B is executed as shown in FIG. 11-61 ( As shown in C), after erasing the operation prompting image (small) and displaying the cut-in image (A) in which the friendly character "Nana" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 11-61 (F) , continue the introductory part.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is determined to display the cut-in image (B), and when the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time of the remaining time meter becomes 0, the As shown in 61(D), after erasing the operation prompting image (small) and displaying the cut-in image (B) in which the friend character "Jam" is displayed, the image shown in FIG. 11-61(F) is displayed. Execute the continuation of the introductory part as follows.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the remaining time meter when it is determined to display the cut-in image (A) and when it is determined to display the cut-in image (B). When the operation of the push button 31B is not detected before the remaining amount reaches 0, the operation prompting image (small) is erased while continuing the presentation of the middle stage of the introductory part, as shown in FIG. 11-61(E). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-61(F), the continuation of the introductory part is executed.

[Regarding operation promotion effect D]
FIG. 11-62 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation prompting effect D. FIG.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promoting effect D for prompting the operation of the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part in the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect.

When it is decided to display the operation prompting image (small), the effect control CPU 120 simulates the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part as shown in FIGS. 11-62 (A) and (B). An operation facilitating image (small) consisting of a button image (small) and an operation facilitating character (small) "Push!" for prompting the operation of the push button 31B is displayed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 pushes the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part as shown in FIGS. An operation facilitating image (large), which is a simulated image and consists of a button image (large) larger in size than the button image (small) and an operation facilitating character (large) prompting the operation of the push button 31B, "Push!" is displayed. Let At this time, unlike the case where the operation promotion image (small) is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of button images (large) with a transparent background, and these plurality of button images (large) are combined into one button. After performing the promotion introduction performance (see FIG. 11-60(B)) that is combined into a large image, it consists of a button image (large) and operation promotion characters (large) "Push!" to prompt the operation of the push button 31B. Display the operation promotion image (large).

The effect control CPU 120 detects the operation of the push button 31B before the remaining time meter becomes 0, or when the remaining time meter becomes 0, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a big hit. As shown in 11-62 (C) and (H), while the operation prompting image (small) or the operation prompting image (large) gradually disappears, a rainbow effect is executed in which a rainbow pattern swirls over the entire display area. , as shown in FIGS. 11-62 (D) and (I), a big hit is notified as a result of the effect.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 erases the operation prompting image (small) or the operation prompting image (large) as shown in FIGS. A darkening effect is executed to darken the entire display area, and then, as shown in FIGS.

[About the operation promotion image]
FIG. 11-63 is a diagram showing a display mode of an operation prompting image. The effect control CPU 120 displays the button images constituting the operation prompting image (small) and the operation prompting image (large) while alternately and continuously moving in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 11-63(A). In addition, it is displayed while continuously changing between a mode in which the button is not pressed and a mode in which the button is pressed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-63(B), the interval at which the button image moves in the left-right direction differs from the interval at which the button image changes between the state in which the button is not pressed and the state in which the button is pressed. The motion of moving in the left-right direction is not synchronized with the motion of changing to the mode in which the button is not pressed and the mode in which the button is pressed, resulting in complicated motion.

[About the jackpot start effect]
FIG. 11-64 is a diagram showing the execution status of the jackpot start effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-64(A), the effect control CPU 120 stops the decorative pattern (large) in the big win mode, and then issues a big win start designation command for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big win game state. is received, a jackpot start performance is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-64 (B) to (G), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image in which the flames flicker as a background during the big win start effect. As shown in 64(B), the first half of the title characters ``BIG (REG)'' of the big hit title characters ``BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)'' is displayed in an enlarged size, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-64 ( As shown in C), the first half of the title character "BIG (REG)" is gradually reduced to a reduced size in which the entirety is visible in the display area, and is displayed above a fixed position near the center of the display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-64(D), the effect control CPU 120 causes the second half of the title characters "BONUS" out of the title characters "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" of the jackpot title to be displayed in an enlarged size. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-64(E), the second half of the title character "BONUS" is gradually reduced to a reduced size in which the entirety is visible in the display area, and is placed at a fixed position near the center of the display area. It is displayed at the bottom (position below the first half of the title character "BIG").

In this embodiment, when the jackpot game state of 6 rounds is started, "REG BONUS" is displayed as the title character, and when the jackpot game state of 10 rounds is started, "BIG BONUS" is displayed as title characters.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-64 (E) to (G), the effect control CPU 120 displays the entire title character "BIG BONUS" at a fixed position, and then gradually expands the title character "BIG BONUS". After that, as shown in FIG. 11-64(H), the effect during the big win is started, and the display of the image display device 5 is switched to the background of the big win game state.

When the performance control CPU 120 starts the performance during the big hit, first, as shown in FIG. Display the hitting promotion image (small).

The right-handed promotion image (small) is composed of a message "right-handed" (small) that prompts an operation to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) that indicates the right direction, and effect control is performed. As shown in FIGS. 11-64 (H) and (I), the CPU 120 displays a right-handed promotion image (small) from the upper right of the display area over a period from the start of the jackpot middle effect to the end of the jackpot game state. position.

The right-handed promotion image (large) is a message that prompts an operation to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R. It is an arrow indicating the direction, and is composed of an arrow image (large) larger in size than the arrow image (small), and the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. A right-handed promotion image (large) is repeatedly displayed in a mode of moving from the left side to the right side of the display area only for the first fixed time of the period until the end of the jackpot game state after the start of the medium presentation.

In addition, when it is controlled to the big win game state, after the title characters are displayed in the big win start production, it is switched to the big win middle production, and the operation method of the big win game state (the operation method of hitting the game ball toward the right game area 2R). ) and a right-handed promotion image (small) and a right-handed promotion image (large) are displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120, on the side of the main substrate 11, at a timing a predetermined time before the timing at which the control that is advantageous by operating in the operation method of hitting the game ball toward the right game area 2R is performed. The production is switched to the performance during the jackpot, and the right-handed promotion image (small) and the right-handed promotion image (large) are displayed. Therefore, it is advantageous to perform an operation in which the game ball is shot toward the right game area 2R after a predetermined period of time has passed since the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large) are displayed. Control will be performed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, after the title characters are displayed in the big win start effect, terminates the big win start effect, erases the title characters, and switches to the next effect. To erase the title characters of a jackpot start performance in a shorter time than the case of erasing the title characters in the end period, and to switch to the next performance.

In particular, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the effect during the big win in one frame (minimum unit of image update) after the title characters are displayed in the big win start effect, and the right hitting promotion image (small) and the right hitting promotion image. (Large) is displayed. In the title display part of the super ready-to-win production, a title end period is provided instead of one frame, and the title characters are erased over a certain amount of time, but after the title characters are displayed in the big win start production, the big win middle production is performed. , and the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large) are displayed. In some period, there is a possibility that the game ball is hit toward the right game area 2R. The game balls are wasted because the control that is advantageous by operating in the operation method of hitting toward the region 2R has not started. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, after displaying the title characters in the big win start effect, switches to the effect during the big win in one frame (minimum unit for updating the image), and displays the right hitting promotion image (small) and the right hitting. Since the promotion image (large) is displayed, the generation of useless game balls can be suppressed.

[Regarding the number of remaining rotations until play time]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 times variable display without being controlled to a big hit in a low-probability state, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low-probability control is performed. It is controlled to the time saving state B (in the present embodiment, the idle time of 1100 times of time saving) performed 1100 times.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is the number of remaining variable display times until the image display device 5 is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). (see FIG. 11-1) can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-65(A), the production control CPU 120 executes normal reach production, low base weak reach A and B productions, low base strong reach A to C productions, and low base strongest reach production in the normal state. If not, the number of remaining times until play time is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area. The remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is displayed as "remaining XXX times" (XXX is a numerical value from 0 to 900 according to the remaining number of times). At this time, even if the remaining number of times until the play time is 0 to 900, the remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z is displayed in characters of the same font size.

As shown in FIG. 11-65(B), the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time even during execution of the normal ready-to-win effect in which the decoration pattern (large) is in the ready-to-win mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-65 (C), the effect control CPU 120, when it develops from the normal reach effect to the low base weak reach A, B effect, can also play during the execution of the low base weak reach A, B effect. The remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the time is continuously displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. , the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is continuously displayed even after the end of the B effect.

In addition, it is configured such that a big hit can be reported as a result of the performance of the low-base weak reach A, B performance, and when a big win is reported as a performance result of the low-base weak reach A, B performance, the low base weak reach A, B is provided. The remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is continuously displayed until the performance ends, and the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is erased at the end of the low base weak reach A, B performance. It should be noted that the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time may be erased at the time when the big hit is determined as the effect result of the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-65 (F), the effect control CPU 120, when it develops from normal reach effect, low base weak reach A, B effect to low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect Then, the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is erased with the start of the low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach effect. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time at the timing when the selected effect starts when developing from the normal reach effect, and when developing from the low base weak reach A, B effect. , If it is a low base strong reach A to C effect, in the prologue display period of the title display part, the pending display and active display and the remaining number 131SG005Z until play time are erased, and if it is a low base strongest reach effect, the title is displayed. At the start of the part, the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the free time is erased.

In addition, when developing from the low base weak reach A and B effects, the hold display and active The remaining number of times 131SG005Z up to play time may be erased along with the display. As a result, regardless of whether it develops into a low base strong reach A to C production or a low base strongest reach production, it is possible to share the timing of erasing the remaining display, active display, and the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time. .

After that, when the performance control CPU 120 is notified of the deviation as the performance result of the low base strong reach A to C performance and the low base strongest reach performance, as shown in FIGS. 11-65 (G) (H) After the base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect are finished, the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is displayed again. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when a big hit is notified as the effect result of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect, as shown in FIGS. , the remaining count 131SG005Z until the play time is erased until the normal state is reached.

In addition, in the operation promotion effect A, when it is configured to develop into the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect according to the operation of the push button 31B, during the execution of the operation promotion effect A, play time The remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is displayed continuously, and the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is erased with the start of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect. In the case of such a configuration, in the operation promotion effect A, the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the play time is displayed, while the subsequent low base strong reach A to C effects and the operation promotion effect in the low base strongest reach effect In C and D, the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until play time is not displayed.

[Regarding play time start effect]
The game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time reduction state B (play time) when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled to a big hit in the low probability state. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 11-66 (C), lights the right-handed lamp 131SG132 and transmits a right-handed LED lighting notification command. As shown in FIGS. 11-66 (A) and (B), when the variable display stops when the number of times remaining until play time is 0, and a right-handed LED lighting notification command is received, FIG. 11-66 (C) 2, a right hitting promotion image (small) is displayed to prompt an operation to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R. The timing of lighting the right hitting lamp 131SG132 and the timing of displaying the right hitting promotion image (small) are almost the same, but the game control microcomputer 100 lights the right hitting lamp 131SG132 and then hits right. An LED lighting notification command is transmitted, and along with this, the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed promotion image (small), so that the right-handed lamp 131SG132 lights up before the right-handed promotion image (small) is displayed. becomes.

When the time saving state B (play time) is started, the game control microcomputer 100 keeps the right-handed lamp 131SG132 lit until the time saving state B (play time) ends. In addition, the right-handed promotion image (small) is composed of a message "right-handed" (small) that prompts an operation to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) that indicates the right direction. Production control CPU120, as shown in FIGS. 11-66 (C) ~ (H), when the time saving state B (play time) starts, the right hitting promotion image until the time saving state B (play time) ends (Small) is displayed in the upper right position of the display area.

The effect control CPU 120 stops the variable display in the state of 0 times remaining until the play time, and when receiving the game state designation command designating the time saving state B (play time), FIG. 11-66 (D) ~ As shown in (G), a play time start effect is executed.

The play time start effect is a title start period from when a part of the title characters "play time rush" of the play time is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to when it is displayed at a fixed position, and the title characters "play time start". It includes a title display period during which ``Enter into play time'' is displayed at a fixed position, and a title end period until the display of the title characters ``Enter into play time'' displayed at the fixed position disappears and the display is switched to play time presentation.

In the title start period, title display period, and title end period of the play time start effect, the effect control CPU 120 changes the title character "6" in the title start period, title display period, and title end period of the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect. Catch Bakuchu with a person!" is displayed in the same mode as the mode when displaying the title characters 'Enter play time'.

Specifically, during the title start period, the effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "play time rush" as shown in FIG. to display. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display area to be completely filled with a part of the title characters "Play Time Rush". Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-66(D) and 11-66(E), the effect control CPU 120 gradually shrinks the title characters "play time rush" so that all the characters of the title characters "play time rush" are displayed in the display area. The reduced size title character "Play Time Rush" that becomes visible in , is stopped at a fixed position.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "enter play time" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts to the display during the title display period. During the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 causes the title characters "Play Time Rush" to remain displayed at a fixed position as shown in FIGS. 11-66(E) and (F).

After the end of the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the display of the title end period. During the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 replaces the title characters "play time rush" displayed at a fixed position in a reduced size with the title characters "play time rush", as shown in FIGS. Expand until the display area is completely filled with a part of "Rush". At this time, the title characters "enter play time" are displayed in reduced size during the title start period, instead of being enlarged and displayed in a manner opposite to the case where the title characters "enter play time" are displayed in reduced size during the title start period. In a mode different from the reverse mode, the title characters "Enter play time" are expanded until the entire display area is filled with a part of the title characters "Enter play time". In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title character passes during the process of shrinking the title character "Enter the play time" during the title start period is the same as the trajectory that each part of the title character passes during the process that the title character "Enter the play time" expands during the title end period. is different. Therefore, the entire display area is filled with a part of the title characters "play time rush" in a manner different from the manner in which the entire display area is filled at the start of the title start period. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-66(H), the background of the play time effect is switched to start the play time effect.

During the play time start effect, the performance control CPU 120 displays a right-handed promotion image (large) that prompts an operation to launch the game ball toward the right game area 2R, in addition to the right-handed promotion image (small). An immersion warning image (message "Watch out for immersion!") is displayed below the display area.

The right-handed promotion image (large) is a message that prompts an operation to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R. It is an arrow that indicates the direction, and is composed of an arrow image (large) that is larger in size than the arrow image (small), and the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 11-66 (D) to (G), A right-handed promotion image (large) is repeatedly displayed in a mode of moving from the left side to the right side of the display area over the period in which the play time start performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the time saving state B, and when the variable display result is out, select the variation pattern PA1-4 with a special figure variation time of 500 ms. Variable display is performed and controlled to a time saving state B, and when the variable display result is a big hit, a variation pattern PB1-18 with a special figure variation time of 500 ms + 15000 ms is selected and variable display is performed, and a performance control CPU 120 , when the control of the time saving state B is started, the play time start effect is executed during the period in which the variable display according to these variation patterns is performed. After controlling the first variable display controlled to the time saving state B, first the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening in the variable display based on the winning of the game ball, the variable display result is out In this case, the variation time is longer than the variation pattern PA1-4, and the time reduction B start variation pattern in which the variation time corresponding to the play time start effect is determined is selected to perform variable display, and the effect control CPU 120 is in the time reduction state. In the first variable display controlled by B, the play time start effect may be executed during the period in which the variable display by the time saving B start variation pattern is being performed. In addition, in such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100, when the variable display result is a big hit in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state B, to the variation pattern PB1-18 with a special figure variation time of 500ms + 15000ms At the same time, the effect control CPU 120 may stop the decoration pattern (large) in a big win mode without executing the play time start effect.

[Title characters, etc. 1]
FIG. 11-67 shows the title characters of the title display part in the super reach production, the explanation characters of the explanatory text display production, the title characters of the jackpot start production, the operation promotion characters (small) in the operation promotion production (small), and the operation promotion production ( FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between operation-promoting characters (large).

As shown in FIG. 11-67 (A), the title character of the super reach effect is displayed in a stationary state during the title display period, and the background image at that time is a static image (low base strong reach B, C effect, low Strongest base reach production, high base reach A to D production) or action images (low base weak reach A and B production, low base strong reach A production). In addition, the number of characters in the title character of the super reach effect is 7 to 13 characters, and the display time of the title character of the super reach effect (after all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed, at least part of the character string is LR is the time until the display disappears, FR is the font size of the title characters of the super reach effect, and ER is the size of the display area in which the title characters of the super reach effect are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the explanation characters are displayed in the state of motion, and the background image at that time is the motion image. In addition, the number of explanatory characters is 3 to 6, and the display time of the explanatory characters (one of the three explanatory characters) is until at least part of the character string disappears) is LS, the font size of the explanation character is FS, and the explanation character (one explanation character out of three explanation characters) is displayed The display area size is ES.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed in an active state, and the background image at that time is the motion image. In addition, the number of characters of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is 8 characters, and the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start effect (after all the character strings constituting the title characters are displayed, at least part of the character string is not displayed) LB is the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start effect, and EB is the size of the display area where the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation facilitating characters (small) are displayed in an action state, and the background image at that time is the action image. In addition, the number of characters of the operation prompting characters (small) is three, and the display time of the operation prompting characters (small) is the time when the push button 31B is not operated and the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed. period) is L1P, the font size of the operation-promoting characters (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation-promoting characters (small) are displayed is E1P.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation-promoting characters (large) are displayed in an action state, and the background image at that time is the action image. In addition, the number of characters of the operation prompting characters (large) is three, and the display time of the operation prompting characters (large) (the operation of the push button 31B in which the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed without the push button 31B being operated is valid). period) is L2P, the font size of the operation-promoting characters (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation-promoting characters (large) are displayed is E2P.

In this form, when comparing the display time of the title character of the super reach effect, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), and the operation promotion character (large), Fig. 11-67 (B) As shown, the display time LB of the title character of the jackpot start effect is the display time LR, LS, L1P, L2P of the title character, the explanation character, the operation promotion character (small), and the operation promotion character (large) of the super ready-to-win effect. The display time LR of the title character of the super reach effect is longer than the display times LS, L1P, and L2P of the explanatory characters, the operation prompting characters (small), and the operation prompting characters (large), and the operation prompting characters (small), The display times LS and L1P of the operation prompting characters (large) are set longer than the display times LS of the explanation characters. In addition, the display times LR, LB, L1P, and L2P of the title characters of the super ready-to-win effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompting characters (small), and the operation prompting characters (large) all constitute the description display effect. The display time is set to be longer than the display time required to display all the three explanatory characters. In addition, the relationship between these display times is established regardless of the type of super ready-to-win effect.

In this form, when comparing the font sizes of the title character of the super reach effect, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), and the operation promotion character (large), Fig. 11-67 (C) As shown, the font size F2P of the operation promotion character (large) is the font size FR, FS, FB, F1P of the title character of the super reach production, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start production, and the operation promotion character (small). is also a large font size. Furthermore, the size of the smallest size character among the characters that make up the operation promotion character (large) is the title character of the super reach production, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start production, the operation promotion character (small), the operation promotion character ( The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the large).

Also, the font size FB of the title character of the jackpot start effect is a font size larger than the font sizes FR and F1P of the title character, the description character and the operation promotion character (small) of the super ready-to-win effect. In addition, the title character "BIG BONUS" of the big hit start effect is firstly displayed in the first half "BIG" at the upper fixed position, and then the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the lower fixed position, and then the title character "BIG BONUS" is displayed. The display is gradually enlarged, and when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the upper fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the lower fixed position, the size of the characters constituting the title character "BIG BONUS" is displayed. is the smallest. In such a configuration, the size of the title character of the jackpot start effect when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the upper fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the lower fixed position is the size of the title character of the super ready-to-win effect. The size is larger than the character size of the character and the operation-promoting character (small). In addition, when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the smallest size of the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect is Super Reach. The size of the character is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters composing the title character, the explanation character, the operation prompting character (small), and the operation prompting character (large).

Also, the font size FR of the title character of the super reach effect is larger than the font sizes FS and F1P of the explanatory characters and the operation prompting characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the largest sized character among the characters composing the explanatory characters and operation prompting characters (small). .

Also, the font size FS of the explanatory characters is larger than the font size F1P of the operation prompting characters (small). Further, the size of the smallest character among the characters constituting the explanatory characters is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the operation prompting characters (small).

Further, these font size relationships and character size relationships are established regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this form, when comparing the display area size of the super reach effect title character, explanation character, jackpot start effect title character, operation promotion character (small), and operation promotion character (large), Fig. 11-67 (D) , the display area size E2P of the operation prompting characters (large) is the display area sizes ER, ES, and EB of the title characters of the super reach effect, the explanatory characters, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, and the operation prompting characters (small). , E1P. In addition, the display area size EB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, and E1P of the title characters, explanation characters, and operation promotion characters (small) of the super ready-to-win effect. Also, the display area size ES of the explanatory characters is a display area size larger than the display area size E1P of the operation prompting characters (small). Also, the relationship between these display area sizes is established regardless of the type of super ready-to-win effect.

[Title characters, etc. 2]
FIG. 11-68 shows the title characters of the title display part in the super ready-to-win production, the title characters of the jackpot start production, the operation promotion characters (small) in the operation promotion production (small), and the operation promotion characters (large) in the operation promotion production (large). ), the title character of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of times character constituting the remaining number of times until the play time.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the title characters of the super reach effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the character strings are not displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters for the super reach effect is FR, and the display area size for displaying the title characters for the super reach effect is ER.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the character strings are not displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the big win start effect is FB, and the display area size in which the title characters of the big win start effect are displayed is EB.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the operation-promoting characters (small) (the operation valid period of the push button 31B during which the operation-promoting characters (small) are displayed without the push-button 31B being operated) is L1P. , the font size of the operation prompting characters (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed is E1P.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the operation-promoting characters (large) (operation valid period of the push button 31B during which the operation-promoting characters (large) are displayed without the push-button 31B being operated) is L2P. , the font size of the operation-promoting characters (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation-promoting characters (large) are displayed is E2P.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the title characters of the play time start effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the character string is not displayed) ) is LY, the font size of the title characters for the play time start effect is FY, and the display area size for displaying the title characters for the play time start effect is EY.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the font size of the remaining number of times until play time character is FZ, and the display area size for displaying the remaining number of times until play time character is EZ.

In this form, the font size of the title character of the super reach production, the title character of the jackpot start production, the operation promotion character (small), the operation promotion character (large), the title character of the play time start production, and the remaining number of characters until the play time When compared, as shown in FIG. 11-68(B), the font size F2P of the operation promotion character (large) is the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), The font size is larger than the font size FR, FB, F1P, FY, FZ of the title character of the play time start effect and the remaining count character until the play time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest size character among the characters that make up the operation promotion character (large) is the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), and the title character of the play time start effect. , is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters (remaining XXX times (X is a numerical value of 0 to 900)) constituting the remaining number of times characters until the play time. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the operation prompting characters (large) constitutes the characters for the remaining number of times until the play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until the play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest sized character.

In addition, the font size FB of the title character of the jackpot start effect, the font size FR, F1P, The size is larger than FY and FZ. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect is the title character of the super reach effect, the operation promotion character (small), the title character of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of times until the play time. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters composing the character. In addition, the size of the smallest size character among the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start effect constitutes the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until the play time is 0 to 900 times. The size is larger than the size of the largest sized character.

In addition, the font size FY of the title character of the play time start effect is larger than the font size FR, F1P, and FZ of the title character of the super reach effect, the operation promotion character (small), and the remaining number of characters until the play time. be. In addition, the smallest size of the characters that make up the title characters of the play time start effect is the size of the characters that make up the title characters of the super reach effect, the operation prompt character (small), and the remaining number of times characters until the play time. The size is larger than the size of the largest size character. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title characters of the play time start effect is the remaining number of characters until the play time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until the play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the constituent characters.

Also, the font size FR of the title character of the super ready-to-win effect is larger than the font sizes F1P and FZ of the operation prompting character (small) and the remaining count characters until the play time. In addition, the smallest size of the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect is the operation promotion character (small), and the largest size of the characters that make up the characters for the remaining number of times until the play time. is of a larger size than In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title characters of the Super Reach effect constitutes the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until the play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest sized character.

Also, the font size F1P of the operation prompting character (small) is a font size larger than the font size FZ of the remaining count character until the play time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest size character among the characters constituting the operation prompting characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest size character among the characters constituting the remaining number of times characters until the play time. In addition, the size of the smallest size character among the characters constituting the operation prompting character (small) constitutes the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until the play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest sized character.

Further, these font size relationships and character size relationships are established regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this form, the size of the display area for the super reach production title characters, the jackpot start production title characters, the operation promotion characters (small), the operation promotion characters (large), the play time start production title characters, and the remaining number of times characters until the play time , as shown in FIG. 11-68(C), the display area size E2P of the operation promotion character (large) is the title character of the super ready-to-win effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small) ), the display area size of the title character of the play time start effect, and the display area size of the remaining number of characters until the play time ER, EB, E1P, EY, and EZ. In addition, the display area size EB of the title character of the jackpot start effect, the display area size ER of the title character of the super ready-to-win effect, the operation promotion character (small), the title character of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of times characters until the play time, The display area size is larger than E1P, EY, and EZ. In addition, the display area size EY of the title character of the play time start effect is larger than the display area size ER, E1P, and EZ of the title character of the super reach effect, the operation promotion character (small), and the remaining number of times characters until the play time. Region size. In addition, the display area size ER of the title character of the super ready-to-win effect is larger than the display area sizes E1P and EZ of the operation prompting character (small) and the remaining number of times characters until the play time. In addition, the display area size E1P of the operation prompting character (small) is a display area size larger than the display area size EZ of the remaining count character up to play time. Also, the relationship between these display area sizes is established regardless of the type of super ready-to-win effect.

Comparing the display time of the title characters of the super reach effect and the title character of the play time start effect in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-68 (D), the display time LY of the title character of the play time start effect is It is set longer than the display time LR of the title character of the ready-to-win effect. In addition, the relationship between these display times is established regardless of the type of super ready-to-win effect.

Comparing the display mode of the title character of the super reach effect and the title character of the play time start effect in this form, as shown in FIG. In the ~C effect, the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center during the title start period, and the title characters are erased while moving from the center toward the right side of the display area during the title end period. On the other hand, in the low base strongest reach effect and the play time start effect, the title characters are reduced from enlarged display during the title start period, and the title characters are erased while being enlarged during the title end period.

[Regarding the arrangement of LEDs]
The game effect lamps 9 in this embodiment include frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4.

As shown in FIG. 11-69, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 are provided so as to surround the upper position of the image display device 5 of the gaming machine frame 3 and the left side of the game area. It is provided so as to surround the right side of the game area of the game machine frame 3 . Further, the logos LEDLL1 to LL4 are arranged at positions corresponding to the logo "POWERFULII" formed on the front surface of the movable body 32. FIG. Also, the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 are provided at positions corresponding to the decoration portions formed in the game area 2L. Also, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. FIG.

The frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attack lamps LA1 to LA4 are full-color LEDs composed of RGB (Red, Green, Blue) light-emitting elements, and the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 can emit monochromatic red light. The red LEDs, and the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 are white LEDs capable of emitting monochromatic white light.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 11-70 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 outputs luminance data for lighting/flashing/extinguishing one or more of the plurality of LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9, Output to an LED driver (also called a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting / blinking / light extinction performed with respect to lamps, such as LED, by CPU120 for production|presentation control is also called lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the effect control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp in order to turn on/blink/extinguish each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 subject to lamp control. Each game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/lights off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a brightness data table storing brightness data for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 . The luminance data table includes an error luminance data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach luminance data table used during super reach, and a background luminance data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low probability/low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, and a jackpot game. The jackpot background luminance data table used during the round of the state, the ending background luminance data table used in the ending state in which the ending effect that informs the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the low probability high base state (time saving state), and a time-saving background luminance data table used in the state).

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of game states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot game state, an ending state, and a time saving state. One of the background brightness data tables is used depending on whether the That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses one of the background luminance data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs luminance data based on the background luminance data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority when using each of the error luminance data table, the SP reach luminance data table, and the background luminance data table is determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-70, the priority is higher when used in the order of the luminance data table for error, the luminance data table for SP reach, and the luminance data table for background.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 develops into a super reach effect while outputting luminance data based on the normal background luminance data table in a normal state, the SP reach luminance data table corresponding to the super reach effect The SP reach luminance data table is used preferentially over the normal background luminance data table, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach luminance data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a mode corresponding to the normal state based on the luminance data table for normal background and the super ready-to-win effect develops, the super ready-to-win effect is supported based on the luminance data table for SP ready-to-win. The game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in such a manner. While the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for normal background is not output to the LED driver. When the normal state returns, luminance data based on the normal background luminance data table is output to the LED driver, and when a big hit results in a fanfare state, luminance data based on the fanfare background luminance data table is output to the LED driver. output to

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a background luminance data table corresponding to the game state under control while timing the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control with a timer. However, if it develops into a super reach effect, etc., the luminance data table for SP reach corresponding to the super reach effect will be used preferentially over the luminance data table for the background, and the luminance data will be output to the LED driver. do. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the clocking of the lamp control time using the background luminance data table. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is under lamp control based on the SP ready-to-win luminance data table. Since the luminance data contained in the data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table, the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. After the super ready-to-win effect ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

Also, for example, if an error occurs while outputting luminance data based on the SP reach brightness data table during the super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 changes the error brightness data table corresponding to the error to the SP The luminance data table for error is used preferentially over the luminance data table for reach, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the luminance data table for error. Thus, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being ramp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the super ready-to-win performance based on the brightness data table for SP reach, the game is played in a manner corresponding to the error based on the brightness data table for error. The effect lamp 9 is ramp controlled. While the luminance data based on the luminance data table for error is output to the LED driver, the luminance data based on the luminance data table for SP reach is not output to the LED driver, but the error is canceled and the super reach effect is performed again. When returning to the middle game state, luminance data based on the luminance data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach effect while timing the lamp control time corresponding to the super reach effect being controlled by the timer, and the LED driver However, if an error occurs, the luminance data table for error corresponding to the error is preferentially used over the luminance data table for SP reach and the luminance data is output to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the brightness data table for SP reach. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the brightness data table for SP reach even while performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 based on the brightness data table for error, but Since the luminance data contained in the luminance data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the error luminance data table, the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table should not be output to the LED driver. It's becoming After the error is released, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the luminance data table for SP reach to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

[Lighting Mode of Game Effect Lamp]
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting luminance data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, as terms relating to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, "extinguishing", "substantially extinguishing", "lit", and "blinking" are used. Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of zero. The term "almost extinguished" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, when RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as luminance data is "000", the corresponding LED is "turned off". Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED lights in white with extremely low luminance. In this embodiment, such an LED state in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for convenience.

When the R (Red) data defined as the luminance data of the logos LEDLL1 to LL4 is "0", the logos LEDLL1 to LL4 are "turned off". Also, when the luminance data (R data) of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 is "1", the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are lit with extremely low luminance. In this embodiment, the state of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 in which the R data is "1" may be referred to as "substantially off" for the sake of convenience.

When W (White) data defined as luminance data of the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 is "0", the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 are "turned off". Further, when the luminance data (data of W) of the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 is "1", the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 are turned on with extremely low luminance. In this embodiment, the state of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 in which the data of W is "1" may be referred to as "substantially off" for the sake of convenience.

The term "lighting" includes constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always lit, wave lighting, in which a plurality of lined lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are sequentially switched from off to on, and lighting when the game effect lamp 9 is on. It also includes haze lighting that dimly lights while changing the luminance. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the luminance data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode other than the above-described "turning off" or "turning on" of the game effect lamp 9, in which the lighting luminance of each lamp is a first luminance and a second luminance higher than the first luminance. including alternately switching between For example, "blinking" includes repeating turning on and off or almost off. This includes switching over time between the luminance data being "0" and "1". As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is haze lighting. Blinking is different in that the entire lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and extinguishing or substantially extinguishing.

[Description on game effect lamp]
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-71 to 12-36.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using luminance data table]
The effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table stored in the ROM 121 to light/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 . The sub-fluctuation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 in one frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. The display control unit 123 controls the image data (moving image data, The display control of the image display device 5 is performed based on the animation data). The display control unit 123 provides an extended command (for example, an extended command BXXX (“X” is an arbitrary Alphanumeric characters)) is set, and the extension command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 123 based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123 .

FIG. 11-71 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 11-71, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs display control in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect, an extension for specifying the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect Command (B421) is transmitted to CPU120 for production control. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table (weak reach type common title (parent)) corresponding to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect.

In the parent table, information for designating a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and corresponding to the lamp to be subjected to lamp control, are referenced during lamp control. and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed are stored. Note that the parent table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 11-74, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 (XD_A_LWU_1_B421), logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_A_LLOGO_B421), decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_A_LSLMP_B421), and attacker lamp LA1 are used as lamp control targets. ~ LA4 (XD_A_LATAK_B421) is specified. Also, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and 600000 ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table. Child table: XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to LL4, 600000 ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and child table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5. 600000 ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time during which lamp control is performed by this child table. 600000 ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time during which the

As shown in FIG. 11-71, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp specified in the parent table by the specified child table. If so, the counter is decremented by 1 every 10 ms to count this 600000 ms (10 minutes). That is, the effect control CPU 120 counts 600000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60000 times. The effect control CPU 120 controls the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes) is clocked. In addition, the effect control CPU120, after receiving the extension command, before timing a maximum of 600000ms (10 minutes), if another extension command is newly received, the lamp control being executed is canceled, The child table specified by the parent table specified by the extended command received at the time is used to perform the lamp control of the target lamp. Although it is not assumed that the effect display (effect scene) requires 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control by the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the effect display (effect scene). Even if the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can be continued for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

In the child table, for each lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information designating a grandchild table to be referred to during lamp control and lamp control is performed. Information specifying the execution time is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed.

For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, lamp control is performed by a grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and this grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE). Table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table execute lamp control execution time: 500ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table execute lamp control execution time: 230ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table execute lamp control Execution time: 600000 ms is specified in the order in which the lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

In the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, in correspondence with the logo LEDLL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and the execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500ms, the grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this Execution time for lamp control by the grandchild table: 500 ms, execution time for lamp control by the grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230 ms, execution time for lamp control by the grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600000 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control is executed by these grandchild tables.

In the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, in correspondence with decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this Execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: 500 ms, execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230 ms, execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: X_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600000 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control is executed by these grandchild tables.

In the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, corresponding to attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and Execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, Execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230 ms, Grandchild table: X_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 600000 ms is specified in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, the first designated grandchild table to control the target lamp using the grandchild table designated by the child table. After performing the lamp control of the lamp of interest and measuring the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, the process of performing the lamp control of the target lamp using the next specified grandchild table is performed on all the specified grandchild tables. are to be performed in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, lamp control is performed by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 until 500 ms is clocked first, and then the grandchild table is controlled until 500 ms is clocked. Lamp control by table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, then ramp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 until 230 ms is clocked, then ramp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until clocking 600000 ms. Although it is not assumed that the effect display (effect scene) requires 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control by the grandchild table specified last is 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the effect display (effect scene). By setting , even if the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, it is possible to continue the lamp control being executed for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

In the child table, when the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are the targets of the lamp control, the grandchild tables corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are, for example, as shown in FIG. , one grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 is specified, and two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 and XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 are specified as shown in FIG. 11-75. Then, when one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the effect control CPU 120 uses the one grandchild table to create the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12. The same lamp control is performed for both LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are specified as grandchild tables corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the effect control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables to create a frame. Lamp control of LEDLWL1 to LWL12 is performed, and lamp control of frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 is performed using the other grandchild table. Therefore, when one grandchild table is specified as a grandchild table corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, common lamp control is performed for the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12.

In the grandchild table, for each lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, luminance data to be referred to during lamp control and execution time for lamp control are specified. Information to be performed is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 11-76, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000 by this data lamp, corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1) Execution time for control: 100 ms, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control by this luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000000000000000000 0 , 0x000000, execution time for lamp control by this luminance data: 120ms, luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control by this luminance data: 120ms, luminance data: 0x5AA5AA , 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control based on these brightness data is performed.

In the grandchild table shown in FIG. 11-76, luminance data: 0x0000, execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 100 ms, luminance data: 0xAAAA, and this Execution time for lamp control based on luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0xAAAA, Execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0xAAAA, Execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 120 ms , brightness data: 0xAAAA, and execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control based on these brightness data is performed.

In the grandchild table shown in FIG. 11-76, luminance data: 0x00000, execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 100 ms, luminance data: 0x00000, this Execution time for lamp control based on luminance data: 120ms, luminance data: 0x66666, Execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 120ms, luminance data: 0x66666, Execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 120ms , brightness data: 0x66666, and execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control based on these brightness data is performed.

In the grandchild table shown in FIG. 11-76, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 100 ms, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, Execution time for lamp control by this luminance data: 120ms, Luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, Execution time for lamp control by this luminance data: 120ms, Luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, By this luminance data Execution time for lamp control: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, and execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control based on these brightness data is performed.

In the brightness data of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1) of the grandchild table shown in Fig. 11-76, the value of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 1 and No. 2 is the value of the frame LEDLWL1. The values of the lower first to third digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL2 and LWR2, corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDs LWL3 and LWR3, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th digits are the values of the frame LEDs LWL4 and LWR4. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL5 and LWR5, and the data corresponding to Nos. 5 and 6. indicates the RGB value of the frame LEDLWL6, LWR6. The values of the RGB of LWR7 are shown, and the values of the lower first to third digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 7 and 8 show the RGB values of the frame LEDs LWL8 and LWR8.

Also, as in the grandchild table shown in Fig. 11-81, when different grandchild tables are specified by frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1) and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), ), the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL1, and the lower 1 digit of the data corresponding to Nos. 1 and 2 The values of the first to third digits indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL2, and the values of the lower fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL3, The value of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicates the RGB value of the frame LED LWL4, and the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 5 and 6. The second value indicates the RGB value of frame LEDLWL5. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 7 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL7, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 7 and 8 indicate the values of the frame LEDLWL8. In the brightness data of the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to No. 2 indicate the RGB values of the frame LED LWR2. Yes, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWR3, and the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicates the RGB values of the frame LEDLWR4, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWR5. The value of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to indicates the RGB value of the frame LEDLWR6, and the value of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the 7th and 8th is the frame The values of the RGB of LEDLWR7 are shown, and the values of the lower first to third digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 7 and 8 show the RGB values of frame LEDLWR8.

In the luminance data of the logo LEDLL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) of the grandchild table shown in FIG. The value of the R of the logo LEDLL2 is indicated, the value of the second lower digit indicates the value of R of the logo LEDLL3, and the value of the fourth lower digit indicates the value of R of the logo LEDLL4.

In addition, in the luminance data of the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) of the grandchild table shown in Fig. 11-76, the lower fourth digit value indicates the W (White) value of the decoration LEDLS1, and the lower third digit value is The value of W of the decoration LED LS2 is indicated, the value of the lower second digit indicates the value of W of the decoration LED LS3, and the value of the fourth lower digit indicates the value of W of the decoration LED LS4.

In the brightness data of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Fig. 11-76, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the 1st and 2nd are the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA1. The lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA2, and the lower 4 of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 The values of the 1st to 6th digits indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA3, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA4. is.

The luminance data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the object of lamp control. The frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are composed of LEDs composed of three elements "R", "G", and "B". corresponds to the current value output for Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 levels of current values from 0 to F. When the luminance data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the luminance data is F The current value becomes the maximum value. For example, when luminance data of “A” is output to the element of “R”, a current corresponding to the luminance data of “A” flows through the element of “R”, and an element of “G” receives “1”. When the luminance data is output, the current corresponding to the luminance data of "1" flows through the element of "G", and when the luminance data of "F" is output to the element of "G", the current corresponding to the luminance data of "F" is output. A current corresponding to the luminance data of 'G' flows through the element 'G'.

The frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 can emit light in various colors by causing currents corresponding to luminance data to flow through the RGB elements. Further, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 can be lit in colors corresponding to each effect or character by light emission based on luminance data. As an example, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and the current corresponding to the data flows, thereby lighting the LED in red. In addition, data "F0F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light reddish purple. In addition, the data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, thereby lighting the LED in yellow.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 can emit red light with a luminance corresponding to the luminance data by flowing a current corresponding to the luminance data to the R (red) element, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 A current corresponding to the luminance data flows evenly through the three elements R, G, and B, so that white light having a luminance corresponding to the luminance data can be emitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, the effect control CPU 120 outputs, for example, the first designated luminance data to the LED driver when performing lamp control with reference to the luminance data of the grandchild table for the target lamp. Then, after measuring the execution time corresponding to this luminance data, the process of outputting the next designated luminance data to the LED driver is performed for all the designated luminance data in the designated order. there is For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 is sent to the LED driver until the first 100 ms is measured. Output, then brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0X000000, 0X000000, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. , Output 0x000000 to the LED driver, then output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver, then output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, until 40ms Output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver. Then, based on the received luminance data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the luminance data to flow through the specified LED. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can lamp-control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, the child table, and the grandchild table. Lamp control is performed based on the table, child table, and grandchild table.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data from the first specified location of the grandchild table, and when the output of the luminance data is completed up to the last specified location of the grandchild table, the grandchild table is displayed. If the value of the timer corresponding to the specified child table still remains, output of luminance data is started again from the first specified location of the corresponding grandchild table. On the other hand, when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table designating the grandchild table becomes 0 while the luminance data is being output based on the grandchild table, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after switching.

The timer management of the child table by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 11-72 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table. As shown in FIG. 11-72, in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, 500 ms is specified as the time at which lamp control is first performed for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 is specified. 500 ms is specified as the time to perform lamp control, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified, 230 ms is specified as the time to perform lamp control in the third, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 is specified, 600000 ms is specified as the fourth lamp control time, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, for the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499", "0x49990x5890x5845AA AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x499388, 0x499388" is specified to run in For convenience of explanation, the brightness data in the first 100 ms is called data 1, the brightness data in the second 100 ms is called data 2, the brightness data in the third 100 ms is called data 3, and the brightness data in the fourth 100 ms is called data 4. .

The effect control CPU 120 measures 500 ms specified by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms when performing lamp control for the second specified grandchild table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. Until reaches 500ms: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 based on XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, outputs data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at intervals of 100ms, but after outputting data 1 to data 4, the timing is still 500ms. If it has not reached , the luminance data are output to the LED driver in order from the first data 1 again. When the clock reaches 500 ms, the effect control CPU 120 stops outputting luminance data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 at that point, and outputs luminance data based on the next grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 specified by the child table. to start.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 measures 600000 ms specified by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms when performing lamp control for the fourth specified grandchild table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, Until the time reaches 600000ms: Based on XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, the luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at intervals of 100ms, but after data 1 to data 4 are output, the time is still measured. has not reached 600000 ms, the luminance data are output to the LED driver in order from the first data 1 again. When the time count reaches 600000 ms, the effect control CPU 120 stops outputting luminance data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2. At this time, since the next grandchild table is not specified in the child table, the output of the luminance data based on the first grandchild table specified in the child table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 will start, but some kind of abnormality should occur. By receiving the next extended command from the display control unit 123 before the measured time reaches 600000 ms, the parent table, child table, and table designated by the newly received extended command are displayed. Output of luminance data based on the grandchild table is started.

Incidentally, as in the parent table shown in FIG. 11-74, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by the child table, and the 10-minute data in such a parent table plays a role in troubleshooting. responsible for That is, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the effect control command from the main board 11. However, while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, some trouble occurs and the effect occurs. Even if the control CPU 120 does not receive the effect control command from the main board 11, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so different lamp controls are performed one after another from the point where a problem occurs. You can prevent it from being lost.

Also, as in the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the lamp control execution time by the last specified grandchild table. , when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, the timer of the parent table still remains, so that the lamp control is performed again by the grandchild table specified first of the child table. Play a preventative role.

Further, in the grandchild table, 600000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time of the lamp control that refers to the brightness data specified last. In the minute data, when the value of the timer corresponding to the grandchild table becomes 0, lamp control is again performed using the luminance data specified first in the grandchild table because the timer of the child table still remains. It will play a role in preventing it from being put away. In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table to be 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with the determined single light emission, thereby preventing the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can be done. Furthermore, if the brightness data for 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can.

[Regarding the luminance data table used for super reach effect 1]
FIG. 11-73 is a diagram showing a luminance data table used for the super reach effect.

The execution time of the title display part is the same between the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the effect control CPU 120 executes the low base weak reach A effect. Also, when executing the low base weak reach B effect, in the title display part, a common weak reach type common title that defines the light emission mode of the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects as a brightness data table is used to control the game effect lamp 9 .

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the title color change effect in the title display part when executing the low base weak reach A and B effects, and when changing the title characters to red, the low base weak reach A Whether it is the title display part of the production or the title display part of the low base weak reach B production, there is a common brightness data table that defines the lighting mode when changing the title character to red in the title color change production. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the title common chance-up red, the title color change effect is executed in the title display part, and when the title characters are changed to gold, the title is displayed with the low base weak reach A effect. Whether it is a part or a title display part with a low base weak reach B effect, a common title common chance up that defines the lighting mode when changing the title character to gold in the title color change effect as a luminance data table Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using gold.

The execution time of the introduction part differs between the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, when executing the low base weak reach A effect, in the introduction part, the luminance data table When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach system weak reach A introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, and executing the low base weak reach B effect, introduction In the part, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the weak reach type weak reach B introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect as the luminance data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same in the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect, and as shown in FIG. When executing the reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, in the title display part, the low base strong reach A is used as the luminance data table. The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common strong reach type common title that defines the light emission mode of the title display part of the ~C effect.

The execution time of the introduction part differs between the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, In the introductory part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the strong reach type strong reach A introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introductory part of the low base strong reach A effect as a brightness data table, and the low base strong reach B effect is performed. is executed, in the introduction part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using the strong reach system strong reach B introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production as the brightness data table. In the introductory part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using the strong reach type strong reach C introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introductory part of the low base strong reach C production as a brightness data table.

As shown in FIG. 11-73, when executing the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the luminance data table from the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect to the introduction part in the title display part and the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes up to.

The execution time of the title display part is the same in the high base reach A effect, the high base reach B effect, the high base reach C effect, and the high base reach D effect, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the effect control CPU 120 The title is displayed when performing the high base reach A performance, when performing the high base reach B performance, when performing the high base reach C performance, and when performing the high base reach D performance. In the part, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach system common title that defines the light emission mode of the title display parts of the high base reach A to D productions as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same in the high base reach A effect, the high base reach B effect, the high base reach C effect and the high base reach D effect, but as shown in FIG. 11-73, the high base reach A effect When executing, in the introduction part, the high base reach system reach A introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the high base reach A production as a brightness data table is used to perform lamp control of the game effect lamp 9, high When the base reach B effect is executed, in the introductory part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the high base reach type reach B introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introductory part of the high base reach B effect as a brightness data table. , and when executing the high base reach C effect, in the introduction part, the high base reach system reach C introduction that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the high base reach C effect as a luminance data table is used. 9. When performing lamp control in step 9 and executing a high base reach D effect, the introduction part uses a high base reach system reach D introduction that defines a light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the high base reach D effect as a luminance data table. lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed.

In this way, both in the case of executing the low base weak reach A effect and in the case of executing the low base weak reach B effect, the title display part uses the common weak reach type common title as the luminance data table to achieve the game effect. Since the lamp control of the lamp 9 is performed, the storage capacity of the luminance data table can be saved. Since the ramp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the weak reach system weak reach A introduction and the weak reach system weak reach B introduction, the contents of each production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production The game effect lamp 9 can be made to have a different light emitting mode according to the state, and the effect of the introduction part until the effect result is introduced in the super ready-to-win effect can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, both when the low base weak reach A effect is executed and when the low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach type common title as the luminance data table. In the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title starts from when a part of the title characters is displayed to when it is displayed at a fixed position. A display control unit comprising a weak reach type title start in which a light emission pattern peculiar to a period is defined, and a weak reach type title display in which a peculiar light emission pattern is defined after a title display period in which title characters are displayed at a fixed position. When 123 starts the display control of the title display parts of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, by transmitting an extension command designating the start of the weak reach title, the effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table: Frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are controlled using the weak reach title start, and the display control unit 123 determines the title of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects. By transmitting an extended command specifying weak reach title display when starting display control of the display period, the effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table: weak reach title display to display frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and The frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 may be controlled. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect, the brightness data table: either the start of the weak reach title or the display of the weak reach title A common brightness data table may be used for each, and separate brightness data tables in which individual contents are set may be used for the other.

Also, when the low base weak reach A and B effects are executed, when the title color change effect is executed in the title display part, even if it is a low base weak reach A effect, it is a low base weak reach B effect. Also, since the common title common chance up red (title common chance up gold) is used as the brightness data table to control the game effect lamp 9, the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved.

In addition, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, the luminance data table is common in the title display part. Since the ramp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system common title, the storage capacity of the luminance data table can be saved, while in the introduction part, the case where the low base strong reach A effect is executed and the low base strong reach In the case of executing the B performance and the case of executing the low base strong reach C performance, the game effect is obtained by using separate strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and strong reach system strong reach C introduction respectively. Since the lamps 9 are controlled, the game effect lamps 9 are made to emit light in different modes in accordance with the content of each of the introduction parts of the low-base strong reach A performance, the low-base strong reach B performance, and the low-base strong reach C performance. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect in the introductory part until the performance result is introduced in the super ready-to-win performance.

In the present embodiment, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, the title display part It is configured to perform lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using a common strong reach type common title as a brightness data table, but among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C production, the prologue display period and the title character The start of a strong reach title that defines a unique light emission pattern during the title start period from when a part is displayed until it is displayed at a fixed position, and the specific light emission after the title display period when the title characters are displayed at a fixed position a strong reach title display defining a pattern, and an extension that specifies the start of the strong reach title when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production. By transmitting the command, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: Strong Reach series title start, and the display control unit 123 However, when starting the display control of the title display period of the title display parts of the strong base weak reach A to C effects, by transmitting an extended command designating the strong reach type title display, the effect control CPU 120 Luminance data table: Frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 may be controlled using a strong reach title display. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, the luminance data table: strong reach title A common brightness data table may be used for one of the start and strong reach type title displays, and a separate brightness data table in which individual contents are set may be used for the other.

In addition, among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C production, the strong reach prologue that defines the light emission pattern unique to the prologue display period and part of the title characters are displayed and then displayed at a fixed position. Equipped with a strong reach-type title start that defines a specific light emission pattern during the title start period up to and including a strong reach-type title display that defines a specific light emission pattern after the title display period when the title characters are displayed at a fixed position. , When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, by transmitting an extended command designating the strong reach prologue, the effect control CPU 120 increases the brightness Data table: Frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are controlled using the strong reach system prologue, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production. When the display control of the title start period is started, by transmitting an extended command specifying the start of the strong reach title, the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: start of the strong reach title to display the frame LEDLWL1 ~ LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are controlled. When the display control unit 123 starts the display control of the title display period of the title display parts of the strong base weak reach A to C effects, By transmitting an extended command specifying a strong reach title display, the effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table: strong reach title display to display the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. Lamp control may be performed. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, the luminance data table: strong reach prologue At least one of the strong reach title start table and the strong reach title display table may be a common luminance data table, and the remaining tables may be separate luminance data tables in which individual contents are set.

In addition, among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C production, the strong reach prologue that defines the light emission pattern unique to the prologue display period and part of the title characters are displayed and then displayed at a fixed position. and a strong reach title display that defines a unique light emission pattern after the title start period until the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production. , By transmitting an extended command specifying a strong reach system prologue, the effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table: strong reach system prologue, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 lamps When the display control unit 123 starts the display control of the title start period of the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, it transmits an extension command designating the strong reach type title display. The effect control CPU 120 may control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the luminance data table: strong reach title display. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, the luminance data table: strong reach prologue , a common brightness data table for one of the strong reach type title displays, and a separate brightness data table in which individual contents are set for the other.

Also, when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, when executing the high base reach C effect, and when executing the high base reach D effect, In the title display part, a high base reach type common title is used as a brightness data table to control the game effect lamp 9, so the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved, while in the introductory part, high base reach A production is performed. When executing, when executing high base reach B effect, when executing high base reach C effect, and when executing high base reach D effect, respectively Separate high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach System reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, and high base reach system reach D introduction are used to control the game effect lamp 9, so high base reach A production, high base reach B production, high base reach C In the introductory part of the high-base reach D performance, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to have different light emitting modes according to the contents of each performance, and the performance effect in the introductory part until the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance is enhanced. be able to.

In this embodiment, the high base reach D effect is executed when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, and when executing the high base reach C effect. Even in this case, the title display part uses a common high base reach system common title as a brightness data table to control the game effect lamp 9, but the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects is configured to control the lamp. Among them, the start of a high base reach type title that defines a unique light emission pattern for the title start period from when a part of the title character is displayed until it is displayed at a fixed position, and the title display where the title character is displayed at a fixed position and a high base reach type title display that defines a specific light emission pattern after the period, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display parts of the high base reach A to D effects, the high base reach is displayed. By transmitting an extended command designating the start of a system title, the effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table: high base reach system title start to display the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attack lamps LA1 to LA4. When the display control unit 123 starts the display control of the title display period of the title display parts of the high base reach A to D effects, an extension command specifying the high base reach type title display is transmitted. The effect control CPU 120 may control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: high base reach title display. Further, in such a configuration, the brightness data is determined depending on whether it is a high base reach A effect, a high base reach B effect, a high base reach C effect, or a high base reach D effect. Table: A common luminance data table may be used for one of the high base reach type title start and high base reach type title display, and the other may be a separate luminance data table in which individual contents are set.

In addition, when executing the low-base strongest reach effect that does not share the execution time of the title display part with other super reach effects, the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect is used as a luminance data table in the title display part and the introduction part. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the beginning to the introduction part, the number of luminance data tables can be reduced.

In this embodiment, both when the low base weak reach A effect is executed and when the low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach type common title as the brightness data table. However, when executing the low base weak reach A effect, the light emission mode specific to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect is used as the luminance data table of the title display part. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the determined weak reach type weak reach A title and executing the low base weak reach B effect, the title of the low base weak reach B effect is used as the luminance data table of the title display part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled by using a weak reach type weak reach B title that defines a light emission mode peculiar to the display part, thereby providing a low base weak reach A effect and a low base weak reach B effect. In the title display part, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to have different lighting modes according to the content of each effect, and the effect in the title display part can be enhanced in the super ready-to-win effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, the title display part It is configured to perform lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using a common strong reach system common title as the brightness data table, but when executing the low base strong reach A effect, the low base is used as the brightness data table of the title display part. A strong reach system in which a light emission mode peculiar to the title display part of the strong reach A effect is determined is used to perform lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the strong reach A title, and when executing the low base strong reach B effect, the title display part is performed. As the brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the strong reach type strong reach B title that defines the light emission mode unique to the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect is executed. In that case, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using a strong reach type strong reach C title that defines a light emission mode peculiar to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect as the luminance data table of the title display part. In this way, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in different modes in accordance with the content of each effect in the title display parts of the low-base strong reach A effect, the low-base strong reach B effect, and the low-base strong reach C effect. is possible, and the effect of the title display part can be enhanced in the super ready-to-win effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the high base reach D effect is executed when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, and when executing the high base reach C effect. In this case, the title display part is configured to control the game effect lamp 9 using a common high-base reach type common title as a luminance data table. As the brightness data table of the display part, the high base reach type reach A title that defines the light emission mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach A effect is used to control the game effect lamp 9 and execute the high base reach B effect. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using a high base reach type reach B title that defines a light emission mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach B effect as the luminance data table of the title display part. When the reach C effect is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed by using the high base reach type reach C title which defines the light emission mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach C effect as the brightness data table of the title display part. and when executing the high base reach D effect, a high base reach system reach D title that defines a light emission mode peculiar to the title display part of the high base reach D effect as the brightness data table of the title display part is used for the game effect. The ramp control of the lamp 9 may be performed, so that in the title display part of the high base reach A effect, the high base reach B effect, the high base reach C effect, and the high base reach D effect, depending on the respective effect contents. Thus, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to have a different light emission mode, and the effect of the title display part can be enhanced in the super ready-to-win effect.

Further, in this embodiment, when executing the low-base strongest reach effect, a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect to the introduction part are defined as a luminance data table in the title display part and the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title. Strongest Reach system that defines the luminous mode peculiar to the title display part The luminous mode peculiar to the introductory part of the strongest reach effect on the low base is defined as the brightness data table of the introductory part by performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the strongest reach title. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled by using the strongest reach system strongest reach introduction.

Further, in this embodiment, when executing the low base weak reach A and B productions, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using a common weak reach system common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and is introduced. It is a configuration for performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach system weak reach A introduction and the weak reach system weak reach B introduction as the luminance data table of the part, but when executing the low base weak reach A effect , In the title display part and the introductory part, the game effect lamp 9 is displayed using the weak reach system weak reach A title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the low base weak reach A title display part to the introductory part as a luminance data table. When performing lamp control and executing the low base weak reach B effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the low base weak reach B to the introduction part are defined as a brightness data table. The introduction of the weak reach type weak reach B title may be used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, the number of luminance data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using a common strong reach type common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the lamp is introduced. It is configured to perform lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the strong reach system strong reach A introduction, the strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and the strong reach system strong reach C introduction as the luminance data table of the part. When executing the reach A effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, a strong reach type strong reach A title that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect to the introduction part as a luminance data table. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using introduction and executing the low base strong reach B effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, the luminance data table is introduced from the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the strong reach system strong reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes up to the part, and executing the low base strong reach C effect, in the title display part and the introduction part , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using the strong reach type strong reach C title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect as a luminance data table, and the low base When executing the strong reach D production, in the title display part and the introduction part, the strong reach system strong reach D that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the low base strong reach D production to the introduction part as a brightness data table. The title introduction may be used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, the number of luminance data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the high base reach A to D effects, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach type common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the introduction Lump control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, and high base reach type reach D introduction as the brightness data table of the part. Although it is a configuration, when executing the high base reach A effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the high base reach A effect to the introduction part are defined as a brightness data table. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the base reach type reach A title introduction and executing the high base reach B effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, the title of the high base reach B effect is used as the brightness data table When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the high base reach system reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the display part to the introduction part, and executing the high base reach C effect, the title display part and the introduction part In the introductory part, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach type reach C title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the high base reach C production title display part to the introductory part as a brightness data table, When executing the high base reach D effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, a high base reach system reach D that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the high base reach D effect to the introduction part as a luminance data table The title introduction may be used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, the number of luminance data tables can be reduced.

[Regarding the brightness data table used for super reach effect 2]
Below, the setting contents of the luminance data table used for the super ready-to-win effect will be described. As described above, the luminance data table consists of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table. Only the table of the table is shown, and the other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects]
FIG. 11-74 shows a brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B421 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects: weak reach FIG. 11-75 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the system common title, FIG. Reference numeral 78 denotes a brightness data table: a diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of weak reach common titles.

When the extension command B421 is received, the effect control CPU 120 designates the parent table of the weak reach system common title based on the extension command B421. In the parent table of the weak reach common titles, as shown in Fig. 11-74, it is set to perform lamp control by referring to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE for a maximum of 600000 ms for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. Then, when the extension command B421 is received, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the child table specified by the parent table of the weak reach system common title: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE to control the lamps of the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12. conduct.

In child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, as shown in FIG. 11-75, grandchild tables of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 and execution times are set in the order of reference.

The effect control CPU 120 first performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 (FIG. 11-76) set first in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are turned off for 340 ms, and then the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are turned on in blue for 160 ms.

After that, when 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, is clocked, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Fig. 11-77) set second in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE and performs lamp control. conduct. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are lit in blue colors, and the luminance changes every 100 ms.

After that, when 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, is clocked, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 (Fig. 11-78) set third in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, and performs lamp control. conduct. As a result, some of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are turned off, and the rest are turned on in blue.

After that, when 230 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3, is clocked, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Fig. 11-77) set fourth in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, and performs lamp control. conduct. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are lit in blue colors, and the luminance changes every 100 ms.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A, B effect, and newly received switch to lamp control based on the luminance data table based on the extended command. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 continue to light up in blue colors until a new extension command is received, and the state in which the luminance changes every 100 ms continues, and a new extension command is received. By doing so, the lighting mode is switched to that based on the received extension command.

In the parent table of the weak reach system common title, as shown in FIG. 11-74, a child table that also refers to the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 to LS5, and attack lamp LA1 to LA4 is set, and these In the child table, the grandchild tables to be referred to are set in the order of execution, and the luminance data to be referred to are set in these grandchild tables in the order of execution. With reference to the specified child table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the luminance data specified by the grandchild table, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4 are displayed in the same procedure as above. Perform lamp control.

As a result, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 change from the off state to red until 500 ms elapse, then remain red until 500 ms elapse, and the luminance changes every 100 ms. After that, the LED lights in red again until a new extension command is received, and the state in which the brightness changes every 100 ms continues.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from the off state to white until 500 ms have passed, then light up in white until 500 ms have passed, and the luminance changes every 100 ms, and then from white to a substantially off state until 230 ms have passed. After that, it lights up in white again until a new extension command is received, and the state in which the brightness changes every 100 ms continues.

In addition, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4 change from the off state to blue until 500 ms have passed, then light up in the blue system until 500 ms have passed, and the luminance changes every 100 ms. After going through the off state, it lights up in blue again, and then lights up in the blue system until a new extension command is received, and the state where the luminance changes every 100 ms continues.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (A), the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions has a title start period of 500 ms from the start, and a title display period of 2200 ms after that. After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: weak reach type common title, so that the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward the fixed position. During the title start period (the period from the start of the title display part until 500 ms has passed), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 change from the off state to blue, and the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are off. state changes to red, and the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from the off state to white (lamp control by grandchild table (1) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75). Also, during the title display period during which the title characters remain stationary at a fixed position and the title end period during which the title characters move from the fixed position toward the right (the period from the start of the title display period until the end of the title display part), the frame LEDLWL1 ~ LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are lit in blue until 500 ms have elapsed, and the luminance changes every 100 ms (in FIG. control), and after that, it goes from blue to nearly extinguished once before 230 ms elapses, then lights up again in blue (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), and then lights up in blue again. and the state in which the luminance changes every 100 ms continues (lamp control by grandchild table (4) designated by the child table in FIG. 11-75). In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are lit in red until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), and then until 230 ms has elapsed. 11-75, the light turns red once after going through a nearly extinguished state and turns red again (lamp control by the grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), and then turns red again and the luminance changes every 100 ms. The state continues (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75). Also, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are lit in white until 500 ms have elapsed, and the luminance changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), and then until 230 ms has elapsed. 11-75, the light turns white again after going through a nearly unlit state (lamp control by the grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), then turns white again, and the luminance changes every 100 ms. The state continues (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75).

Further, after 3000 ms has elapsed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extension command (B400 or B40F) transmitted along with the start of display control of the introductory part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. Thus, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach system common title is finished, and the lamp control is switched to the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A, B production.

In this way, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, the luminance data table based on the extended command B421: By performing lamp control based on the weak reach system common title, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 ~LWR12, logo LEDLL1~LL4, decoration LEDLS1~LS5, attacker lamps LA1~LA4 are the title start period in which the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward the fixed position, and the title characters move from the fixed position to the right side. The light emission color and light emission mode change according to the ending period of the moving title.

[Luminance data table used in title color change effect (red)]
FIG. 11-79 shows a luminance data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B511 transmitted when performing display control of a title color change effect that changes title characters from white to red: title FIG. 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of common chance-up red, and FIG. 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: the child table of title common chance-up red, FIGS. -83 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: grandchild table of title common chance-up red.

The display control unit 123 controls the timing of changing the title characters (title display part The extension command 511 is transmitted at a timing 1300 ms after the start.

When the extension command B511 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the title common chance up red parent table (FIG. 11-79) based on the extension command 511, and the child table specified by the parent table (FIG. 11 -80), the grandchild table specified in the child table (FIGS. 11-81 to 83), the luminance data specified in the grandchild table are referred to, and the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 are displayed. to LS5, the lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attack lamps LA1 to LA4 blink white at intervals of 40 ms until 200 ms have passed, and then light up in red until 1200 ms have passed, and also emit brightness at intervals of 20 ms. changes, and then gradually turns off from red in 280 ms, and the off state continues until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off until 200 ms have passed, then turned on in red until 1200 ms have passed, and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms. The light-out state continues until a command is received.

In addition, the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white at intervals of 40 ms until 200 ms have passed, then light up white until 1200 ms have passed, and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms, and then gradually from white at 280 ms. It goes off and remains off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (B), the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions has a title start period of 500 ms from the start, and a title display period of 2200 ms after that. After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. In addition, when executing the title color change effect that changes from white to red, the title characters are displayed in such a manner that they appear to glow for 200 ms after 800 ms have passed since the start of the title display period, and then the title characters are displayed in red. , and when 1200 ms elapses, the title end period is entered.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, the extension command B511 is received at the timing of executing the title color change effect, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red, so that the title characters will shine. frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4 blink white, and logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 blink in white during the period displayed in the form of The lights go out, and the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white (lamp control by the grandchild table (5) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-80). In addition, until the title character changes to red and the title end period (the period from 200 ms to 1200 ms after receiving the extension command B511), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, Attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are lit in red, and the brightness changes at intervals of 20 ms, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are lit in red, and brightness is changed at intervals of 20 ms, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are lit in white. and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (6) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-80). In addition, during the title ending period (the period after 1400 ms has elapsed after receiving the extension command B511), the title characters move to the right from the fixed position and disappear. LA4 is gradually turned off from red, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are gradually turned off from red, decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 are gradually turned off from white (in FIG. control).

Further, after 3000 ms has elapsed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extension command (B400 or B40F) transmitted along with the start of display control of the introductory part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. Thus, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red ends, and the lamp control is switched to the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A, B production.

[Luminance data table used in title color change effect (gold)]
FIG. 11-84 shows a brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B512 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of a title color change effect that changes title characters from white to gold: title FIG. 11-85 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the common chance-up money, and FIG. 11-85 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: the child table of the title common chance-up money, FIGS. 11-86 to 11. -88 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: the grandchild table of title common chance up money.

The display control unit 123 controls the timing of changing the title characters (title display part The extension command 512 is transmitted at a timing 1300 ms after the start.

When the extension command B512 is received, the effect control CPU 120 designates the title common chance-up money parent table (FIG. 11-84) based on the extension command 512, and the child table (FIG. 11) designated by the parent table. -85), the grandchild table specified by the child table (FIGS. 11-86 to 88), the brightness data specified by the grandchild table are referred to, and the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 are displayed. to LS5, the lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 blink white at intervals of 40 ms until 200 ms have elapsed, and then light yellow at intervals of 20 ms until 1200 ms. changes, then gradually turns off from yellow in 280 ms, and remains off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off until 200 ms have passed, then turned on in red until 1200 ms have passed, and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms. The light-out state continues until a command is received.

In addition, the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white at intervals of 40 ms until 200 ms have passed, then light up white until 1200 ms have passed, and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms, and then gradually from white at 280 ms. It goes off and stays off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (B), the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions has a title start period of 500 ms from the start, and a title display period of 2200 ms after that. After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. In addition, when executing the title color change effect that changes from white to gold, the title characters are displayed in a manner that looks like they are shining for 200 ms after 800 ms have passed since the start of the title display period, and then the title characters are displayed in gold. , and when 1200 ms elapses, the title end period is entered.

For this reason, after the start of the title display period, the extension command B512 is received at the timing of executing the title color change effect, and the lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: title common chance up money, so that the title characters will shine. frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4 blink white, and logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 blink in white during the period displayed in a manner that looks like The lights go out, and the decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white (lamp control by the grandchild table (8) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-85). In addition, until the title characters change to gold and the title end period (the period from 200 ms to 1200 ms after receiving the extension command B512), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, Attacker lamps LA1-LA4 light up in yellow, and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms, logo LEDs LL1-LL4 light up in red, and luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 light up in white. and the luminance changes at intervals of 20 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (9) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-85). In addition, during the title ending period (the period after 1400 ms has elapsed after receiving the extension command B512), the title characters move to the right from the fixed position and disappear. LA4 gradually turns off from yellow, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 gradually turn off from red, decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 gradually turn off from white (in FIG. control).

Further, after 3000 ms has elapsed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extension command (B400 or B40F) transmitted along with the start of display control of the introductory part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. With this, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up gold ends, and the lamp control is switched to the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A, B production.

[Modified Example of Luminance Data Table Used in Title Color Change Effect]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: common title of the weak reach type in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects, regardless of whether or not to perform the title change effect. LEDLWL1-LWL12, frame LEDLWR2-LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4 are controlled, and if title change effects are not performed, the brightness data table: frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 are used as they are using common titles for weak reach systems. ~LWR12, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are controlled, and when the title change effect is performed, the title common chance up red or Brightness data table: Frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 using title common chance-up red or title common chance-up money when the color of the title character changes by receiving an extended command specifying the title common chance-up money . . . LWR12 and attack lamps LA1 to LA4.

On the other hand, in this modification, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the brightness data table in which the brightness data when the title change effect is not performed is set: weak reach system common title (white) , In the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the brightness data table in which the brightness data for the title change effect in which the title characters change to red is set: weak reach common title (red) and title A luminance data table in which luminance data is set for a title change effect in which characters change to gold: weak reach system common title (gold); When the display control of the title display part is started, if the title change effect is not performed, the effect control CPU 120 transmits the extension command designating the weak reach system common title (white). Table: Frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are controlled using the common title of the weak reach system (white), and the display control unit 123 controls the low base weak reach A and B production titles. When starting the display control of the display part, in the case of performing a title change effect to change the title character to red, by transmitting an extension command designating a weak reach type common title (red), the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title (red) to perform lamp control of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and the display control unit 123 controls the low base weak reach A, When starting the display control of the title display part of the B effect, if you want to perform a title change effect that changes the title characters to gold, by sending an extended command specifying the weak reach common title (gold), The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the luminance data table: weak reach system common title (gold).

As a result, the effect control CPU 120 changes the title characters to gold when the title change effect is not performed in the title display parts of the base weak reach A and B effects, and when the title change effect of changing the title characters to red is performed. It is possible to control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 in a light emission mode corresponding to each situation when the title change effect is performed.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of low base weak reach A effect]
FIG. 11-89 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B400, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the low base weak reach A production: weak reach system weak reach FIG. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of A introduction, and FIG. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of luminance data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction, FIGS. 11-91 to 11 -95 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. The child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the extension command B400 is received, the effect control CPU 120 designates the parent table (FIG. 11-89) of the introduction of the weak reach system weak reach A based on the extension command B400, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-90), grandchild tables (FIGS. 11-91 to 11-95) specified in the child table, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and logo LEDLL1 to LL4, with reference to luminance data specified in the grandchild table. It controls lamps of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-90, the execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production is switched, the luminous color according to the scene of the production, the grandchild table which becomes the luminous mode 11-91 to 11-95 are set with luminance data corresponding to luminous colors and luminous modes corresponding to characters appearing in scenes of production.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production, the characters that appear, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect]
FIG. 11-96 shows a luminance data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B40F that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the low base weak reach B effect: weak reach system weak reach FIG. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of B introduction, FIG. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of luminance data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction, FIGS. 11-99 to 11 -103 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. The child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the extension command B40F is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-96) of the weak reach system weak reach B introduction based on the extension command B40F, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-97), the grandchild table specified in the child table (FIGS. 11-98 to 103), the brightness data specified in the grandchild table, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, It controls lamps of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-97, the execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene switches in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B production, the luminous color according to the production scene, and the grandchild table which becomes the luminous mode 11-98 to 11-98 to 11-103 are set with luminance data corresponding to the luminous colors and luminous modes corresponding to the characters appearing in the scene of the production.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B production, the characters that appear, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C production]
FIG. 11-104 shows a luminance data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B517 that is transmitted when performing display control of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects: strong reach FIG. 11-105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the system common title, FIG. Reference numeral 109 denotes a brightness data table: a table showing setting contents of a grandchild table of common titles of strong reach type.

When the extension command B517 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-105) of the strong reach common title based on the extension command B517, and the child table (FIG. 11) specified in the parent table. -106), grandchild tables (FIGS. 11-107 to 11-109) specified by the child table, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 with reference to luminance data specified by the grandchild table. to LS5, the lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed.

In particular, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-106, the production scenes such as the prologue display period, title start period, title display period, title end period, etc. that constitute the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production are switched. The execution time corresponding to the time, the light emission color corresponding to the scene of the production, and the grandchild table of the light emission mode are set. Further, the grandchild tables shown in Figs. Luminance data corresponding to the light emission color and light emission mode are set.

As a result, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, attack lamps LA1 to LA4, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are the scenes of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C, the characters that appear, etc. The emission color and emission mode change accordingly.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of low base strong reach A effect]
FIG. 11-110 shows a brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B500 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the low base strong reach A production: strong reach system strong reach 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of A introduction, and FIG. 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of luminance data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, FIGS. 11-112 to 11 -117 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. The child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the extended command B500 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIGS. 11-110) of the strong reach system strong reach A introduction based on the extended command B500, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-111), the grandchild table (FIGS. 11-112 to 117) specified in the child table, the luminance data specified in the grandchild table, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, It controls lamps of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table shown in FIGS. 11-111, the execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene switches in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, the luminous color according to the production scene, and the grandchild table which becomes the luminous mode 11-112 to 117 are set with luminance data representing luminous colors and luminous modes corresponding to characters appearing in the scene of the production.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, the characters that appear, etc. Emission color and emission mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of low base strong reach B effect]
FIG. 11-118 shows a brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B504 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the low base strong reach B effect: strong reach system strong reach 11-119 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of B introduction, and FIG. 11-119 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of luminance data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, FIGS. -124 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. The child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the extension command B504 is received, the effect control CPU120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-118) of the strong reach system strong reach B introduction based on the extension command B504, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-119), grandchild tables (FIGS. 11-120 to 124) specified in the child table, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and logo LEDLL1 to LL4, with reference to luminance data specified in the grandchild table. It controls lamps of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in FIG. 11-119 includes the execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene switches in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the luminous color according to the production scene, and the grandchild table which becomes the luminous mode 11-120 to 11-124, the luminance data representing the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters appearing in the production scene are set.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the characters that appear, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect]
When the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B505 transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the low base strong reach C effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs strong reach system strong reach based on the extended command B505. Specify the parent table (not shown) of C introduction, and refer to the child table (not shown) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the luminance data specified by the grandchild table. frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table of strong reach system strong reach C introduction, the execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene switches in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production, the light emission color and light emission mode according to the production scene A grandchild table is set, and the grandchild table with the introduction of strong reach type strong reach C has a light emission color and light emission mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the production scene in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production. Luminance data is set.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production, the characters that appear, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in low base strongest reach effect]
FIG. 11-125 shows a luminance data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command B600 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control for a low base strongest reach effect: the parent of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction FIG. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the table, and FIG. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction, and FIGS. 11-127 to 11-135 Luminosity data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the introduction of the strongest reach type strongest reach title. The child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the extension command B600 is received, the effect control CPU 120 designates the parent table (FIG. 11-126) for introducing the strongest reach type strongest reach title based on the extension command B600, and the child table ( 11-127), grandchild tables (FIGS. 11-128 to 135) specified in the child table, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and logo LEDLL1 to LL4, with reference to luminance data specified in the grandchild table. It controls lamps of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-126, the execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene switches from the title display part of the low base strongest reach production to the end of the introduction part, the light emission color according to the production scene, and the light emission 11-127 to 11-135, a grandchild table is set as a mode, and further, in the grandchild table shown in FIGS. .

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will emit light according to the scene of the introduction part of the low base strongest reach production, the characters that appear, etc. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of high base reach A to D effects]
FIG. 11-136 shows a luminance data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command: B605 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the title display part in high base reach A to D effects: high base reach FIG. 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the series common titles, and FIG. 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: the child table of the high base reach series common titles, FIGS. 11-138 to 11 -140 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: the grandchild table of common titles of high base reach.

When the extension command B605 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIGS. 11-136) of the high base reach common title based on the extension command B605, and the child table (FIG. 136) specified in the parent table. 11-137), grandchild tables specified in the child table (FIGS. 11-138 to 140), frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration with reference to luminance data specified in the grandchild table. It controls the LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attack lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-137, execution according to the time when the scene of the production such as the title start period, the title display period, and the title end period that constitute the title display part in the high base reach A to D production is switched A grandchild table is set as a luminous color and a luminous mode according to the time and the scene of the production. Further, the grandchild table shown in FIGS. , luminance data for the light emission mode is set.

As a result, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, attack lamps LA1 to LA4, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are used for the production scenes in the title display parts of the high base reach A to D productions, characters that appear, etc. At the same time, the luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of high base reach A effect]
FIG. 11-141 shows a brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command B606 that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the high base reach A production: high base reach system reach A FIG. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the introduction parent table, FIG. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the luminance data table: high base reach system reach A introduction, 145 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: the grandchild table of high base reach system reach A introduction. The child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the extension command B606 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIGS. 11-141) of the high base reach system reach A introduction based on the extension command B606, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-142), the grandchild table (FIGS. 11-143 to 145) specified in the child table, the luminance data specified in the grandchild table, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, It controls lamps of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in FIG. 11-142 has an execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach A production, a luminous color corresponding to the production scene, and a grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. Further, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-143 to 11-145, brightness data representing light emission colors and light emission modes corresponding to characters appearing in scenes of production are set.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 emit light in accordance with the production scenes and the characters that appear in the introduction part of the high base reach A production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the high base reach B effect]
FIG. 11-146 shows a brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B607 transmitted when performing display control of the introductory part in the high base reach B production: high base reach system reach B FIG. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the introduction parent table, and FIG. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of luminance data table: high base reach system reach B introduction. Note that child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables are omitted.

When the extension command B607 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIGS. 11-146) of the high base reach system reach B introduction based on the extension command B607, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-147), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table are referred to, and the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are displayed. , to control the attack lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in FIG. 11-147 has an execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach B production, a luminous color corresponding to the production scene, and a grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. In addition, in the grandchild table of the high base reach type reach B introduction, the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters etc. appearing in the production scene in the introduction part of the high base reach B production are set. It is

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 emit light in accordance with the production scenes and the characters that appear in the introduction part of the high base reach B production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the high base reach C effect]
FIG. 11-148 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command B608, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the high base reach C production: high base reach system reach C FIG. 11-149 is a diagram showing setting contents of a parent table of introduction, and FIG. 11-149 is a diagram showing setting contents of a child table of brightness data table: high base reach system reach C introduction. Note that child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables are omitted.

When the extension command B608 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-148) of the high base reach system reach C introduction based on the extension command B608, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-149), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table are referred to, and the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decoration LEDLS1 to LS5 are displayed. , to control the attack lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in FIG. 11-148 has an execution time corresponding to the time when the production scene changes in the introduction part of the high base reach C production, a luminous color corresponding to the production scene, and a grandchild table for the luminous mode. In addition, in the grandchild table of high base reach type reach C introduction, the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the character etc. appearing in the production scene in the introduction part of high base reach C production are set. It is

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 emit light in accordance with the scene of the production in the introduction part of the high base reach C production, the characters that appear, etc. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the high base reach D effect]
FIG. 11-150 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command B609, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in the high base reach D effect: high base reach system reach D FIG. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the introduction parent table, and FIG. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the luminance data table: high base reach system reach D introduction child table. Note that child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables are omitted.

When the extension command B609 is received, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-150) of the high base reach system reach D introduction based on the extension command B609, and the child table specified in the parent table ( 11-151), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table are referred to for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 to LS5. , to control the attack lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in FIG. 11-150 has an execution time according to the time when the scene of the production in the introductory part of the high base reach D production is switched, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. In addition, in the grandchild table of the high base reach type reach D introduction, the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the character etc. appearing in the production scene in the introduction part of the high base reach D production are set. It is

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attack lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 emit light in accordance with the scene of the production in the introduction part of the high base reach D production, the characters that appear, etc. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Effect 1]
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the super ready-to-win effect after the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the ready-to-win mode. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in the ready-to-win mode before the title display part in the super ready-to-win effect, and the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect are displayed so as to use the display position of the decorative pattern in the ready-to-win mode in the title display part. Let By doing so, when the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. By displaying the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win performance using the display position of the decorative pattern, the title characters can also be naturally noticed, and as a result, the title can be preferably displayed.

In addition, since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether the decoration pattern in the ready-to-win mode is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern, when the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the player can select any decoration. It is possible to draw more attention to whether or not the pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, and to draw more attention to the title characters.

In addition, before the title display part in the super reach effect, the decorative pattern (large) is displayed in the reach mode, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in the reach mode is reduced to a smaller decorative pattern (small). The title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect are displayed so as to use the display position of the reduced decoration pattern (small). In this way, the decoration pattern (large) is displayed in a reduced size to attract the player's line of sight, and the display position of the reduced decoration pattern (small) is used to display the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect. Displaying it makes it easier to draw attention to the title characters.

Also, in the title display part in the super reach effect, at the timing when the decoration pattern in the reach mode is displayed, the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern in the reach mode. This makes it easier to draw attention to the title characters.

In addition, the super reach performance includes low base weak reach A and B performances and low base strong reach A to C performances with higher expectations for big hits than low base weak reach A and B performances, and low base weak reach A. , B effect and the title letters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects appear in a state of being overlapped with one of the decorative patterns in the reach mode (decorative pattern on the left side). Therefore, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

In addition, the super reach effect includes the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of hitting the jackpot than the low base strong reach A to C effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect are decorations on both sides in reach mode. Since the title characters appear overlapping the patterns (decorative patterns on both sides), it is possible to display the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect in a more impactful manner.

In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low-base strong reach A to C effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low-base strongest reach effect are decorative patterns in reach mode. After appearing in a state overlapping with one of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern) or both decorative patterns (decorative patterns on both sides), it is displayed in a fixed position, and even during the period displayed in a fixed position, it is a reach mode. Since it is displayed in a state where it overlaps part of the decorative patterns on both sides, it is easy to draw attention to the title characters even after the title characters are displayed at the fixed positions.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 2]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects after the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the ready reach mode. . The low base weak reach A and B productions and the low base strong reach A to C productions include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the production result is notified. be. Then, when the odd decorative patterns are displayed in the ready-to-reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions, the display positions of the odd decorative patterns in the ready-to-reach mode are used in the title display part. Title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B productions are displayed as shown, and an even number of decorative patterns are displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions. In the part, display the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B productions so as to use the display positions of the even-numbered decorative patterns in the reach mode, and before the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C productions. When the odd decorative pattern is displayed in the reach mode, in the title display part, the title character corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C production is used so that the display position of the odd decorative pattern in the reach mode display, and when the even-numbered decoration patterns are displayed in the reach mode before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production, the display position of the even-numbered decoration pattern in the reach mode in the title display part The title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects are displayed so as to be used. By doing so, when the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has become the ready-to-reach state. To display title characters corresponding to low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects by using display positions of decoration patterns in reach modes in title display parts in strong reach A to C effects. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the title character naturally, and as a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

In addition, since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether the decoration pattern in the ready-to-win mode is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern, when the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the player can select any decoration. It is possible to draw more attention to whether or not the pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, and to draw more attention to the title characters.

[Effect 3]
In the present embodiment, after the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the ready-to-win mode, the effect control CPU 120 performs low-base weak reach A and B effects, low-base strong reach A to C effects, and low-base strongest reach. It is possible to perform a production. Low-base weak reach A and B effects, low-base strong reach A-C effects, and low-base strongest reach effects have a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Both are included. Then, when the odd decorative patterns are displayed in the ready-to-reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions, the display positions of the odd decorative patterns in the ready-to-reach mode are used in the title display part. Title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B productions are displayed as shown, and an even number of decorative patterns are displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions. In the part, display the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B productions so as to use the display positions of the even-numbered decorative patterns in the reach mode, and before the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C productions. When the odd decorative pattern is displayed in the reach mode, in the title display part, the title character corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C production is used so that the display position of the odd decorative pattern in the reach mode display, and when the even-numbered decoration patterns are displayed in the reach mode before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production, the display position of the even-numbered decoration pattern in the reach mode in the title display part If the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C production are displayed as used, and the odd decorative pattern is displayed in the reach mode before the title display part in the low base strongest reach production, in the title display part , title characters corresponding to the low-base strongest reach effect are displayed so as to use the display positions of the odd-numbered decorative patterns in the reach mode, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are displayed in the reach mode before the title display part in the low-base strongest reach effect. , the title characters corresponding to the low-base strongest reach performance are displayed so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decoration pattern in the reach mode in the title display part. By doing so, when the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has become the ready-to-reach state. Strong reach A to C production, low base Strong reach A to C production, low base Strong reach A to C production, low base using the display position of the decorative pattern in the reach mode in the title display part By displaying the title characters corresponding to the strongest reach effect, it is possible to draw attention to the title characters naturally, and as a result, it is possible to perform the title display appropriately.

In addition, since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether the decoration pattern in the ready-to-win mode is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern, when the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the player can select any decoration. It is possible to draw more attention to whether or not the pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, and to draw more attention to the title characters.

[Effect 4]
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the super ready-to-win effect after the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the ready-to-win mode. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in the ready-to-win mode before the title display part in the super ready-to-win effect, and the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect are displayed so as to use the display position of the decorative pattern in the ready-to-win mode in the title display part. Let By doing so, when the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. By displaying the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win performance using the display position of the decorative pattern, the title characters can also be naturally noticed, and as a result, the title can be preferably displayed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 5]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a low-base weak reach B effect and a low-base strong reach B effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the low-base weak reach B effect. The low base weak reach B effect and the low base strong reach B effect include both a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, in the low base weak reach B production, the ally character "Mu Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" are used, and the ally character "Mu Yume" informs that a big hit will be achieved, and in the low base strong reach B production, The ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are used, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" inform that a big hit will be achieved. Then, in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, display is started in a manner in which the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" are arranged on the front side and the enemy character "Robo" is on the back side, and the low base is weak. In the introductory part of the Reach B production, the ally character "Mume" is arranged so that it is not on the front side and the enemy character "Boingo" is not on the back side (the ally character "Mume" and the enemy character "Boingo" are on the left and right). face-to-face). By doing so, with regard to the low-base weak reach B production in which the expectation of a big hit is relatively high, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana", who are informed that a big hit will be made, are on the front side, and the enemy character "Robo" is on the front side. ' is on the far side, the player can empathize with the game, and the player can easily intuitively recognize that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and as a result, the title can be preferably displayed.

In addition, the ally character is a character that is given a benefit if it wins the battle, and the enemy character is a character that is not given a benefit if it wins the battle. ” and “Nana” are displayed on the front side with their backs turned, the enemy character “Robo” is displayed on the back side with their backs turned, and the friendly characters “Jam” and “Nana” and the enemy character “Robo ”, and the relatively high expectation of the low base strong reach B effect is that the direction of the player and the direction of the ally characters “Jam” and “Nana” are the same direction, so the player This makes it easier for the player to empathize with the player, and makes the player more likely to recognize that the degree of expectation for a big win is high.

In addition, in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B production, the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed at positions including the display area where the title characters were displayed in the title display part. As a result, the player who has been paying attention to the title characters will naturally look at the friend characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" when the title characters disappear.

[Effect 6]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 has a higher expectation for a big hit than the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base weak reach A and B effects, and a low base weak reach A and B effect with a longer effect time than the low base weak reach A and B effects. Strong base reach A to C effects can be executed. The low base weak reach A and B productions and the low base strong reach A to C productions include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the production result is notified. be. Also, the low-base weak reach A and B effects and the low-base strong reach A to C effects all use dialogue subtitles. Then, in the low base weak reach A and B productions, the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part, and the dialogue subtitles displayed in the title display part are continuously displayed in the introduction part, while the low base In the strong reach A to C productions, the title characters are displayed without displaying dialogue subtitles in the title display part. By doing so, the expectation of a big hit is relatively high, and the long-running low-base strong reach A to C effects are displayed so as not to cover the title characters and dialogue subtitles as much as possible, and the expectation of a big hit is relatively high. In low-base, low-reach A and B productions, which have a low level and short execution time, even if the display of dialogue subtitles and title characters overlaps, the dialogue subtitles are also paid attention to by finishing the display of the title characters first. Therefore, it is possible to suitably provide the title character and dialogue subtitles to the player, and as a result, the title can be displayed suitably.

In addition, if the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B productions, in the subsequent introductory part, the production will continue until the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title characters are finished. Since the scene does not switch, it is possible to draw attention to the dialogue subtitles after drawing attention to the title characters.

Also, when the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the low base low reach A and B productions, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, but the audio corresponding to the title characters is not output. It becomes easier to hear the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles.

[Effect 7]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects. The low base strongest reach performance and high base reach A to D performances include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is reported. In addition, the title display of the low base strongest reach production and high base reach A to D production is composed of multiple characters ("Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle reach A (Battle reach B to D)"). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production and high base reach A to D production, the display of the title characters is started at an enlarged size where only a part of the plurality of characters is visible, and from the enlarged size The display size is reduced step by step, and the title characters are displayed in such a reduced size that all of the characters can be seen.By doing this, the title display with the lowest base reach performance and the high base reach A to D performances. In the part, the characters are displayed in an enlarged size in which only a part of the characters are visible, and then the size is gradually reduced to a reduced size in which all the characters are visible, so that the player can pay attention to the title characters. can.

In addition, before the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect is started, the movable body 32 is operated so as to overlap with the front side of the image display device 5, and after the movable body 32 is operated, the movable body 32 is initialized. A background dedicated to the falling effect is displayed during the period in which the falling effect is executed until the movable body 32 returns to the position, and when the movable body 32 returns to the initial position, all of the characters constituting the title characters are not visible. In addition, the display of the title characters is started in an enlarged size in which the display area is filled up and the background becomes invisible, and then the reduced size title characters and the background dedicated to the title display are displayed. By doing so, the title characters can be displayed in an impactful manner, and at the same time, the background can be switched without causing a sense of incongruity.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the high base reach A to D production, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (high base reach system common title), high base reach A ~ In the introduction part of D production, use the brightness data table for the introduction part (high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, in the title display parts of the high base reach A to D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using one luminance data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the luminance data table for title display (brightness data table composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect (strongest reach type strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect, the luminance data table for the introductory part (brightness data composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect A table (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)) may be used to control the game effect lamp 9, and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data table for title display different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results can be obtained. , the title can be preferably displayed.

[Effect 8]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects. The low base strongest reach performance and high base reach A to D performances include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is reported. In addition, the title display of the low base strongest reach production and high base reach A to D production is composed of multiple characters (“Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!”, “Battle reach A (Battle reach B to D)”). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production and high base reach A to D production, the title display part is ended by expanding and displaying a plurality of characters from the state where a plurality of characters are displayed, The background at the start of the introductory part is displayed, so that the player pays attention to the title characters in the title display part, and the title characters are preferably used to display the background corresponding to the next introductory part. can be switched without a sense of incongruity.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the high base reach A to D production, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (high base reach system common title), high base reach A ~ In the introduction part of D production, use the brightness data table for the introduction part (high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, in the title display parts of the high base reach A to D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using one luminance data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the luminance data table for title display (brightness data table composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect (strongest reach type strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect, the luminance data table for the introductory part (brightness data composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect A table (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)) may be used to control the game effect lamp 9, and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data table for title display different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results can be obtained. , the title can be preferably displayed.

[Effect 9]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach AC effects. The low base weak reach A and B productions and the low base strong reach A to C productions include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the production result is notified. be. Also, unlike the execution time of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions (T1-1 to 2) and the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production (T2-1 to 3) In both cases, the title display part consists of the title start period from when the title character starts to be displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when it is displayed at the fixed position, and the end of the display from the fixed position display. It consists of a title end period until In both the title display parts in the low base weak reach A and B productions and the title display parts in the low base strong reach A to C productions, the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period Display the title characters such that the is longer than the title end period. By doing so, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title display period displayed at the fixed position is maximized. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title character. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title start period until it is displayed at the fixed position is displayed from the fixed position display. By setting the time to be longer than the title end period until the end of , it is possible to incite which title character is displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the relationship between the title start period, title display period, and title end period is common. By doing so, you can make the title display part easier to understand.

[Effect 10]
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the super reach effect both in the normal state and in the probability variable state which is more advantageous than the normal state. The super ready-to-win effect in the normal state and the super ready-to-win effect in the variable probability state include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Also, unlike the execution time of the title display part in the super reach effect in the normal state (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) and the execution time of the title display part in the super reach effect in the probability variable state (T4) In both cases, the title display part consists of the title start period from when the title character starts to be displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when it is displayed at the fixed position, and the end of the display from the fixed position display. It consists of a title end period until Then, in both the title display part in the super reach effect in the normal state and the title display part in the super reach effect in the variable state, the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is the title end period. Causes title characters to be displayed longer than . By doing so, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the variable probability state, the title display period displayed at the fixed position is maximized. You can draw attention to the type of characters. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, the title start period until it is displayed at the fixed position will be displayed from the fixed position to the end of the display. By setting the time to be longer than the title end period of , it is possible to incite which title character is displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, by making the relationship between the execution time of the title start period, title display period, and title end period common , the title display part can be made easier to understand.

In addition, the execution time (T4) of the title display part of the super reach effect in the variable probability state is longer than the execution time of the title display part (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the super reach effect in the normal state. Since the execution time of the title display part in the super reach performance executed in the short and variable probability state is relatively short, the game in the variable probability state can be progressed at a good tempo, while the title display in the super reach performance executed in the normal state. Since the execution time of the part is relatively long, it can be firmly agitated.

In addition, regardless of the type of the super reach performance executed in the probability variable state, the expectation of a big hit is higher than the low-base weak reach A and B performances, which have a low degree of expectation for a big hit among the super reach performances executed in the normal state. Even if the execution time of the title display part is relatively short in the super ready-to-win performance executed in a variable probability state, a big win can be expected only by executing the super ready-to-win` performance.

In addition, the super reach effect executed in the variable probability state has the same execution time of the super reach effect and the execution time of the title display part regardless of the type, but among the super reach effects executed in the normal state Low base with low expectations for big hits Low reach Expectations for big hits are higher than A and B productions, and regardless of the type of super reach production executed in the variable probability state, the execution time of the super reach production and the execution time of the title display part Even if they are the same, a big win can be expected only by executing the super ready-to-win effect.

In addition, among the super reach productions executed in the normal state, the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C productions, which have higher expectations for big hits than the low base weak reach A and B productions, is the low base weak reach. It is set longer than the execution time of the title display part in the AB production, and the execution time of the title display part in the low base strongest reach production, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the low base strong reach A to C productions, is the low base strong reach. It is set longer than the execution time of the title display part in the A to C productions. By doing so, in the normal state, the execution time of the title display part is longer in the super ready-to-win effect with a higher expectation of a big hit, so that the player can be strongly encouraged.

In addition, among the super reach performances executed in the normal state, a title display period in which the title characters are displayed at a fixed position in the low base strong reach A to C performances with higher expectations for big hits than the low base weak reach A and B performances. is set longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base weak reach AB production, and the title display period in the low base strongest reach production, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the low base strong reach A to C productions. is set longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base strong reach A to C effects. In this way, in the normal state, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the longer the execution time of the title display period in which the title characters are displayed at the fixed position, the longer the execution time of the super ready-to-win performance, so that the player can be strongly encouraged.

[Effect 11]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes both a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is reported. The title display part includes a title start period from when the title character is displayed until it is displayed at a fixed position, a title display period during which the title character is displayed at a fixed position, and a period in which display ends after the display at the fixed position. It consists of a title end period until In the title display part, title characters are displayed such that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title character by making the title display period displayed at the fixed position the longest. Also, by setting the title start period until the title character is displayed at the fixed position to be longer than the title end period from the display at the fixed position to the end of the display, it is possible to stimulate which title character is displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, by making the relationship between the execution time of the title start period, title display period, and title end period common , the title display part can be made easier to understand.

[Effect 12]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect. The low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach effects include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is notified. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-43, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production and low base strong reach A to C production, the title characters are white and red, which is higher than the white form. It is possible to make it display in the form. Then, in the title display parts of the low base strongest reach performance and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the corresponding expectation level suggestive display is displayed, and then the title characters are displayed in a size larger than the expectation level suggestive display. At this time, the expectation level suggestive display is displayed in a common manner in both cases of displaying the title characters in white and in red. By doing so, the title characters corresponding to the low-base strongest reach production and the low-base strong reach A to C productions are larger in size than the expectation level suggestive display, and the form of the title characters suggests the level of expectation. Therefore, the attention of the player is attracted, but by displaying the expectation level suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the expectation level suggestion first. In addition, since the expectation suggestive display is performed in a common manner whether the title characters are displayed in white or in red, attention can be drawn to the subsequent title characters.

[Effect 13]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a low-base strong reach B effect and a low-base strong reach C effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the low-base strong reach B effect. The low base strong reach B and C productions include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the production result is announced. In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, the expectation indication display is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars), and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C production, the second mode (4 stars ) to display the expectation indication. At this time, both the expectation suggestive display in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect and the expectation suggestive display in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect are highlighted in a common manner. By doing so, even when the expectation level suggestive display is displayed in the first mode in the title display part in the low base strong reach B production, it is displayed in the second mode in the title display part in the low base strong reach C production. Also when displaying the expectation level suggestive display, the development cost can be reduced by making the highlight display a common aspect.

In addition, the expectation level suggestion display is composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects, and in the low base strong reach B production, the expectation level is suggested by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects, In the low-base strong reach C presentation, the degree of expectation is suggested by N+1 (4) objects, and each star-shaped object is highlighted. Even when five objects are highlighted, they are highlighted in a common manner. By doing so, it is possible to perform highlighting in a common manner whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. can reduce development costs.

In addition, in the expectation suggestive display, the time during which one star-shaped object is highlighted and the time during which 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted are common. By doing so, the time for highlighting one star-shaped object and the time for highlighting 0.5 star-shaped objects are made common, thereby reducing the development cost. can be done.

In addition, in the expectation suggestive display, a common expectation suggestive sound is output both when one star-shaped object is highlighted and when 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. . By doing so, a common expectation suggestive sound is output whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. This can reduce development costs.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and control the game effect lamp 9 using the brightness data table for title display (common title for strong base type) in the title display part of the low base strong reach B and C production, and control the low base strong reach In the introductory parts of the B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data tables for the respective introductory parts (strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing so, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

In addition, in the low base strong reach B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common luminance data table (strong base system common title) in the title display part, but the low base strong reach B effect In the title display part, the brightness data table for title display in low base strong reach B production (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part in low base strong reach B production (strong reach system strong reach B title )) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, the luminance data table for title display in the low base strong reach C effect (the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect It may be configured to control the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach C title)) composed of brightness data corresponding to the low base strong reach Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using different brightness data tables for title display in the title display part of the B effect and the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, suitable light emission according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in this manner, and as a result, the title can be preferably displayed.

[Effect 14]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach effects, and high-base reach AD effects. Low base strong reach A-C production, low base strongest reach production, and high base reach A-D production are the title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and the introduction part until the production result is announced. Also includes Also, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the low base strong reach effects, and the high base reach A to D effects, it is possible to display an expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects. Then, in the expectation suggestive display, the first star-shaped object is highlighted, and then the second star-shaped object is highlighted while continuing the highlighting of the first star-shaped object. After that, the highlighting of the first star-shaped object is ended, and the highlighting of the third star-shaped object is performed. By doing so, in the expectation suggestion display, the highlighting of the second star-shaped object is started before the highlighting of the first star-shaped object is completed, but the highlighting of the third star-shaped object is started. Since the highlighting of the objects does not start until the highlighting of the first star-shaped object is completed, it becomes easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win.

In addition, in the expectation suggestive display, the expectation suggestive sound is output each time a star-shaped object is highlighted, and after the output of the expectation suggestive sound for the highlighting of one star-shaped object is completed, the next A sound indicating the degree of expectation of highlighting for the object is output. By doing so, the emphasized sound for highlighting one object does not overlap with the emphasized sound for highlighting the next object, so that the number of objects suggesting the degree of expectation can be easily recognized.

In addition, the indication indicating the degree of expectation is composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects and the character "expectation" indicating that the star-shaped object indicates the degree of expectation. ” in a size that overlaps. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to both the plurality of star-shaped objects constituting the expectation suggestive display and the character indicating that the star-shaped object indicates the degree of expectation by highlighting the star-shaped object. .

In this embodiment, when highlighting some star-shaped objects out of a plurality of star-shaped objects, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects is performed with characters indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate expectations. Although it is superimposed, for all star-shaped objects, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects may be superimposed on characters indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation.

[Effect 15]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C effects, the low base strongest reach effect, and the high base reach AD effects. Low base strong reach A-C production, low base strongest reach production, and high base reach A-D production are either a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters or an introduction part until the production result is announced. Also includes In addition, it is possible to display multiple pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started, and multiple displays can be displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production, the low base strongest reach production, and the high base reach A to D production. An expectation indication made up of star-shaped objects can be displayed. Then, in the title display parts of the low-base strong reach A to C effects, the low-base strongest reach effects, and the high-base reach A to D effects, the hold display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display. By doing so, the expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of objects is displayed in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C production, the low-base strongest reach production, and the high-base reach A to D production. Since the pending display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggesting display, it is possible to prevent the pending display from being erroneously recognized as the expectation suggesting display.

In particular, the maximum number of active indications corresponding to pending indications and initiated variable indications will match the maximum number of star objects that make up the expectations suggestive indication, but the maximum number of pending indications and active indications Even if low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects are executed in the displayed situation, the pending display and active display constitute the expectation indication display. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that the maximum number of is displayed.

Further, by erasing the pending display when the single-color display effect in which the display area is displayed in a single color is executed before the start of the title display part, the pending display can be ended without discomfort.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C production and high base reach A to D production, brightness data table for title display (common title for strong base system, high base, high base reach system Common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A to C production and the high base reach A to D production, the luminance data table for the introduction part (strong reach system strong reach A introduction , strong reach type strong reach B introduced, strong reach type strong reach C introduced, high base reach type reach A introduced, high base reach type reach B introduced, high base reach type reach C introduced, high base reach type reach D introduced) to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C production and the high base reach A to D production, the game is played using the brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. Since the effect lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using one luminance data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the luminance data table for title display (brightness data table composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect (strongest reach type strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect, the luminance data table for the introductory part (brightness data composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect A table (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)) may be used to control the game effect lamp 9, and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results can be obtained. , the title can be preferably displayed.

[Effect 16]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C effects and high base reach A to C effects. The low base strong reach A to C production and the high base reach A to C production include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the production result is announced. . In addition, in the title display part in the low-base strong reach A production / high-base reach A production, it is possible to display the expectation indication display composed of the first number (3) star-shaped objects, and the low-base strong reach B production / In the title display part in the high base reach B production, it is possible to display an expectation suggestive display composed of a second number (3.5) of star-shaped objects, which is larger than the first number, and low base strong reach C production / high In the title display part in the base reach C production, it is possible to display an expectation suggestive display composed of star-shaped objects with a third number (4), which is larger than the second number. The number difference between the first number (3) and the second number (3.5) is the same as the number difference between the second number (3.5) and the third number (4) (0.5 ), and the expectation of a big hit when the low-base strong reach C effect/high-base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the low-base strong reach corresponding to the second number (3.5) The difference between the degree of expectation for a big hit when B effect/high base reach B effect is executed is when the low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed. is larger than the difference between the expectation level of big win in , and the expectation level of big win when the low-base strong reach A performance/high-base reach A performance corresponding to the first number (3) is executed. By doing so, when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5), the second number ( 3.5) to the third number (4), the amount of increase in the number of star-shaped objects is the same, but the number is increased from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5). Since the amount of increase in the expectation of a big hit is greater when the number increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4) than in the case of While it is possible to make the player expect to win a big win more than the number of objects, it is possible to avoid excessive expectations of a big win when the number of star-shaped objects is small.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect, and the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect is greater than the third number (4). An expectation suggestive display composed of a fourth number (4.5) star-shaped object can be displayed, and the number difference (0.5 ) is smaller than the number difference (1) between the first number (3) and the third number (4), and corresponds to the fourth number (4.5). is executed and the difference between the jackpot expectation when the low-base strong reach C effect/high-base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed is the third number (4 ) and the low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the first number (3) are executed. It is larger than the difference between the jackpot expectation when By doing so, the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part is increased from the first number (3) to the third number (4). to the fourth number (4.5), the amount of increase in the number of star-shaped objects is smaller than the increase from the first number (3) to the third number (4). Since the amount of increase in the expected degree of jackpot increases when the number is increased from (4) to the fourth number (4.5), the more the number of star-shaped objects increases, the less the number of increased star-shaped objects increases. But you can expect it to be a big hit.

Also, the difference in number between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is 0.5, and the difference in number between the first number (3) and the third number (4) is 1. Yes, and the third number (4) is higher than when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part is increased by 1 from the first number (3) to the third number (4) If the number is increased by 0.5 to the fourth number (4.5), it can be expected that the player will win even more.

In addition, when the high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in a variable probability state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the expectation of a big hit and the high base reach B corresponding to the second number (3.5) The difference between the expectation of a big hit when the effect is executed is the expectation of a big win when the low base strong reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in the normal state and the second number (3.5 ) is greater than the difference from the big hit expectation degree when the low base strong reach B performance corresponding to ) is executed. By doing so, it is possible to expect that the probability variable state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, will be a big hit when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part increases. can.

[Effect 17]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state, and the low base strong reach A to C performances with a higher expectation of big hit than the low base weak reach A and B performances. . The low base weak reach A and B productions and the low base strong reach A to C productions include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the production result is notified. be. Then, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production is longer than the execution time of the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B production, and in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production While the expectation level suggestive display is displayed, the expectation level suggestive display is not displayed in the title display parts in the low base weak reach A and B productions. By doing so, the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C productions with relatively high expectations is higher than the title display part in the low-base weak reach A and B productions with relatively low expectations. Long, and while the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions. It is possible to make the player recognize sensibly that the strong base reach A to C productions have higher expectations than the low base weak reach A and B productions.

In addition, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production is composed of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period). The title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions does not have a prologue display period, and consists only of the title character display period. is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing so, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. Also, it is possible to let the player recognize sensibly that the low base strong reach A to C productions have a higher degree of expectation than the low base weak reach A and B productions.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 can execute a low-base strongest reach production with a higher expectation for a big hit than a low-base strong reach A-C production in a normal state, and the title display part in the low-base strong reach A-C production is , It consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which the title character is displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period), and the title display part in the low base strongest reach production is the prologue display period The title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach production is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production. . By doing so, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach production is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C productions. It is possible to let the player recognize sensibly that the strongest base reach performance is higher in expectations than the low base strong reach A to C performances.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for each title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A game effect lamp 9 is controlled using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 18]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state, and the low base strong reach A to C performances with a higher expectation of big hit than the low base weak reach A and B performances. . The low base weak reach A and B productions and the low base strong reach A to C productions include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the production result is notified. be. In addition, in the low base weak reach A and B productions, there is no case where a big win is reported as a result of the performance, and there is a case where a loss is reported as a result of the performance, and a case where another super reach performance is developed. In the low-base strong reach A to C productions, there are cases where a big hit is reported and cases where a loss is reported as a result of the performance. Then, the expectation suggesting display is displayed in the title display parts in the low base strong reach A to C productions, while the expectation suggesting display is not displayed in the title display parts in the low base weak reach A and B productions. By doing so, while the expectation level indication display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A ~ C production that may be directly notified that it will be a big hit, the fact that it will be a big hit is displayed directly. Since the expectation indication is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B production that is not notified, it is possible to prevent the low base weak reach A, B production from giving an excessive sense of expectation. .

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B productions, it is possible to display the title letters in a golden mode that confirms that it will develop into another super reach production, so the expectation indication is displayed. Even the title display parts in the low base weak reach A and B effects that are not displayed can attract the player's attention.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for each title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A game effect lamp 9 is controlled using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 19]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach. The low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, low base strong reach A to C effects and low base strongest reach may be executed via selection effects using title characters corresponding to multiple super reach effects, and low base strong reach A to C It is possible to display the expectation indication display together with the title characters in the production, the title display part of the low base strongest reach and the selection production. Then, when displaying the expectation suggestive display in the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach title display part, the expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, When the expectation suggestive display is displayed in the selection effect, the expectation suggestive display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects is not displayed step by step. By doing so, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach title display part, the expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed. While it is displayed in stages, when displaying the expectation suggestion display in the selection effect, the expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages, so only the title display part In addition, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance caused by the step-by-step display of the expectation level suggestion display even in the previous selection effect.

The selection performance is a performance that changes step by step from a super ready-to-win performance with a low expectation of big win to a super ready-to-win performance with high expectation of big win by operating the push button 31B, and it is necessary to change one stage in the selection performance. The time, that is, the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next Super Reach production, is displayed in one step in the expectation indication display of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach title display. In other words, the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold through highlighting may be shorter than the time required, and the gradual change in the selection effect can be given a sense of speed.

In addition, the selection performance is a performance that changes from the current super ready-to-win performance to a super ready-to-win performance in which the expectation of a big hit is one step higher than the current super ready-to-win performance, and each stage changes requires a change to the next stage. The number of times the push button 31B is operated increases. By doing so, the player can be impatient as the degree of expectation for a big win in the super ready-to-win effect increases.

Further, when the low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach are selected by the selection effects, the title display part of the super reach effect is started. By doing so, even if the low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach are executed via the selection effect, it starts from the title display part, so which super reach effect is finally executed. It is easy for the player to determine whether the

[Effect 20]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, after the super ready-to-win performance is notified that the game will be a big win, the title characters corresponding to the big win game state can be displayed in the big win start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed in a mode with a larger movement than the title characters of the super ready-to-win performance. By doing so, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super ready-to-win production is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a big win will occur, whereas the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the big win start production is. This is the situation after the fact that a big win has already been announced, and by moving the title characters of the big win start performance more greatly, it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to the big win game state.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving mode in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the title characters of the big win start performance in a mode with a larger movement than the title characters of the super ready-to-win performance, the control to the big win game state can be congratulated.

Also, in the title display part of the super reach effect, when the title characters are displayed, the background dedicated to the title display is displayed (low base strong reach B, C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D) , and the background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display in the super ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the background of the title characters of the big-win start effect can be greatly moved to congratulate the player on being controlled to the big-win game state.

In this embodiment, the background dedicated to the title display in the super reach effect is a still image, but the background dedicated to the title display in the super reach effect may be a moving image. The background of the title characters in the start performance is displayed in a mode with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display in the super ready-to-win performance, thereby congratulating the player on being controlled to the big win game state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) game effect lamp 9 using Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 21]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super ready-to-win effect, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the operation facilitating characters (small) are displayed in a mode with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the operation-promoting characters (small) displayed in the introductory part prompt the player to perform an action (operation), and can be moved larger than the title characters displayed in the title display part. , the action (operation) by the player can be intuitively prompted.

In addition, in the operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super ready-to-win effect, the player is urged to operate the push button 31B, and the operation prompting character (small) suggests a more advantageous situation than the operation prompting character (small). Large) can be displayed, and both the operation prompting characters (small) and the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect. By doing so, by moving the operation prompting characters (small) and the operation prompting characters (large) larger than the title characters displayed in the title display part, the player can intuitively Action (operation) can be prompted.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving mode in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to perform an operation (operation) by displaying the operation-promoting characters (small) in a mode with greater movement than the title characters of the super ready-to-win effect. Also in such a configuration, both the operation-promoting characters (small) and the operation-promoting characters (large) are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super-ready effect. Regardless of whether the characters are (small) or operation-promoting characters (large), by moving the characters larger than the title characters displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to perform an operation (operation).

In addition, since the number of characters (3) in the operation prompt character (small) is smaller than the number of characters in the Super Reach effect title characters (7 to 13), even if the operation prompt character (small) is moved a lot, the contents of the characters will not change. can be recognized.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) game effect lamp 9 using Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 22]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Also, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, it is possible to display explanation characters for explaining the content of the super ready-to-win effect. At this time, the explanation characters are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect. In this way, by displaying the additionally displayed explanatory characters in a manner with greater movement than the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the explanatory characters are added in addition to the title characters. can.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving mode in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the explanatory characters are added in addition to the title characters by displaying the explanatory characters in a manner with greater movement than the title characters in the Super Reach effect. .

In addition, since the explanation character has a content suggesting that the super ready-to-win effect is advantageous, it is possible to further draw attention to the addition of the explanation character.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) game effect lamp 9 using Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 23]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base weak reach A, B effects and low-base strong reach A to C effects with higher expectations for big hits than the low-base weak reach A, B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is notified. . Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects are displayed so that the character size is larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing so, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C productions with relatively high expectations are the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B productions with relatively low expectations. Since the size of the characters is displayed to be larger than the title characters, you can feel that the low base strong reach A to C production is higher than the low base weak reach A and B productions. can be recognized.

In addition, the number of characters (10) composing the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects is greater than the number of characters (7, 8) composing the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects, The display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects is larger than the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, the display area size occupied by one character of the title character corresponding to the low-base strong reach B and C effects is larger, so the low-base strong reach B and C effects have a low base weak reach. It is possible to sensuously recognize that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the A and B performances.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for each title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A game effect lamp 9 is controlled using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 24]
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the super ready-to-win effect after the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the ready-to-win mode. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters, and an introductory part until the effect result is reported. In addition, a decorative pattern (large) is displayed in a ready-to-win state before the title display part in the super ready-to-win performance, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in the ready-to-win state is displayed in a reduced size to a smaller decorative pattern (small). At this time, at least one character of the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect is displayed in a size larger than the size of the decoration pattern (small). By doing so, at least one character of the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect is displayed in a size larger than the reduced decorative pattern (small), so that the title characters are noticed in the title display part. be able to.

Also, any character of the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect is displayed in a size smaller than the decorative pattern (large) and larger than the decorative pattern (small). By doing so, while the decorative pattern (large) can be reliably recognized when the reach mode is set, after that, the decorative pattern (large) is reduced to become the decorative pattern (small), and the decoration is performed. Since each character constituting the title character is displayed in a size larger than the pattern (small), the title character can be noticed in the title display part.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 25]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super ready-to-win effect, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, after the super ready-to-win performance is notified that the game will be a big win, the title characters corresponding to the big win game state can be displayed in the big win start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start presentation are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing so, the title character of the big hit start effect is displayed while the situation in which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed in the super ready-to-win effect is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether it is a big win or not. The situation is after the fact that a big win has already been announced, and by displaying the title characters of the big win start effect larger than the operation promoting characters (small), it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to the big win game state. can.

In addition, the title character of the jackpot start production is composed of ``BIG'' or ``REGULAR'' and ``BONUS'', and after ``BIG'' or ``REGULAR'' is displayed at the upper part of the fixed position, ``BONUS'' is displayed. is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, and after "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, "BIG" or "REGULAR" displayed at the top of the fixed position and "BONUS" displayed at the bottom of the fixed position gradually expand Is displayed. When "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed at the fixed position upper part and the fixed position lower part, the character size is displayed in the smallest size, and "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed. The size of characters when is displayed at the upper and lower positions of the fixed position is larger than the size of the characters constituting the operation prompting characters (small). By doing so, the characters constituting the title characters of the big-win start performance are always displayed larger than the characters constituting the operation-promoting characters (small), so that the control to the big-win game state is more celebrated. be able to.

In addition, the smallest character among the character strings forming the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the largest character among the character strings forming the operation prompting characters (small). By doing so, even if attention is paid to any character, the title character of the big win start presentation is displayed larger than the operation promotion character (small), so that the control to the big win game state is further celebrated. can be done.

In addition, it is possible to display a special promotion character display operation promotion character (large) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the operation promotion character (small), and the operation promotion character (large) is larger than the title character of the jackpot start effect. By being displayed, the player can feel the advantageous situation.

In addition, by displaying the smallest character of the character strings that make up the operation promotion character (large) larger than the largest character of the character strings that make up the title character of the jackpot start effect, any character Even if the player pays attention, since the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed larger than the title characters of the big win start effect, the player can feel the advantageous situation.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) game effect lamp 9 using Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 26]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, after the super ready-to-win performance is notified that the game will be a big win, the title characters corresponding to the big win game state can be displayed in the big win start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win performance. By doing so, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super ready-to-win production is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a big win will occur, whereas the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the big win start production is. It is a situation after the fact that a big win has already been reported, and it is possible to congratulate the player on being controlled to the big win game state by displaying the title characters of the big win start production larger than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win production. can.

In addition, the super ready-to-win production includes a plurality of types of super ready-to-win production with different title characters, and the title characters of the jackpot start production are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to any type of super ready-to-win production, so that the big hit game is played. You can be blessed to be controlled by the state.

In addition, the smallest character among the character strings forming the title characters of the jackpot start effect is displayed larger than the largest character among the character strings forming the title characters corresponding to any type of super ready-to-win effect. Therefore, even if attention is paid to any character, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win performance, so that the control to the jackpot game state can be celebrated more.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 27]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Also, in the operation prompting effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small). By doing so, the operation-promoting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters displayed after that are displayed larger than the operation-promoting characters (small), thereby attracting attention to the title characters. can be done.

Further, after the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed, the low base weak reach A, B production is developed, and the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B production starts. By doing this, in a series of flow, the operation prompt character (small) is displayed before the title display part, and the title character that is displayed after that is displayed larger than the operation prompt character (small). You can draw attention to the title characters.

In addition, the smallest character among the character strings that make up the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B productions) is displayed larger than the largest character among the character strings that make up the operation prompting characters (small). Therefore, it is possible to draw the attention to the title character even if the attention is paid to any character.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for low base weak reach), and the low base weak reach In the introductory parts of the A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data tables for the respective introductory parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing so, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 28]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Also, in the operation prompting effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Also, the title characters of the big win start performance corresponding to the controlled big win game state can be displayed after the fact that the big win will be achieved by the low base weak reach A and B performances. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small). display large. By doing so, while the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B productions is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a big hit will occur, the title characters in the big hit start production are displayed. The displayed situation is a situation after the fact that a big win has already been reported, and the big win game state is achieved by displaying the title characters of the big win start performance larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances. You can be blessed to be controlled by In addition, by displaying the operation prompt characters (small) before the title display part, and displaying the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed after that, are larger than the operation prompt characters (small). It is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, after the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed, it develops into the low base weak reach A, B production, the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B production starts, and the low base weak reach A, B production After the notification of the big win is given by , the title characters of the big win start effect are displayed. By doing so, in a series of flows, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed after that are displayed to promote operation. By displaying the characters larger than the characters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and after that, after being notified that the low base weak reach A and B effects will result in a big hit. By displaying the title characters of the big win start performance larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, the control to the big win game state can be congratulated.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for low base weak reach), and the low base weak reach In the introductory parts of the A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data tables for the respective introductory parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing so, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 29]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, after the super ready-to-win performance is notified that the game will be a big win, the title characters corresponding to the big win game state can be displayed in the big win start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win performance. By doing so, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super ready-to-win production is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a big win will occur, whereas the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the big win start production is. This is a situation after the fact that a big hit has already been reported, and the title characters of the big win start performance are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win performance, thereby controlling the game state to a big win game state. can congratulate.

In addition, the time from when all the character strings composing the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed until at least part of the character string disappears is one of the character strings composing the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect. longer than the time from when the part is displayed to when the entire character string is not displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title characters of the big win start production with congratulatory intentions can be seen properly is longer than the time during which the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win production aimed at arousing the possibility of winning a big win are displayed. By lengthening it, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

Further, after the title characters of the big win start performance are displayed, the title characters of the big win start performance are switched to the right-handed promotion image (small) and the right-handed promotion image (large) suggesting the operation method in the big win game state. , The operation method suggested by the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large) after a predetermined period of time after switching to the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large) (moving the game ball to the right) Control that is advantageous by operating in the operation method of hitting toward the game area 2R) is performed, and the time to switch from the title character of the jackpot start effect to the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large) is shorter than the time for ending the title character corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing so, the title character of the jackpot start production is switched to the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (large) in a short time, and after a predetermined period of time, the right-handed promotion image (small) and right-handed promotion image (small) are switched. Since advantageous control is performed by operating in the operation method suggested by the promotion image (large), changing the operation method from the period of ending the title characters of the jackpot start effect will cause inconvenience to the player. You can prevent it from becoming profitable.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 30]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super ready-to-win effect, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, after the super ready-to-win performance is notified that the game will be a big win, the title characters corresponding to the big win game state can be displayed in the big win start performance. Then, the title character of the big win start performance is displayed for a longer time than the operation promoting character (small). By doing so, the title character of the big win start effect is displayed while the situation in which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed in the super ready-to-win effect is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not the big win has occurred. The situation is a situation after the fact that a big win has already been announced, and by displaying the title character of the big win start effect for a longer time than the operation prompting character (small), it is possible to control to the big win game state. can congratulate.

In addition, the operation-promoting character (small) is displayed until the prompting operation is performed or the effective time of the prompting operation has passed. After (small) is displayed, the prompt operation is not performed, and the time after which the prompt operation is valid is longer than the time. By doing so, after the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer time than the time when the prompting operation is not performed and the title characters are displayed, thereby winning a big hit. It is possible to congratulate being controlled to a game state.

Also, the time from when all the character strings constituting the title characters of the big win start performance are displayed to when at least part of the character strings are not displayed is longer than the time when the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title characters of the big win start effect with the meaning of congratulations are properly visible is longer than the time during which the operation-promoting characters (small) intended to prompt the player to operate are displayed. It is possible to give satisfaction to the player.

In addition, it is possible to display operation-promoting characters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than operation-promoting characters (small). The operation facilitating characters (large) are displayed to prompt the operation after the facilitating introduction effect is executed. The time during which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is longer than the time during which the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is displayed is longer than the time during which the operation prompting characters (large) accompanied by the prompting introduction display are displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction. can give.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table made up of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) game effect lamp 9 using Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 31]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Also, in the operation prompting effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed for a longer time than the operation prompting characters (small). By doing so, the operation-promoting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters displayed thereafter are displayed for a longer time than the operation-promoting characters (small). can draw attention to.

Also, the time from when all the character strings forming the title characters are displayed to when at least part of the character string disappears is longer than the time during which the operation-promoting characters (small) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title display can be seen properly becomes longer than the time during which the promotion character display is displayed for the purpose of prompting the player to take action, and the title characters can be noticed.

In addition, it is possible to display operation-promoting characters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than the operation-promoting characters (small). The operation facilitating character (large) is displayed to prompt the operation after the facilitating introduction effect is executed. The time during which the title characters are displayed is longer than the time during which the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title display is displayed becomes longer than the time during which the operation prompting characters (large) accompanied by the prompting introduction display are displayed, so that the title characters can be noticed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for low base weak reach), and the low base weak reach In the introductory parts of the A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data tables for the respective introductory parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing so, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 32]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Also, in the operation prompting effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Also, the title characters of the big win start performance corresponding to the controlled big win game state can be displayed after the fact that the big win will be achieved by the low base weak reach A and B performances. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed as operation promoting characters ( small) is displayed for a longer period of time. By doing so, while the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B productions is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a big win will occur, the title characters in the big win start production are displayed. The displayed situation is the situation after the fact that a big win has already been reported, and the title characters of the big win start performance are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances. , it is possible to congratulate being controlled to a big hit game state. In addition, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed after that are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion characters (small). By displaying, it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for low base weak reach), and the low base weak reach In the introductory parts of the A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data tables for the respective introductory parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing so, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 33]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects in the normal state, and high base reach A to B in the variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. D effect can be executed. Low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A ~ C production, high base reach A ~ D production in the variable state are the title display part that displays the corresponding title character and until the production result is notified An introductory part and both are included. In addition, low-base strong reach A to C productions have higher expectations for big hits than low-base weak reach A and B productions, and high-base reach B to D productions have higher expectations for big hits than high-base reach A productions. The high-base reach A performance has a higher expectation for a big hit than the low-base weak reach A and B performances. Then, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C production, high base reach A production, and high base reach B to D production, the expectation indication display is displayed, and the low base weak reach A and B production title display parts does not display the expectation indication. By doing this, the low base weak reach A and B productions in the normal state have a lower expectation for a big hit than the low base strong reach A to C productions in the normal state. Although the degree suggestive display is displayed, the expected degree suggestive display is not displayed in the low base weak reach A and B performances, so that the player does not excessively expect a big win by the low base weak reach A and B performances. On the other hand, the high-base reach A production in the variable probability state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation of hitting the jackpot than the high-base reach B-D production in the variable probability state, but it is a jackpot than the low-base weak reach A and B productions in the normal state. Since the level of expectation is high, by displaying the expectation indication display in both the high base reach A production and the high base reach B to D production, both in the case of the high base reach A production and in the case of the high base reach B to D production. You can also expect it to be a big hit.

[Effect 34]
In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the super reach effect both in the normal state and in the probability variable state which is more advantageous than the normal state. The super ready-to-win effect in the normal state and the super ready-to-reach effect in the variable probability state include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. The title display part of the super reach effect in the variable probability state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state. By doing so, the title display part of the super reach effect in the variable probability state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state, and the game in the variable probability state can be advanced at a good tempo.

In addition, even if the frequency of executing the super reach effect in the variable probability state is higher than the frequency of executing the super reach effect in the normal state, the title display part of the super reach effect in the variable probability state is the title of the super reach effect in the normal state. By being shorter than the display part, it is possible to advance the game in the variable probability state at a good tempo.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the variable state, the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system, high base reach system common title) to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, Weak reach type weak reach B introduced, strong reach type strong reach A introduced, strong reach type strong reach B introduced, strong reach type strong reach C introduced, high base reach type reach A introduced, high base reach type reach B introduced, high base The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction). By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 35]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the low-base strong reach A to C effects. The low-base strong reach A to C effects and the low-base strongest reach effects include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is notified. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to a time-saving state B (play time) more advantageous than the normal state when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled for a big win in the normal state. Then, in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C productions, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center, and the title characters are displayed in the low base strongest reach production. In the part, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are reduced from the enlarged display, and when controlled to the time saving state B (play time), the play time start effect is performed in the play time start effect. The title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are reduced from enlarged display, as in the title display part in the low-base strongest reach performance. By doing so, when it is controlled to the time saving state B (play time), in the play time start performance, the title character of the play time start performance is replaced with the title of the low base strongest reach performance with relatively high expectation of big hit. Since it is displayed in the same display mode as the characters, it is possible to recognize that the time saving state B (play time) is highly advantageous.

Also, when the title characters are erased in the play time start production, the title characters are erased while expanding in the same way as when the title characters are erased in the title display part in the low base strongest reach production. erase. By doing so, even when the title characters are erased in the play time start effect, they are erased in the same display mode as when the title characters of the low-base strongest reach effect with relatively high expectations for big wins are erased. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the time saving state B (free time) is highly advantageous.

[Effect 36]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state when variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled for a big win in the normal state. When the time saving state B (play time) is controlled, the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed in the play time start effect, and the size of the characters constituting the title characters of the play time start effect is super reach. It is larger than the size of the characters forming the title characters corresponding to the presentation. By doing this, the title character is displayed in the super reach effect, while it is not yet clear whether it will be a big hit or not, while the title character in the play time start effect is in the time saving state B ( play time), and the characters that make up the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect, so the time saving state B (play time ) can be blessed to be controlled by

In addition, the super reach effect includes multiple types of super reach effects with different title characters, and the characters that make up the title characters of the play time start effect are more than the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach effect. is also big. By doing so, the characters composing the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed larger than the characters composing the title characters corresponding to any type of super ready-to-win effect, so time saving state B (play time). You can be blessed to be controlled by

In addition, the smallest character among the character strings forming the title characters of the play time start effect is larger than the largest character among the character strings forming the title characters corresponding to any type of super ready-to-win effect. By doing so, no matter which character is focused on, the title character of the play time start effect is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect, so it is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). can be more blessed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 37]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state when variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled for a big win in the normal state. When the control is made to the time saving state B (play time), the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed in the play time start effect, and the display time of the title characters of the play time start effect corresponds to the super ready-to-win effect. Longer than the display time of the title character. By doing this, the title character is displayed in the super reach effect, while it is not yet clear whether it will be a big hit or not, while the title character in the play time start effect is in the time saving state B ( play time), and the title character of the play time start effect is displayed longer than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect, so congratulations on being controlled to the time saving state B (play time) can do.

In addition, the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed until at least part of the character strings are not displayed is the number of characters that make up the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. It is longer than the time from when a part of the character string is displayed to when the entire character string is not displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title characters of the play time start production with congratulatory meaning can be seen properly is longer than the time during which the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win production, which aims to arouse the possibility of winning a big hit, is displayed. also becomes longer, and the player can be given a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 38]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to a time-saving state B (play time) more advantageous than the normal state when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled for a big win in the normal state. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, which indicates the remaining number of times until the control is made to the time saving state B (play time). The size of the characters forming the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect is larger than the size of the characters forming the remaining number of times characters until the play time. By doing so, the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect are displayed in a larger size than the characters constituting the remaining count characters until the play time, so that the title characters corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect can be noticed. .

In addition, the super reach production includes low base weak reach A and B productions and low base strong reach A to C productions that have higher expectations for big hits than low base weak reach A and B productions. The count character is displayed during execution of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and is not displayed during execution of the low base strong reach A to C effects. By doing so, in the low-base weak reach A and B effects with low expectations for big hits, the number of remaining characters until the play time is displayed, so it is possible to make the player aware of the number of times until the time-saving state B (play time). On the other hand, in the low-base high reach A to C productions with high expectations for big hits, by not displaying the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, attention can be paid to the contents of the production. Also, in the time-saving state B (play time), a big win more advantageous than in the normal state is likely to occur, so when the number of remaining times until the time-saving state B (play time) is small, the player's sense of regret can be alleviated.

In addition, when the selection performance develops to the low base strong reach A to C performances without going through the low base weak reach A and B performances, the character of the remaining number of times until the play time is not displayed even during the execution of the selection performance. By doing so, the remaining number of times until the play time characters will not interfere with the selection effect that determines the super reach effect above the low base strong reach A to C effects, and the remaining number of times until the time saving state B (play time) When there is little, the player's feeling of regret can be alleviated.

In addition, when it is notified that a big hit will be achieved in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the character of the remaining number of times up to the play time is not displayed again, and the game is controlled to the big win game state, and the low base strong reach A to C performances are performed. Then, when it is notified that there will be a gap, the character of the remaining number of times up to the play time is displayed again after the low base strong reach A to C effects are finished. By doing so, when it is notified that the low base strong reach A to C production will be a big hit, by not displaying the remaining number of characters until the play time again, the time saving state B (play time) When the remaining number of times is small, the player's feeling of regret can be alleviated. In addition, when it is notified that the low base strong reach A to C production will be missed, after the low base strong reach A to C production is completed, the characters for the remaining number of times until the play time are displayed again, so the time saving state B ( If the remaining number of times until the play time) is small, it can be quickly relieved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the super reach production, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) using game effect lamp 9 Control. By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 39]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to a time-saving state B (play time) more advantageous than the normal state when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled for a big win in the normal state. Further, in the operation prompting effects A to D that are executed at timings related to the super ready-to-win effect, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, which indicates the remaining number of times until the control is made to the time saving state B (play time). The size of the characters forming the operation facilitating characters (small) is larger than the size of the characters forming the remaining number of times characters until the play time. By doing so, the operation-promoting character (small) is displayed in a larger size than the characters constituting the remaining number of characters until the play time, so that the operation-promoting character (small) can be noticed effectively. Actions (operations) can be prompted to the player.

Further, when executing the low base strong reach A to C effects among the super reach effects, when displaying the operation promoting characters (small) in the operation promoting effect A executed before the title display part, play time In contrast to the character of the remaining number of times up to the play time is displayed at the same time, when the characters of the operation promotion (small) are displayed in the operation promotion effect D executed at the end of the introductory part, the characters of the remaining number of times up to the play time are not displayed. . By doing this, before developing into a low base strong reach A ~ C production, by keeping the number of characters displayed until the play time at the same time as the promotion character display operation promotion character (small), the time saving state It can be made aware of the number of times up to B (play time), and by not displaying the remaining number of times characters up to the play time in the operation prompting characters (small) of the introductory part, it is possible to notify whether or not it will be a big hit. can draw attention.

In addition, when executing the low base strong reach A to C effects, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part, the situation is more advantageous than the operation promotion character (small) and the operation promotion character (small) While only the operation-promoting characters (small) are displayed among the operation-promoting characters (large) that suggest ) can also be displayed, and when the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the remaining number of times characters until the play time are not displayed at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not a big win is notified, and also to display the operation prompting characters (large), suggesting a more advantageous situation.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system), and super reach effect In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 . By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 40]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super ready-to-win effect. The super ready-to-win effect includes a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to a time-saving state B (play time) more advantageous than the normal state when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled for a big win in the normal state. In addition, after the super ready-to-win effect is notified that the game will be a big win, the title characters of the big win start effect corresponding to the controlled big win game state can be displayed. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display the character of the remaining number of times until the play time, which indicates the remaining number of times until the control is made to the time saving state B (play time). Before the title characters of the big win start effect are displayed, the remaining number of times characters until the play time are erased, and the size of the characters constituting the title characters of the big win start effect is the remaining number of times characters until the play time. is larger than the size of the characters that make up the By doing so, the situation in which the title character of the big win start production is displayed is the situation after the fact that the big win has already been announced, and the remaining number of times characters until the play time are unnecessary, so that the big win start production Before the title characters are displayed, the characters of the remaining number of times until the play time are erased, and the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the characters of the remaining number of times until the play time. Therefore, it is possible to congratulate being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, regardless of the number of remaining times up to the time-saving state B (play time), the size of the characters constituting the characters of the remaining number of times up to the play time is the same, and constitutes the title characters of the jackpot start performance. The size of the characters is larger than the size of the characters constituting the remaining number of characters until the play time. By doing so, the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start effect constitute the characters of the remaining number of times until the play time, regardless of the number of times remaining until the time-saving state B (play time). Since it is displayed larger than the characters, it is possible to congratulate being controlled to the big win game state.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 first enters the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening in the time saving state B (play time) in the variable display, the time saving state B (play time) Variable display is performed using a time-saving B start variation pattern having a longer variation time than the variation pattern normally used in . By doing so, in the first variation in the time saving state B (play time), the play time start effect can be executed in the variation period corresponding to the time saving B start variation pattern.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system), and super reach effect In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) is used to control the game effect lamp 9 . By doing so, in the title display part of the super ready-to-win effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. Moreover, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 41]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, it is possible to display the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects by changing from a white mode to a red or gold mode. Then, when the title characters are changed from the white mode to the red or gold mode in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the time during which the title characters are displayed in the red or gold mode is greater. The title characters are displayed in a white manner so as to be longer than the displayed time. By doing so, when changing the title characters from the white mode to the red or gold mode in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the red or gold mode, that is, the changed mode. Since the title characters are displayed longer than the title characters in the white form, that is, in the form before the change, the change from white to red or gold can be reliably recognized.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, there are cases where the title characters are changed from white to red or gold, and cases where they remain white. to red or gold, when the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, the white color is changed to the red or gold color and a specific sound is output to change the title character to white. If the mode is not changed, the specific sound is output without changing the white mode when the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period. By doing so, when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects change from the white state to the red or gold state at a specific timing, a specific sound is output, and at the specific timing a white character is output. Since the specific sound is output even when the mode does not change, it can be expected that the output of the specific sound will change to the red or gold mode.

In addition, when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are changed from the white mode to another mode, the specific sound is output, it is possible to make the user pay attention to which type of mode changes when the specific sound is output.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for low base weak reach), and the low base weak reach In the introductory parts of the A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data tables for the respective introductory parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing so, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display different from the brightness data table for the introductory part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, title display can be preferably performed.

[Effect 42]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed by changing from a white mode to a red mode or a gold mode suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the red mode. is possible. In the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B productions, the white form is the same regardless of whether the title characters are changed from white to red or gold. It is displayed so as to change to a mode and then to change to a red mode or a gold mode. By doing so, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B production, the title characters are changed from white to red, and from white to gold. , change to the common display mode and then change to the red mode or the gold mode. Therefore, by changing from the white mode to the common display mode, the common display mode changes to the red mode or the gold mode. Until then, you can expect to change to the gold mode with a higher chance of winning a big hit than the red mode until the end.

A common display mode is a mode in which the characters forming the title characters are illuminated, and change to a red mode or a gold mode when the light is clear. By doing so, it is possible to encourage a change to a red mode or a gold mode by shining the characters that make up the title characters.

[Effect 43]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ). Then, the effect control CPU 120 provides a common title display part brightness data table (weak reach common title ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data table for the low base weak reach A effect (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) , and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data table for the low base weak reach B effect (weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing so, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is made common for two different super reach effects, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part is independent. By using the corresponding luminance data table, it is possible to suitably lengthen the period until notification of whether or not a big hit will be achieved, and as a result, suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 44]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base weak reach A, B effects and low-base strong reach A to C effects with higher expectations for big hits than the low-base weak reach A, B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is notified. . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ). Then, the effect control CPU 120 provides a common title display part brightness data table (weak reach common title ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, and the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect. , Control the game effect lamp 9 using the brightness data table for the common title display part (strong reach common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, the brightness data for the low base weak reach A effect The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect, the luminance data table for the low base weak reach B effect (weak reach system weak reach B (Introduction) to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, the game effect lamp using the luminance data table for the low base strong reach A production (strong reach system strong reach A introduction) 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the luminance data table for the low base strong reach B effect (strong reach system strong reach B introduction), and the low base strong In the introductory part of the reach C effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach C effect (strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing so, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby reducing cost and capacity. By preventing the increase and using the luminance data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to suitably extend the period until notification of whether or not a big hit will occur, resulting in a suitable title. can be displayed.

[Effect 45]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 provides low base weak reach A and B performances, low base strong reach A to C performances with higher expectations for big hits than low base weak reach A and B performances, and low base strong reach A to C. It is possible to execute a low-base strongest reach performance with a higher expectation of a big hit than the performance. Low-base weak reach A and B effects, low-base strong reach A-C effects, and low-base strongest reach effects have a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. each of which includes In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ). Then, the effect control CPU 120 provides a common title display part brightness data table (weak reach common title ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, and the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect. A game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for a common title display part (common title for strong reach system), and in a title display part for low base strongest reach production, for title display for low base strongest reach production. The brightness data table (strongest reach type strongest reach title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, the brightness data table for the low base weak reach A effect (weak reach type weak Reach A introduction) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B production, the game is played using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B production (weak reach system weak reach B introduction). Control the effect lamp 9, in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, control the game effect lamp 9 using the brightness data table for low base strong reach A production (strong reach system strong reach A introduction), low In the introduction part of base strong reach B production, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for low base strong reach B production (strong reach system strong reach B introduction), and the introduction part of low base strong reach C production , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for low base strong reach C production (strong reach system strong reach C introduction), and in the introduction part of low base strongest reach production, low base strongest reach production A game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction). By doing so, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby reducing cost and capacity. By preventing the increase and using the luminance data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to suitably extend the period until notification of whether or not a big hit will occur, resulting in a suitable title. can be displayed. Furthermore, the most anticipated low-base, strongest reach presentation can be enhanced by providing dedicated brightness data tables for the title display part and the introductory part, and as a result, suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 46]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed by changing from a white mode to a red mode or a gold mode suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the red mode. is possible. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ). Then, the effect control CPU 120, when the color of the title characters is not changed in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects, a luminance data table in which the luminance data when the title change effect is not performed is set: When the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the weak reach type common title (white) and the color of the title characters is changed to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B production, the title change production Brightness data table with brightness data set when performing: Control the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach common title (red) or the weak reach common title (gold), low base weak reach A, B production Regardless of whether the color of the title character is changed in the introductory part of the game effect lamp using the brightness data table for the common introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) control 9. In this way, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B productions, the brightness data corresponding to the introduction part is obtained even when the title characters are not changed to red or gold and when they are changed to the second mode. Using a common table prevents an increase in cost and capacity, and the brightness data table corresponding to each title display part uses a brightness data table corresponding to each. , and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 47]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses a luminance data table composed of luminance data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logos LEDLL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. ). In addition, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects is the title start period from the start of the title character display until it is displayed at the fixed position, and the title after the title character is displayed at the fixed position. Including the display period and the title end period, the effect control CPU 120 creates a luminance data table ( The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the weak reach title start), and the brightness data table (weak reach title display) that defines a unique light emission pattern after the title display period is used during the title display period and the title end period. to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing so, the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period from the start of the display of the title characters until the title characters are displayed at the fixed position in the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title characters are displayed at the fixed position. By using the luminance data table corresponding to the title display period and the title end period after the title character is displayed, and the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part, the luminance data table corresponding to each is used. It is possible to suitably set the period until notification of whether or not to be performed, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable title display.

In addition, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, a luminance data table corresponding to the title start period or a luminance data table corresponding to the title display period and the title end period One of them is a common luminance data table, and the other is a separate luminance data table with individual contents, so that the luminance data table corresponds to the title start period, or the title display period and title end period. By making one of the brightness data tables common, an increase in cost and capacity is prevented, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each for the other, low base weak reach A effect or low base weak reach B Depending on whether it is an effect or not, a suitable effect can be produced, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

A mode for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be further described below.

[Mode 1] (No. 1)
The game machine of form 1 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The size is smaller than the decoration identification information, and it is possible to variably display the reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can reduce the size corresponding to the decoration pattern). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 32) for moving the decoration identification information,
The variable display of the reduced identification information is a switching display (for example, switching display, see FIG. 33(E)) for switching to other reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information,
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, one decoration identification information is displayed in the variable display of the decoration identification information, and the reduced identification information is switched a plurality of times during a period until the display of the decoration identification information is finished. is possible (for example, one decoration pattern is displayed, and in the period Ta2 until the display of the decoration pattern finishes displaying, the small patterns are switched five times to the small patterns of the losing combination, and each is displayed over the period Ta1. (period Ta1<period Ta2), see FIG. 33(E)),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of a combination of the decoration identification information (for example, a combination of decoration patterns such as "111" and "326"),
The display result of the variable display of the reduced identification information is composed of a combination of the reduced identification information (for example, a combination of small patterns such as "111" and "326"),
When a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to the non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the variable display of the decoration identification information is performed. Before the display result is derived, the reduced identification information is switched so that the combination of the reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination in the variable display of the reduced identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , If it is decided to stop display the fixed decorative pattern of the lost combination (for example, "326"), start the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the lost combination (for example, "326") 33(E)), before stopping the display of the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the variable display of the reduced identification information is performed before the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is derived. Since the reduced identification information is switched so as not to become a combination of reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination, the non-specific combination is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information from the combination of the reduced identification information in the variable display of the reduced identification information It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest without being known in advance that the information is derived.

[Mode 2] (No. 2)
The game machine of form 2 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of a combination of the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area among the plurality of decoration identification information displayed in the display area (for example, the decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5C). , The part that becomes a big hit or loses by combining decoration patterns such as "111" and "326" stopped at the stop position of 5R),
When a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to non-specific display results other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information is effectively displayed. When stopped in the area, it is possible to display the decoration identification information in an enlarged form from the normal size and then return it to the normal size (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is out and variable based on the variation pattern). A part that can execute a change stop action when temporarily stopping display of the decorative pattern in the display (see FIGS. 47 to 49, 53, and 54),
When enlarging and displaying the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area, the decoration identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not displayed in an enlarged manner (see Modification 3 of FIG. 68),
During execution of the variable display of the decoration identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed. (For example, even when the effect control CPU 120 is executing the fluctuation stop action when temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, A portion where loop light emission control of the movable body lamp 9d is performed (see FIGS. 53 and 54)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to the non-specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is displayed. By once enlarging the display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area, and to draw the player's line of sight even when a non-specific combination that is essentially meaningless to the player is derived. It can be pinned to the area where the decoration identification information is displayed. Also, when enlarging and displaying the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area, since the decoration identification information not located in the effective display area is not enlarged and displayed, the player's line of sight can be focused on the decoration identification information stopped in the effective area. In addition, the load of display control can be reduced. Further, even when enlarging and displaying the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area, the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed, so that the control of the light emission means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The game machine of form 3-1 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes front movement display (for example, scroll display) in which the decoration identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing transparency and erased (see FIGS. 39 to 41). ,
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
While the decoration identification information is displayed moving forward, the other decoration identification information located on the far side with respect to the one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the other decoration identification information is displayed. While the character image of the information is displayed, the number image is not displayed, and after the one decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the other decoration identification information is displayed (for example, FIG. 41). As shown in (A) and (B), one decorative design (for example, decorative design "2") is displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R between frame-in display and frame-out display. Another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located on the far side so as to partially overlap with the decorative pattern "2" may be visible through the decorative pattern "2". While the character of the character display portion 002SG052 with the design "3" is displayed, the number ("3") of the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in FIG. 41(C), The part where the number (“3”) of the number display part 002SG051 of the decoration design “3” is displayed after the decoration design “2” is erased.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing the transparency and erased, the other decoration identification information located on the back side is displayed. The decoration identification information is visible through the one decoration identification information. At this time, the other decoration identification information located on the back side is displayed with the character image but not with the number image. Since the numeric image of the other decoration identification information is displayed after the one decoration identification information is erased, the numeric image of the one decoration identification information and the numeric image of the other decoration identification information are displayed overlapping each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the numeric image of the decoration identification information located on the front side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The game machine of form 3-2 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a forward movement display (for example, scroll display) in which the decoration identification information is moved from the near side toward the far side while increasing transparency and erased (see FIGS. 42 and 43). ,
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a number image (for example, number display section 002SG051),
While the decoration identification information is displayed moving forward, other decoration identification information located on the far side with respect to the one decoration identification information is visible through the one decoration identification information, and the one decoration identification is visible. While the character image of the information is displayed, the number image is not displayed, and after the other decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the one decoration identification information is displayed (for example, FIG. 42). As shown in (G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front side to the back side, so frame-in display is performed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After the frame is displayed, another decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) located on the back side so as to partially overlap with one decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern "3") is displayed. "2") may be visible through the decorative pattern "3".At this time, while the character of the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" is displayed, the number ( "2") is a portion that is difficult to see (or is not displayed).Modification 1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is moved from the front side toward the back side while increasing the transparency and is erased, the other decoration identification information positioned at the back side with respect to one decoration identification information is displayed. The decoration identification information is visible through the decoration identification information. At this time, the character image of the decoration identification information located on the front side is displayed, but the number image is not displayed. Since the numeric image of one decoration identification information is displayed after the other decoration identification information is erased, the numeric image of the other decoration identification information and the numeric image of the one decoration identification information are displayed overlapping each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the numeric image of the other decoration identification information located on the far side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Mode 4] (No. 5)
The game machine of form 5 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes rotating display in which the decoration identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front side and the back side of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 44 and 45),
The decoration identification information is in a semi-transparent state during the rotating display, and the decoration identification information is in a non-transparent state when the rotating display is stopped (see FIGS. 44 and 45),
The decoration identification information includes a number image (for example, number display unit 002SG051),
While the numeric image on the front side of the decoration identification information that is in a semi-transmissive state during the rotating display is displayed, the numeric image on the back side is not displayed (see FIG. 45),
During the execution of the variable display of the decoration identification information, predetermined light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period is repeatedly performed, and the predetermined light emission control is continued even during the rotating display. (For example, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in the high base state, based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 35 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern, the order of white, blue, and yellow A portion where the light emission pattern of may be repeatedly executed.Modified example.Refer to FIG. 55)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is rotated to display the front and back sides of the decoration identification information repeatedly, the decoration identification information is translucent, so only the front side of the decoration identification information is displayed. In this case, the numeric image on the front side of the decoration identification information is displayed, but the numeric image on the back side is not displayed. The image and the numeric image on the back side are not overlapped and displayed, and the numeric image on the front side can be prevented from becoming difficult to understand. Further, since the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed even during the rotating display, the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Mode 5] (No. 6)
The game machine of form 5 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-reach state after the ready-to-reach state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area when the specific display result is derived; A specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) in which the same type of decoration identification information stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, the reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed, and it is possible to execute the reach line suggesting effect to be erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggesting effect),
After entering the reach state, until the reach line suggestion effect is executed, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third region is transmitted at a first transparency (for example, a first transmittance F1). state, and after executing the reach line suggestion effect, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is changed to a second transparency lower than the first transparency (for example, a second transmittance F2). to make it transparent (see FIG. 63),
After the execution of the reach line suggesting effect, the timing at which the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggesting image is erased from the third area ( For example, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the transmittance (transparency) of the decoration pattern being displayed in the middle decoration design display area 5C is set higher than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed. The timing of setting the second transmittance F2 having a low transmittance (transparency) is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIGS. 61 to 63).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area. In addition, at the timing when the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area, the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes the second transparency lower than the first transparency, so that the decoration identification information is being variably displayed in the third area. The decorative identification information does not interfere with the reach line suggestion image.

[Mode 6] (No. 7)
The game machine of form 6 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
a means for emitting light;
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-reach state after the ready-to-reach state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area when the specific display result is derived; A specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) in which the same type of decoration identification information stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, the reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed, and it is possible to execute the reach line suggesting effect to be erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggesting effect),
When executing the reach line suggesting effect, enlarged display for enlarging the decoration identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, and separation display for separating the decoration identification information after executing the enlarged display. and can be executed (see FIGS. 61 to 63),
The second period from the start to the end of the separated display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the period from the start to the end of the enlarged display). The second period te1 from the start to the end of the separation display is longer than the first period td1 (td1<te1; see FIG. 63),
The light emitting means includes specific light emitting means (for example, a movable body lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
It is possible to execute extinguishing control to extinguish the specific light emitting means during execution of the reach line suggestion effect (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the display screen of the image display device 5 Portions for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged in the periphery (nearby) (see FIGS. 61(F) to (H))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area. In addition, the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area is enlarged and displayed for the first period, and then displayed separately for the second period longer than the first period, thereby forming the reach state. The identification information can be recognized by the player. Further, by turning off the specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggesting image can be made to stand out more.

[Mode 7] (No. 8)
The game machine of form 7 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
a means for emitting light;
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-reach state after the ready-to-reach state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area when the specific display result is derived; A specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) in which the same type of decoration identification information stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image ( For example, the reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed, and it is possible to execute the reach line suggesting effect to be erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggesting effect),
The light emitting means includes specific light emitting means (for example, a movable body lamp 9d) arranged around the display means,
It is possible to execute extinguishing control to extinguish the specific light emitting means during execution of the reach line suggestion effect (for example, when changing the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the display screen of the image display device 5 Portions for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged in the periphery (nearby) (see FIGS. 61(F) to (H))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach state is reached, the reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decoration identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area. In addition, by turning off the specific light emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestive image can be made to stand out more.

[Mode 8] (No. 9)
The game machine of form 8 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, predetermined operation display control for operating the decoration identification information in a predetermined operation mode is repeatedly performed over a first period (for example, for effect control When the CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative patterns at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative patterns is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special patterns is completed. (see FIGS. 34(C), 53, and 54),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, predetermined light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode is repeatedly performed over a second period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 3. When the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d is repeatedly executed. (See FIGS. 35(B), 53 and 54),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is stopped in the special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may display the decoration symbols in the high base state in the decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5C). , a part that does not execute the loop action of the decorative pattern when the temporary stop display is made at the stop position of 5R (see FIG. 55),
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3<loop light emitting period Tb4; see FIG. 35A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed in the sense of prompting the player to variably display the decoration identification information. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling annoyed by being urged to do so. Further, since the predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed at a shorter period than the predetermined light emission control, the decoration identification information can be preferably highlighted.

[Mode 9] (No. 10)
The game machine of form 9 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
Information relating to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started can be stored as pending storage information (for example, the CPU 103 stores the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the start winning judgment process of step S101, and the number of pending storage The part that performs the update process),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is composed of combinations of the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area (for example, "111" stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, The part that becomes a big hit or loses by combining decorative patterns such as "326"),
In the normal state, when a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decoration identification information corresponding to the non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification When the information is stopped in the effective display area, the decoration identification information is displayed in an enlarged size from the normal size according to the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information, and then displayed in a mode of returning to the normal size. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops displaying the decorative pattern, the part that can execute the fluctuation stop action. See FIGS. 47 to 50),
In the special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, when the decoration identification information is stopped in the effective display area, it is stored as the reserved storage information. Regardless of the number of reserved memories, the decoration identification information is maintained at a normal size (for example, in a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, regardless of the number of reserved memories When the variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed, the portion where the variable stop action is not executed and the temporary stop display is performed while maintaining the size (see FIGS. 50 and 55).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state, the movement when the decoration identification information is stopped is varied according to the number of retained memories to improve interest, while the average variable display period is short and the decoration identification information is visually recognized. In a special state where it is difficult to do so, by stopping while maintaining the size, it is possible to stop so that the visibility of the decoration identification information is not impaired.

[Mode 10] (No. 11)
The game machine of form 10 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 51(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of the day and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 51(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 51),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually reduced (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21; see FIGS. 53 and 54).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fade-out display basically gives the impression that the fade-out display has disappeared abruptly as it is executed in a short period of time. In some cases, the fade-out display of the identification information is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-out display of the background, so that it can be noted that the variable display of the decoration identification information has started.

[Mode 11] (No. 12)
The game machine of form 11 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 51(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of the day and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 51(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed to gradually increase the transparency of the first background image and erase it, and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 51),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the display speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually reduced (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative design display area 5L, the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at low speed in this order, and proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display is different from the execution period of the background fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time; see FIGS. 53 and 54).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by synchronizing the identification information fade-out display and the background fade-out display, it is possible to prevent difficulty in understanding that the variable display of the decoration identification information has started.

[Mode 12] (No. 13)
The game machine of form 12 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 51(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of the day and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 51(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 51),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually reduced (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is In the scroll display of 5L, 5C, and 5R, the period longer than the fade-in display period B21 from the start of deceleration of the display speed to the temporary stop display (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).See Figures 53 and 54)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fade-in display basically gives the impression that the fade-in display is performed in a short period of time, so that the variable display of the decoration identification information and the background change may be performed at the same time. In some cases, it can be noted that the variable display of the decoration identification information ends when the identification information fade-in display is performed in a shorter period of time than the background fade-in display.

[Mode 13] (No. 14)
The game machine of form 13 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
In one production mode, it is possible to switch and display a plurality of types of background images including the first background image and the second background image (for example, in the first production mode, the background image may be a daytime town seen from a distance). A first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 51(A1)) representing a landscape in the middle of the day and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 51(A2)) representing a townscape in the daytime can be switched and displayed. part),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is executed, the background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image (for example, the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A A portion where a cross-fade display synchronized with the fade-in display period B1 of is executed (see FIG. 51),
When the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after scroll display is started). As the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the display fades out),
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually reduced (for example, the stop timing of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). approaches, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R decorative patterns, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C decorative patterns are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed, proportional to the decrease in speed. Then the transmittance (transparency) decreases and the part fades in),
The execution period of the identification information fade-in display is different from the execution period of the background fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 53 and 54). )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by synchronizing the identification information fade-in display and the background fade-in display, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration identification information ends.

[Mode 14] (No. 15)
The game machine of form 14 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
After the variable display is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to execute a specific effect of restarting the variable display (for example, The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is resumed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started to when the display result is derived and displayed. , a portion that can execute a “pseudo continuous notice” that incites whether or not to make one variable display look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner),
The decoration identification information has decoration identification information of a plurality of colors (for example, blue and red) including a numeric image,
When the variable display is restarted in the specific effect, a number image (for example, pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212) that can specify the number of times the variable display is restarted can be displayed in a plurality of colors (for example, blue and red). (See FIGS. 59 and 60),
In the specific effect, the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed are of the same type, and the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern and the number image are of the same type. When the first combination of different colors is obtained, the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern and the number of times when the variable display is restarted, the number image of the temporarily stopped decoration identification pattern, and the number of times There is a case where both colors of the image are the same kind of second combination,
In the specific effect, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the first combination (for example, a pseudo In the consecutive notice, if the display color of the temporary stop displayed decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display is the first combination of non-same colors, and the temporary stop displayed decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display display color are the same color. There are cases where it becomes the second combination, and when the variable display is resumed with the second combination, the jackpot game state is more likely than when the variable display is resumed with the first combination in the pseudo consecutive notice. part where the controlled rate is high)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not the specific effect is executed, but also to the combination of numbers and colors of the number image and the number image of the decoration identification information temporarily stopped and displayed when the specific effect is executed. Therefore, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Mode 15] (No. 16)
The game machine of form 15 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The size is smaller than the decoration identification information, and it is possible to variably display the reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can reduce the size corresponding to the decoration pattern). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
When the variable display is not being executed, it is possible to execute a standby effect that displays a predetermined image (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11, the variable A portion that can execute a “customer waiting demonstration effect” when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without receiving a control command such as a display start designation command (see FIG. 57),
When the standby effect is being executed, the display of the reduced identification information is continued while the decoration identification information is hidden (see FIG. 57),
When the condition for starting variable display is satisfied while the standby effect is being executed, the predetermined image is hidden after variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden. After being displayed, the decoration identification information is displayed and the variable display is started (for example, if the start winning occurs while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is not displayed). The variable display of the small symbols is started before it becomes, then the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, and the background image corresponding to the effect mode at that time (here, the first effect mode corresponding to the first effect mode) is displayed. 1 background image 002SG081), after which the decoration pattern is displayed and the scroll display is started (see FIG. 58)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by starting the variable display of the decoration identification information after the predetermined image is hidden, the player can recognize that the variable display has started in accordance with the fulfillment of the condition for starting the variable display. However, since variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden, it is possible to ensure display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information.

[Mode 16] (No. 17)
The game machine of form 16 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
The variable display of the specific identification information is executed based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 18) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A portion that performs processing for displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. A part that performs processing to display the active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area A portion for performing a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 36),
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 32) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action. See FIG. 34 (A)),
In the normal state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary operation display is performed (for example, the first suspension display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure suspension storage display area 5U is moved and displayed to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is not started until the pending shift display period until switching display as the active display 002SG103 ends, and the above-described fluctuation start action is executed. , a portion where the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started after the pending shift display period ends (see FIGS. 37(C) to (F)),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process processing of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11),
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 and the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and the decoration identification information is moved during the switching display. By performing preliminary operation display that operates in a manner different from display, the period required for switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous. can increase the interest of Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 17] (No. 18)
The game machine of form 17 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
The variable display of the specific identification information is executed based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 18) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A portion that performs processing for displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. A part that performs processing to display the active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area A portion for performing a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 36),
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 32) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action. See FIG. 34 (A)),
In the normal state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary action display is performed, and the scroll display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the left side in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U The first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the display area is moved to the active display area 5F, and is displayed by scrolling the decoration pattern until the pending shift display period ends until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ( (variable display) is not started, the above-described variable start action is executed, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started. )reference),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process processing of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11),
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 and the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing the pre-operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from the movement display before starting the display, the period required for the switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the moving display of the decoration identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the moving display of the decoration identification information may start before the corresponding display is displayed. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous. can increase the interest of Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 18] (No. 19)
The game machine of form 18 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
The variable display of the specific identification information is executed based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 18) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A part that performs processing to display the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. part that performs processing to display active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area A portion for performing a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 36),
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 32) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action. See FIG. 34 (A)),
In the special state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary action display is performed (for example, the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure suspension storage display area 5U is moved and displayed to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is not started until the pending shift display period until switching display as the active display 002SG103 ends, and the above-described fluctuation start action is executed. , A portion where the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started after the pending shift display period ends.Modified example),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the process)

The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a shift display that switches the first reserved display 002SG101 and the first reserved display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and the decoration identification information is moved during the switching display. By performing preliminary operation display that operates in a manner different from display, the period required for switching display can be effectively utilized. Further, since the pre-operation display is performed while the switching display is being performed in the special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state can be excited. Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 19] (No. 20)
The game machine of form 19 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
The variable display of the specific identification information is executed based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 18) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs decoration in the production control process processing of step S76. The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
It is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the pending display update process of step S161, the first A portion that performs processing for displaying the pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102),
The corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161. A part that performs processing to display the active display 002SG103),
Along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a special figure pending storage display area A portion for performing a shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 36),
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a movement display (for example, scroll display, see FIG. 32) for moving the decoration identification information, and a mode different from the movement display before starting the movement display. It is possible to perform a preliminary action display (for example, a variable start action. See FIG. 34 (A)),
In the special state, when the switching display is performed, the preliminary action display is performed, and the movement display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the left side in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U The first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the display area is moved to the active display area 5F, and is displayed by scrolling the decoration pattern until the pending shift display period ends until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ( Variable display) is not started, the above-described variable start action is executed, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started.Modified example),
Based on the variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means, the variable display of the decoration identification information is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process of step S76 A part that executes variable display of decorative patterns based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the process)

The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 executes variable display based on the first type of variation pattern specification command (for example, non-reach variation pattern specification command) and the second type of variation pattern specification command (for example , reach variation pattern designation command), and a shift display that switches and displays the first pending display 002SG101 and the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner. See Figure 36)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, along with the start of variable display of the specific identification information, switching display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and during the switching display, the decoration identification information is moved. By performing the pre-operation display in which the decoration identification information is operated in a manner different from the movement display before starting the display, the period required for the switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the moving display of the decoration identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the moving display of the decoration identification information may start before the corresponding display is displayed. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by Further, since the pre-operation display is performed while the switching display is being performed in the special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state can be excited. Also, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, common switching display is performed, so the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Mode 20] (No. 21)
The game machine of form 20 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
It is possible to control any one of a plurality of production modes (for example, first production mode to fourth production mode) including a first production mode and a second production mode,
When starting the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display). As the display becomes faster, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part where the display fades out),
In the first effect mode, a moving display for moving the decoration identification information is executed as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 31A1 and 31A2),
In the second effect mode, as the variable display of the decoration identification information, a special variable display different in mode from the moving display is executed (see FIGS. 31(B1) and (B2)),
The execution period of the fade-out display when the special variable display is performed in the second effect mode is longer than the execution period of the fade-out display when the moving display is performed in the first effect mode ( For example, a portion (fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22 (see FIGS. 56A and 56B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second effect mode, not only is the aspect of variable display of the decoration identification information different from that in the first effect mode, but also a fade-out from the start of the variable display until the decoration identification information is erased. Since the display period is lengthened, it is possible to draw attention to the decoration identification information for a long period of time.

[Mode 21] (No. 22)
The game machine of form 21 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
It is possible to control any one of a plurality of production modes (for example, first production mode to fourth production mode) including a first production mode and a second production mode,
When starting the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased (for example, the decoration pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display). As the display becomes faster, the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the part where the display fades out),
any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns can be determined as the variable display pattern of the decoration identification information;
The execution period of the fade-out display differs between when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first effect mode and when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the second effect mode (for example, the first effect mode 56 (A ) See (B)))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the execution period of the fade-out when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined differs between when the first effect mode is controlled and when the second effect mode is controlled. Since it becomes difficult for the player to predict the display pattern, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Mode 22] (No. 23)
The game machine of form 22 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The effect control means can variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform decoration in the effect control process processing of step S76). The part that executes the variable display of the pattern),
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the condition for starting variable display is established until the decoration identification information starts variable display, and a post-variable display period after the decoration identification information starts variable display. , including (for example, the variable display period of the special design is the pre-variable display period from the start of the variable display of the special design and the small design to the start of the scroll display of the decoration design, and the scroll display of the decoration design and a variable after-display period after is started),
the character image is displayed in the pre-variable display period and the post-variable display period;
After being displayed in the pre-variable display period, the related information image is erased before the start of the post-variable display period (for example, the name of the character displayed in the information display section 002SG053). Related information) is displayed during the pre-variable display period, that is, when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period is started, that is, the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started. The portion to be erased before (see FIGS. 34(A) and 37)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character by drawing attention to the related information image before the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, that is, when the display is stopped. Also, by erasing the related information image before the start of the variable display, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, the advance notice effect, etc., rather than the related information image.

[Mode 23] (No. 24)
The game machine of form 23 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
In the normal state, control to one of a plurality of types of presentation modes including a first presentation mode (for example, first presentation mode) and a second presentation mode (for example, second presentation mode). It is possible (for example, first production mode to fourth production mode. See FIG. 31),
In the special state, it is possible to control the production mode including the third production mode (for example, the third production mode and the fourth production mode),
The decoration identification information includes a character image (for example, character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (for example, information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
In the first effect mode, decoration identification information is displayed in a manner including the character image and the related information image (see FIG. 37),
In the second presentation mode and the third presentation mode, the decoration identification information is displayed in a manner not including the related information image (see FIGS. 39, 40 and 44).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first effect mode, by displaying the related information image to make the player pay attention to the related information image, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. By erasing the related information image in the 3-effect mode, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display, the advance notice effect, etc., rather than the related information image.

[Mode 24] (No. 25)
The game machine of form 24 is
The variable display of specific identification information (e.g., special symbols) is executed, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, a specific display result (e.g., jackpot display result) is derived, which is advantageous to the player ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103);
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) and,
The game control means is
Execute the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
A normal state (for example, low-probability low base state), a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state and a short average variable display period (for example, low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), is controllable to
The production control means is
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decoration patterns in the effect control process processing of step S76). part),
The decoration identification information includes a numeric image (eg, numeric display unit 002SG061),
When the background image is normally displayed, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled (for example, the effect control CPU 120 will notify whether or not a big hit will be achieved. the part where the production can be executed),
In the notification effect, a specific background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) different from the normal background image is displayed,
When the notification effect is executed in the variable display from which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect. is displayed (for example, in the SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, the combination of the jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, “222”) is temporarily Stopped display (see FIG. 64(F)),
Upon completion of the notification effect, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and when the normal background image is displayed, a combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 64(G), with the end of the SP reach effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. A part where a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped when there is
a specific image (for example, a specific image 002SG075) is operatively displayed in proximity to the numeric image of the combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result being displayed when the normal background image is displayed;
In the special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed for the number display portion 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmed decoration symbols displayed after the end of the SP ready-to-win effect. While the operation is displayed (see FIGS. 64(H) and (I)), in the high base state, flames are emitted to the number display portion 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmed decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP ready-to-win effect. A portion where the specific image 002SG075 shown is not displayed (see FIGS. 65(P) and (S)))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a normal state, the specific image is displayed in motion with respect to the numeric image of the decoration identification information displayed after the termination of the notification effect, thereby increasing the effect of the effect and making it lively, but the average variable display period is short. In the special state, the variable display can be given a sense of speed by not displaying the specific image with respect to the numerical image of the decoration identification information displayed after the end of the notification effect.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to form 17 or 18,
The production control means is
When the variable display of the specific identification information ends, the corresponding display (eg, active display 002SG103) corresponding to the variable display displayed in the corresponding display area (eg, active display area 5F) is erased. can display an erasing effect display (for example, erasing effect 002SG110) that emphasizes that the corresponding display has been erased when
If the suspension display is displayed when the deletion effect display is displayed, the deletion effect display is continuously displayed until the variable display corresponding to the suspension display is started (for example, the deletion effect 002SG110 It continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started as follows. part to be processed (see FIG. 36 (B3))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the presentation from deteriorating by not creating a blank period of the presentation after the variable display is finished and before the next variable display is started. In addition, the erasing effect display makes the player recognize that the corresponding display corresponding to the finished variable display has been erased, and at the same time, displays a new corresponding display to recognize that a new variable display has started. can be made

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to form 17 or 18,
The areas in which the decoration identification information is displayed are a first area (for example, the left decorative design display area 5L), a second area (for example, the right decorative design display area 5R), the first area, and the second area. and a third area (for example, the middle decoration design display area 5C) located between
In the normal state, the decoration identification information is displayed in a smaller size in the third area than in the first area and the second area (see, for example, FIG. 30),
In the special state, displaying the decoration identification information of the first area, the second area and the third area in the same size (see, for example, FIG. 30),
The third area in the special state is arranged closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third area in the normal state (see FIG. 30, for example).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a normal state, the decoration identification information of the first and second areas are made to appear large, and the decoration identification information of the third area is shifted to give a sense of depth and enhance interest. Also, in a special state in which the average variable display period is short, the decoration identification information is arranged at a position near the center of the display area, so that the degree of recognition of the decoration identification information can be enhanced.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

Next, the form for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the drawings. In the following, the front side of FIG. 12 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the rear (rear, back) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Also, in the description of each step in the flow chart, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "002SGS1", "normal reach" is "N reach", and "super reach" is "SP reach". It is sometimes abbreviated as

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 12 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization is generically called simply variable display.

In addition, on the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5, the number corresponding to the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0" etc.), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4" etc.) and the decoration pattern A display area 5S for displaying small patterns is provided, and the small patterns are variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the decorative patterns.

In addition, the number of the first reserved memory, the number of the second reserved memory, the reserved display, the small pattern, the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, and the right hitting that prompts the player to perform the right hitting operation The notification image 002SG201 (see FIG. 31) and the time saving remaining display 002SG202 (see FIG. 31) indicating the number of remaining time saving are displayed on the front side (upper layer) than the effect image such as the character, so that the effect image While preventing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small patterns and error display from being reduced due to overlap, the decorative pattern is deeper than the effect image (lower layer) , it may be possible to prevent the visibility of the effect image from being lowered due to overlapping of the decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the small pattern is also referred to as a fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are displayed variably, for example, in a display device such as the image display device 5. The display changes depending on the movement. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, an effect is performed such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable bodies 32A and 32B are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 entirely or Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when a part of the pattern is shielded, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variable display start command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variable display start command.

In addition, a fourth pattern display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 which is a predetermined location on the game board 2) such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED The pattern displayed on the device is also called a fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U , an active display area 5F). Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display. In addition, in the present embodiment, the common special figure pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A first special figure pending storage display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending storage display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which the execution of the second special symbol is suspended is displayed. , may be provided separately.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 13). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, thereby causing the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole. It will be in a closed state that does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start winning opening) by tilting the movable piece when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. It is said that the mouth is open.) When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 13), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

Movable bodies 32A and 32B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (upper and lower positions of the image display device 5 in FIG. 12). A movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable bodies 32A and 32B. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 13).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 13).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting and extinguishing, the movement of the movable bodies 32A and 32B, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 , an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 and a real-time clock 106 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 outputs a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable bodies 32A and 32B, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . It also performs display processing for outputting the image data of the display image creation area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn in a certain V blank, and the area is switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. As a result, drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 superimposes (combines) a plurality of layers to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5, the image of each layer is drawn and stored in the VRAM area. a layer image drawing area for arranging, a display image creating area for generating an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area, and are placed. Note that each layer has a concept of upper, middle, and lower layers, and an image in a higher layer is given a higher display priority in the image display device 5, and an image in a lower layer is given a higher display priority in the image display device 5. is set low.

The VRAM area has a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images, and a layer for drawing and arranging layer 3 images. 3 image drawing areas are arranged. A displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area as an image to be displaced. This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes ( Display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image synthesized), or an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

The image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), and the image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area is image display. An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5 and an image drawn/arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area have the highest priority in the image display device 5 . Each image is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low). That is, layer 1 is a higher layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is a lower layer with the lowest image display priority. layer.

Layer 1 image drawing area, in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5, the first special figure reservation storage display area 5U that displays the number of first special figure reservation storage and the number of second special figure reservation storage so as to be identifiable A drawing area for drawing an interface image and a second interface image including a small pattern whose display area is smaller than the decoration pattern and a display of the number of reserved memories in the upper left part of the display area of the image display device 5. be.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in order to perform variable display of the decorative patterns in the central portion of the display region of the image display device 5 .

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background image is drawn in order to display the background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5 .

In this embodiment, an image drawn/arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn/arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images (images of layer 3) drawn and arranged in . In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (the first interface image and the second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority. The image (decorative pattern) displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area. The image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is displayed as a low layer image on the image display device 5 because the lowest display priority is set.

In the present embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) in order to make the overlapping portion of the upper layer image invisible to the player when superimposed on the lower layer image. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn/arranged in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable bodies 32A and 32B to the movable bodies 32A and 32B or a drive circuit for driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable bodies 32A and 32B (supply of signals to operate the movable bodies 32A and 32B, etc.) are for effect control. It may be executed by the CPU 120 .

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 14A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 14A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specifying command, for example, as shown in FIG. , Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 14B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability high base state, time reduction with probability variation state) in which both time saving control and probability variation control are performed. In addition, the probability variation state with time saving may simply be referred to as "probability variation state".

The command A0XXH is a win start specifying command (also called a "fanfare command") specifying display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big win game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "0" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 14A are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and these commands may be replaced by different commands. You can add different commands from For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the notification command of passing, and the remaining variable display frequency by which probability variation control and time saving control are performed.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 15, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby setting the random numbers MR1 to MR4. You may make it count the numerical data which show a part.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "0" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine the , and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 16 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, as the display result determination table, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a "jackpot" to a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for judging the special symbol display result. is a table.

In the display result determination table, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), random for special figure display result judgment A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to a special figure display result of "big win" or "losing".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is data for judgment to be assigned. In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display result assigned to. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in the present embodiment), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in the present embodiment /30). That is, in the display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or the time-saving state is higher. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase.

FIG. 17A shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present embodiment, when it is determined to control to the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit", the jackpot type can be any of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 Special symbol game by special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is “non-probability variable jackpot”, “probability variable jackpot A”, “ It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A", "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C" that shifts to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to a low probability high base state " Non-probability variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state by the "non-probability variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

The variable probability control and the time saving control, which are started after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A to the variable probability big win C, are ended on the condition that the game state is controlled to the big win game state. In addition, the time saving control started after the end of the jackpot game state of the non-probability variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot game state by the end of the variable display of 100 times or by the end of the variable display of the 100 times. terminated on the condition that Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is one of the variable probability big win A to variable probability big win C, the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state passes through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously without In other words, the variable probability state in the present embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result becomes a big hit regardless of the number of variable display times, while the time saving state in the present embodiment is a game state in which the variable display result does not become a big hit. If not, it is a game state controlled to a normal state by executing variable display 100 times. For this reason, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" are assigned different determination values for the jackpot types. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the big hit type as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C" to a big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 17 (A), whether the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-probable jackpot or a definite jackpot, it is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. ing.

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure In addition, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 18 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, three types of variation patterns are provided as super reach variation patterns: super reach (no pseudo run), super reach (one pseudo run), and super reach (two pseudo runs). The present invention is not limited to this, and four or more or two or less super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in the present embodiment is a variation pattern (PA2-2) that is different from the variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach (no pseudo run), As a variation pattern of super reach (1 pseudo-run), the variation pattern (PB1-3) where the variable display result is a big hit and a variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of step, as a variation pattern of super reach (2 pseudo-runs) There are provided a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a big hit, and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the result is not.

As shown in FIG. 18, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes "big hit", in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. , For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of variation pattern is first determined from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern, and then the A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a variation pattern according to this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game state, and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table A. -1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach (no pseudo consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach (one pseudo consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-4 (super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect) big hit variation pattern). More specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 35%. , PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A to C, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern ), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) big hit variation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (1-time pseudo-continuous effect) big hit variation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach (pseudo-continuous effect 2) It is determined from the number of times) variation pattern of the jackpot). More specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%. .

Also, if the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 1 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-1 (no shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) fluctuation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

In addition, if the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2, select the variation pattern determination table B for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

Also, if the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss fluctuation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo-continuous effect)) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo-continuous effect)). More specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3% and PA2-4 at a rate of 2%.

Also, if the gaming state is a high base state (time saving state or probability variable state), select the variation pattern determination table D for loss, and change the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table D for loss PA1-3 (shortened Variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) loss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (simulated continuous effect 1 time) fluctuation pattern) and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (twice pseudo continuous effect)). More specifically, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 in a proportion of 3% and PA2-4 in a proportion of 2%.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a big hit, the variation pattern is determined according to the type of the big win. The selection ratio of any one of the variation patterns for big wins (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied according to, for example, the gaming state, regardless of the type of the big win. By doing so, the variable display is performed in a variation pattern suitable for the game state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 13 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 002SG150 as shown in FIG. there is The game control data holding area 002SG150 shown in FIG. It has a control timer setting section 002SG153, a game control counter setting section 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 002SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) are stored in order of winning.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) are stored in the winning order.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for winning type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment is held data, It stores until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 002SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data representing the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on is reserved data. Store until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

Thus, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 002SG151A and the second special figure suspension storage unit 002SG151B can be used to execute a special figure game using the first special figure or a special figure game using the second special figure. It shows that it is suspended, and it becomes suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in these special figure games.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning hole in this way, and the second starting winning hole When the holding information (second holding information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by the game ball passing (entering) is stored in association with the holding number in a separate holding storage unit, The variable display based on the second reserved storage information is preferentially executed over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 002SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 002SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it was detected by the gate switch 21, and the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 002SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 002SG153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. For example, the game control timer setting unit 002SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 002SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 13 stores various data tables used for controlling the production operation in addition to the production control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns, and the like. there is

As an example, in the ROM 121, the production control CPU 120 controls production operations by various production devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the production model, etc.). A performance control pattern table storing a plurality of types of performance control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern corresponds to various performance operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is composed of data indicating the content of the control. The effect control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

In the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 13, a production control data holding area 002SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The effect control data holding area 002SG190 shown in FIG. 21A includes a effect control flag setting unit 002SG191, a effect control timer setting unit 002SG192, a effect control counter setting unit 002SG193, and a effect control buffer setting unit 002SG194. there is

The effect control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 002SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 002SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 002SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the reception command buffer 002SG194A at the time of start winning as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 002SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning command buffer 002SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (second 1 pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer 002SG194A at the time of start winning are associated with these starting entrance winning designation command and reservation storage number notification command , A storage area (entry) for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

The effect control CPU 120 stores a command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 002SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 002SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 002SG194A shown in FIG. 21B is an entry (buffer number " 1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. , and the storage contents of entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. ' are shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "0". , the commands stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. The backup data may be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after the restoration process (step S4) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after the initialization process (step S6). The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt processing for game control shown in FIG. 23 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110, and It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 23 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is to be a "big hit", and the type of the big hit are determined based on the random number value for determining the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special game using the second special is preferentially executed over the special game using the first special. ). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (002SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (002SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (002SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 002SG154, it should have specified the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. 002SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (002SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 002SGS101 (002SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage reaches the upper limit in 002SGS102 (002SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (002SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (002SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In 002SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (002SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "2" (002SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 002SGS103 and 002SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "0", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 002SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. Numerical data representing the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (002SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way and the starting port buffer value are stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit (002SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 002SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (002SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

CPU103, following the processing of 002SGS111, for example by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, to the effect control board 12 Settings are made for sending the pending storage count notification command (002SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the process of 002SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "0" (Y at 002SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting buffer value is "2" (N at 002SGS114), the starting buffer is cleared, and after initializing the stored value to "0" (002SGS116), the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 24 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 002SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 002 SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

In step 002SGS141, when the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" (step 002SGS141; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "0" in the second special figure pending storage unit Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 002 SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 002 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" in the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 002 SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 002SGS144), it moves to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, at step 002SGS141, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 002SGS145). . The number of the first special figure pending memory is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 002 SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0" good. Thus, the processing of step 002SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 002SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "0" in the first special figure pending storage unit As such, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 002 SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 002 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the first special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the first special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" in the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 002 SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "0" (step 002SGS148), it moves to step 002SGS149.

In step 002 SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 16 is selected as a table used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, should be a "jackpot" or a "lose". to set. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or "loss" (step 002 SGS150). In addition, in this step 002 SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the variable probability flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (variable probability state ), it is determined as a “big hit” if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a “loss”. Also, if the probability variable flag is off low probability state (low probability low base state if this characteristic part), if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, "big hit ", and if not applicable, it is determined as "missing".

As described above, in the display result determination table selected at step 002SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big win" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, so step 002SGS150 In the processing, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high-probability state, different determination data (determination value) is used to determine the special figure display result as a "big hit" By determining whether or not, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) as a “jackpot” with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is judged to be a "jackpot" at step 002SGS150 (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 17A is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 002 SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “probability variable jackpot B”, “probability variable jackpot C”, which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, determines which of a plurality of jackpot types should be selected (step 002 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 002 SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is changed to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state ( Which game state is to be controlled from among the high-probability-high base state) is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a variable display result. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 002 SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "0". If it is "variable probability B" corresponding to B, it is "2", and if it is "variable probability C" that corresponds to variable probability big hit C, it is "3". After the processing of step 002SGS155, the process proceeds to step 002SGS156.

Further, when it is determined to be "missed" at step 002SGS150 (step 002SGS150; N), the processing of step 002SGS156 is executed without executing the processing of steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002 SGS156, the CPU 103 corresponds to the result of prior determination of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and the decision result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state. , Set a fixed special pattern. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 002 SGS 150a, if the big hit type at step 002 SGS 154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as the fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, and a plurality of types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 002SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure in step 002SGS145 is "0" (step 002SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 002SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration specifying command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit).

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32A. , 32B, and control to operate various production devices. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process process of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random value update process (step S77), a demonstration effect control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration effect in the pachinko game machine 1 and a background image displayed on the image display device 5 are changed. A background display update process (step S79) for updating to another background image and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

Incidentally, in the background display update process of the present embodiment, the first background image corresponding to the first effect mode, the second background image corresponding to the second effect mode, and the third background image corresponding to the third effect mode , and a fourth background image corresponding to the fourth effect mode. The first background image and the second background image can be displayed when the game state is the normal state, the third background image can be displayed when the game state is the low probability/high base state, and the third background image can be displayed when the game state is the low probability/high base state. 4 The background image can be displayed when the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Switching between the first background image and the second background image is performed, for example, when the variable display of SP reach swelling is executed, or when one of the background images is continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time. It switches when the conditions are met.

In the menu display process, in addition to the process of displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, in the state where the menu screen is displayed, the speaker is displayed in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B. It includes a process of adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R and a process of adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 .

In the demonstration effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, such as a timer for waiting for the start of the customer waiting demo effect, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the time-out of the timer without starting the variable display. In addition, when the variable display is started while the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration effect is interrupted, The display of the image display device 5 may be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 27 as the effect control process processing. In the production control process shown in FIG. 28, the production control CPU 120 first starts the reservation storage display (first reservation display 002SG101 and second reservation display 002SG102) in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U of the image display device 5. A pending display update process for updating the display according to the stored contents of the received command buffer 002SG194A at the time of winning and performing shift display, etc., which will be described later, is executed (step S161). After executing the pending display update process, one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination for executing the pre-reading advance notice effect (for example, effect of changing the display color of the pending display, etc.) A pre-reading notice setting process in which determination, setting, etc. are performed may be executed together with the pending display update process.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, commands to the lamp control board 14 (illumination signals ), such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, various effect control during the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, operation|movement of CPU120 for production|presentation control is demonstrated. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002 SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer , are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 002 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273; Y ), for example, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer, buffer number 1 It is shifted upward by one piece (step 002SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) and the variation pattern (step 002SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In this embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Also, if the received variable display result designation command is a third variable display result designation command to a fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B to the probability variable jackpot C, an odd number other than "7" is used as the stop symbol. It is determined from a plurality of combinations of symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets a combination of decoration patterns in which three patterns are even numbers as the stop pattern. to decide.

In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the received variable display result designation command is the third variable corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B to the probability variable jackpot C As in the case of the display result designation command to the fourth variable display result designation command, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", "333", "555", "999 , etc.)) may be determined. In this case, by further sharing the effects during the variable display during the jackpot game and the variable probability state, it is possible to determine whether the game state is the variable probability state or the time reduction state until the variable display is executed 100 times. , the player can be made to pay attention to whether the time saving state ends after 100 times of variable display or continues until 10,000 times of variable display, and interest can be improved.

Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as the stop symbols. A combination of symbols (lost symbols) is determined. Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle A combination of reach-losses with different symbols (losing symbols) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern specification command read at step 002 SGS 275 is a variation pattern specification command of super reach (variation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) with pseudo-continuation. It is determined whether or not there is (step 002SGS277). If the variation pattern specification command read at step 002SGS275 is not a super reach variation pattern specification command, that is, if it is a normal reach variation pattern specification command (step 002SGS278; N), proceed to step 002SGS383.

When the variation pattern designation command read out at step 002 SGS275 is a variation pattern designation command of super reach, from the data indicating the stop design of the decorative design determined at step 002 SGS276 and stored in the decorative design display result storage area, reach The display colors of the stop symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5C forming the state are specified. Then, using the pseudo-repeat count display determination table shown in FIG. The display color of the pseudo repetition number display (for example, "x2") indicating that the variable display is started twice is determined and stored (step 002 SGS278).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designation command read out in step 002 SGS275 is a pseudo-run twice super reach variation pattern (step 002 SGS279), and when it is determined that it is a pseudo-run two times super reach variation pattern (Step 002SGS279; Y), using the pseudo-running number display determination table shown in FIG. The display color of the pseudo consecutive number display (for example, "x3") indicating that the variable display is started three times including the first variable display is determined and stored (step 002 SGS280).

Then, when it is determined in step 002SGS279 that the variation pattern is not two times of pseudo-repeated, or when the process of step 002SGS280 is executed, a start waiting timer for starting display of the number of pseudo-repetitions is set (step 002SGS281). , go to step 002 SGS 282 .

Next, at step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and a process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 002 SGS284). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 002SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of left, middle, right decorative patterns and small patterns into the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data written in is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of decorative patterns and small patterns. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 002 SGS287), and the variable display start setting process ends.

(decorative design and small design)
Next, decorative patterns and small patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining decorative patterns and small patterns. FIG. 31 shows (A1) (A2) the first effect mode, (B1) (B2) the second effect mode, (C1) (C2) the third effect mode, (D1) (D2) the fourth effect FIG. 4 is a diagram showing aspects of modes; 32, (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the first rendering mode, and (B1) and (B2) in the second rendering mode. 33, (C1) and (C2) show the third effect mode, (D1) and (D2) show the relationship between the variable display area and the decoration pattern in the fourth production mode, and (E) the decoration pattern and the small pattern. and FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a variable display mode.

In FIG. 30, the sizes of decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns are those displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and display area 5S. It is displayed as a ratio.

As shown in FIG. 30, when the gaming state is the low base state, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are circular number pedestals and Numeral display section 002SG051 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number pedestal, and 10 types of characters corresponding to each number "0" to "9" of the number display section 002SG051 ( Illustration of all characters is omitted), a character display portion 002SG052, a rectangular information pedestal in front view, and information about characters displayed in front of the information pedestal (for example, in the present embodiment, , character name), and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 002SG054 that is displayed so as to surround the number display section 002SG051, the character display section 002SG052, and the information display section 002SG053. be.

In this embodiment, the information display section 002SG053 displays the name of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the information is related to the character displayed in the section 002SG052, various information other than the name (for example, information such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, and items possessed by the character) may be displayed.

In addition, when the game state is the high base state, the decorative patterns (for the high base state) displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are number display portions consisting of numbers "0" to "9". 002SG061 and a substantially rectangular pedestal display portion 002SG064 that is displayed so as to surround the number display portion 002SG061. The decorative symbols for the high base state are not provided with the character display portion and the information display portion unlike the decorative symbols for the low base state.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided in the upper left part of the image display device 5, the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decoration pattern are displayed. The small patterns consist of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decoration pattern. In this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative patterns and the numbers of the small patterns correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily correspond to each other. It may be a number from '1' to '5' which is less than the number '0' to '9', or it may be a symbol or figure different from the number of the decorative pattern.

Next, decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state) and small patterns will be described.

<Display timing of each pattern> Decorative patterns (for low base state) and decorative patterns (for high base state) are almost displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while the power of the image display device 5 is on. Although it is always displayed, it may be erased (not displayed) when, for example, an SP ready-to-win effect (super ready-to-win effect) is executed during variable display, or when a customer waiting demo effect is executed. On the other hand, while the image display device 5 is powered on, the small pattern is always displayed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative pattern, and continues to be displayed even when the decorative pattern is erased as described above. Is displayed. When information having a higher display priority than small symbols (for example, error display) is displayed, it may be erased.

<Variable display mode of each pattern> Decorative patterns (for low base state) are displayed in a scroll display that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first production mode described later. , and in the second presentation mode, variable display is performed by scroll display that moves in a curved manner from the back side to the front side of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

The decorative pattern (for high base state) is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a third production mode, which will be described later. , In the fourth effect mode, variable display is performed by scroll display that linearly moves from the top to the bottom of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Regardless of the game state or production mode, the small symbols are displayed in a switching display (updated display in which the symbols are updated) in which the symbols “0” to “9” are switched in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR. executed.

In a broad sense, both the "scrolling display" and the "switching display" are included in the "switching display" in which patterns are switched and displayed. "Scroll display" means that a plurality of patterns are updated and displayed by frame-out display or fade-out display from the display area after moving and displaying the pattern. A plurality of symbols may be updated and displayed by repeating display and non-display (erasing) or rotating display without fade-out display, which may be distinguished from "switch display".

<Numerical display part> The decorative pattern (for low base state) and the decorative pattern (for high base state) have character display part 002SG052, information display part 002SG053, and pedestal display part 002SG054 in addition to number display parts 002SG051 and 002SG061. On the other hand, the small pattern is composed only of the number display portion.

In addition, the decorative patterns (for the low base state) are displayed in the same size in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R. By displaying in a size slightly smaller than the decorative pattern display area 5R, a sense of depth is created. On the other hand, the decorative patterns (for the high base state) are displayed in the same size in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and arranged linearly in the horizontal direction. The small patterns are displayed in the same size in each of the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC and 5SR.

In addition, in the low base state, the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are arranged substantially horizontally at approximately the center position of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction, but the middle decorative design display area 5C is arranged. is positioned slightly above the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R. In the high base state, the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged substantially horizontally at substantially the center position of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the decoration symbols stopped and displayed at the stop position of the middle decoration design display area 5C in the high base state are displayed more clearly than the decoration symbols stopped and displayed at the stop position of the middle decoration design display area 5C in the low base state. 5 is arranged near the center of the display screen (see FIG. 31).

In addition, when the size of the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as a reference, the size of the number display portion 002SG061 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is large, and the size of the number display portion of the small pattern is large. is small. In other words, the size of the number display area is larger in order of decorative design (for high base state), decorative design (for low base state), and small design. (for low base state) > small pattern). In addition, the overall size of each pattern has the same relationship as that of the number display portion.

In this way, in the low base state, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are made to appear large, and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are shifted to give a sense of depth. In addition, in the high base state where the average variable display period is short, the decoration pattern is arranged at a position near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, so that the degree of recognition of the decoration pattern can be improved. (See Figure 31).

In addition, the decorative pattern (for the low base state), the decorative pattern (for the high base state), and the number display portions of the small patterns are each formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created by 3DCG (a virtual solid is configured (modeled) with points placed on three-dimensional coordinates as vertices, and information for reproducing materials etc. is given to each surface, (reproduced by illuminating an object with arbitrary light intensity, light source position, etc.), but a three-dimensional display device (for example, from a right eye image (R image) and a left eye image (L image) an image liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video), a backlight that irradiates planar light from the rear to the front of the image liquid crystal panel, and the image on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel. and a liquid crystal panel for a parallax barrier provided at a predetermined interval) may be an image that can be viewed stereoscopically.

In addition, among the numbers “0” to “9” of the decorative pattern, the odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” are controlled to a high-probability high base state after the jackpot is finished. , and for even numbers of "0, 2, 4, 6, 8", the normal design (non-probability design). It should be noted that even in the event of a variable probability big win, a predetermined big win combination may be obtained according to the normal symbols.

<Character Display Portion> The character display portion 002SG052 of the decoration pattern (for the low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the character display portion 002SG052 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Also, the character displayed on the character display portion 002SG052 performs a predetermined action (movement) when the variable display is started or stopped, as will be described later. On the other hand, the decoration pattern (for the high base state) and the small pattern are not provided with the character display portion.

<Information Display Portion> The information display portion 002SG053 of the decoration pattern (for the low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). The information display section 002SG053 may be formed with a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). The information display portion 002SG053 displays a "name" which is information about the character displayed in the character display portion 002SG052. It has become. On the other hand, the decoration pattern (for the high base state) and the small pattern are not provided with the information display section.

<Pedestal display part> In the pedestal display part 002SG054 of the decoration design (for low base state), the decoration part that decorates the character is displayed in front, and is formed with a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). . Also, the pedestal display portion 002SG064 of the decorative design (for the high base state) is formed with a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Note that both the pedestal display portion 002SG054 and the pedestal display portion 002SG064 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Further, when the size of the pedestal display portion 002SG054 of the decorative design (for the low base state) is used as a reference, the size of the pedestal display portion 002SG064 of the decorative design (for the high base state) is large. On the other hand, the small pattern is not provided with a pedestal display portion.

<Main colors> The color of the numbers displayed in the number display parts 002SG051 and 002SG061 of the decorative design (for low base state) and decorative design (for high base state) is "blue" for normal patterns consisting of even numbers, and "blue" for odd numbers. The probability variation pattern is said to be "red". The pedestals for numbers other than the numbers, the pedestal display portions 002SG054 and 002SG064, etc. may be displayed in the same color as the numbers or in a different color from the numbers.

Also, the characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 may be configured in their original colors without being affected by the main colors. Also, the character corresponding to the variable probability symbol is preferably the ally character if, for example, the ally character and the enemy character are separated. Alternatively, it is preferable that the character is a main character of the story, such as a main character in the story among allied characters or a person closely related to the main character.

In addition, as described above, when the story concept of allies and enemies is adapted, the notice effect and SP reach effect are basically expressed from the point of view of the allies, and the allies and enemies fight in the SP reach effect. In the case of the effect configuration, it is notified that the player will be in an advantageous state (for example, a big win) when the ally side has an advantageous ending, such as when the ally side wins over the enemy.

Also, the main color having the highest occupation rate in the entire area of each of the decorative pattern (for low base state) and the decorative pattern (for high base state) may be the same color as the number. In addition, although the even-numbered normal symbols are "blue" and the odd-numbered probability variable symbols are "red", they may be of other colors.

Also, in the high base state, as described later, the scroll display is performed at high speed, so it is necessary to make it easier to see than the decorative symbols (for the low base state), so decorations such as the stop symbol notice and the fluctuation start notice are displayed. Since effects are often displayed in conjunction with the design, the decoration design (for high base state) is mainly composed of the number display section 002SG061, and is composed of a character display section and a number display section. It is characterized by a larger design size ratio than the decorative design (for low base state).

Although illustration is omitted in the present embodiment, the numbers of the decorative patterns (for high base state) are more complicated than the numbers of the decorative patterns (for low base state), and the design is more complicated. The high base state may be livened up by making the appearance more flashy, such as making it taller.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers of the small symbols is "yellow" for normal symbols consisting of even numbers, and "yellow-green" for probability variable symbols consisting of odd numbers. In the present embodiment, even-numbered normal symbols are "yellow" and odd-numbered odd-numbered odd-numbered symbols are "yellow-green", but other colors may be used. Also, the same number as the decorative pattern may be the same kind of color as the decorative pattern.

Regarding the design of the small pattern, it is possible to reduce the number material of the decorative pattern in the low base state or high base state as it is, but it is said that the design will enhance the effect. In order to improve visibility for the player, it is preferable that the design is simpler than the decorative numbers (for example, it is flat rather than three-dimensional, and has a simple color without gloss). .

As shown in FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 has, as effect modes, a first effect mode (see FIGS. 31 (A1) and (A2)), a second effect mode (see FIGS. 31 (B1) and (B2)), a Either of the 3 production modes (see FIGS. 31(C1) and (C2)) and the 4th production mode (see FIGS. 31(D1) and (D2)) can be executed. The first effect mode and the second effect mode are effect modes that can be executed when the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state. In addition, the third effect mode is an effect mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to the low probability and high base state, and the fourth effect mode is when the game state is controlled to the high probability and high base state. It is an executable production mode.

As shown in FIG. 31 (A1), in the first production mode, the decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is a landscape of a town in the daytime. A first background image 002SG081 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 31A2, the variable display of the decorative design is a scroll display (first scroll display) in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R move linearly from top to bottom. executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 32A1 and 32A2, each decorative pattern is framed downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then straight downward. , and is framed out downward from the lower sides of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set in the center of the vertical direction of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the subsequent decoration pattern (for example, the decoration pattern of "4") is displayed in the frame and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 32 (A2), when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. However, after the preceding "3" decoration pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "3" decoration pattern and the subsequent "4" decoration pattern become visible. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly displayed. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, thereby executing the scroll display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the number of the first reserved memory, the number of the second reserved memory and the small pattern are displayed, and the special figure provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 In the pending storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F, the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed. be done. In addition, since the number of these first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories, the small symbols, the special figure reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes, the explanation is omitted below. do.

As shown in FIG. 31 (B1), in the second production mode, the decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is a landscape of a wilderness in the daytime. A second background image 002SG082 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 31B2, the variable display of decorative patterns is scroll display (second scroll display) in which the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are moved in a curved manner from the back side to the front side. A variable display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 32(B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative patterns approach the center of the screen from the upper left side of the left decorative design display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative design display area 5R. After that, it moves downward to the left and right sides of the screen, and moves sideways from the lower left side of the left decorative design display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative design display area 5R. displayed out of frame. The middle decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed so as to approach the front side of the middle decoration pattern display area 5C from the back side of the screen, and then displayed out of frame.

In addition, the previous decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the decorative pattern "2") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the center position in the vertical direction of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. Occasionally, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "3" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves toward the center of the screen. That is, as shown in FIG. 32 (B2), when the leading "2" decorative pattern is passing near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "3" decorative pattern are It can be visually recognized, but after the preceding decorative pattern "2" has passed the stop position, the following decorative patterns "3" and "4" can be visually recognized. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly displayed. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, thereby executing the scroll display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in FIG. 31 (C1), in the third effect mode, the decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is the scenery of the town in the evening. A representative third background image 002SG083 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 (C2), the variable display of the decorative design is performed by rotating the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R around the rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. be.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33(C1) and (C2), the decoration pattern in the third production mode has a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b opposite to the first surface 5a. , the preceding decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") is displayed on the first surface 5a. On the other hand, when the first surface 5a faces the front, it cannot be determined whether the subsequent decorative pattern (for example, "4" decorative pattern) is displayed on the second surface 5b. In other words, since the pedestal display portion 002SG064 has a low transmittance (opaqueness), the decoration pattern displayed on the second surface 5b cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decoration pattern).

Also, the decorative pattern is rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view), and the first surface 5a, the second surface 5b, the first surface 5a, the second surface 5b, . . . By rotating, the numbers increase in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc. After "9", it returns to "0" and goes from "0" to "9". is repeatedly displayed. In other words, the decoration symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, so that the rotation display of the decoration symbols is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33(C2), when the second surface 5b is displayed after rotating about 90 degrees or more from the state in which the first surface 5a faces the front, the second surface 5b has the first A decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern of "4") following the decorative pattern displayed on the surface 5a (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") is displayed. Next, although not shown in particular, when the first surface 5a is displayed by rotating about 90 degrees or more from the state in which the second surface 5b faces the front, the first surface 5a is displayed on the second surface 5b. A decoration pattern (for example, a decoration pattern of "5") following the decoration pattern (for example, a decoration pattern of "4") is displayed.

Further, in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and characters of "Right-handed" is displayed to notify the player to promote the right-handed operation. In the lower left part, a time saving remaining display 002SG202 (in this example, characters of "remaining XX times", XX=0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time saving control is executed is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 31 (D1), in the fourth effect mode, decorative patterns for the high base state are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the background image of the decorative patterns is a nighttime townscape. A representative fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 (C2), the variable display of decorative patterns is scroll display (third scroll display) in which the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are linearly moved downward. A variable display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33(D1) and (D2), each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then straight downward. , and is framed out downward from the lower sides of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, a decorative pattern of "3") passes through the decorative pattern stop position set in the center of the vertical direction of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the subsequent decoration pattern (for example, the decoration pattern of "4") is displayed in the frame and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 33 (D1), when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. However, as shown in FIG. 33 (D2), after the leading "3" decorative pattern has passed the stop position, the leading "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern are visible. becomes. In this way, the number of decorative patterns increases in order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and "0" to "9". ” is repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are loop-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, thereby executing the scroll display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing image 002SG201 including a right arrow and characters "Right-handed" is displayed for informing the player to promote the right-handed operation.

In addition, in the second effect mode, the name of the information display portion 002SG053 of the decorative pattern is always hidden even when the decorative pattern is stopped. In addition, in the third production mode and the fourth production mode, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner without including the information display section 002SG053. Thus, in the first effect mode, by displaying the information display section 002SG053 to draw attention to the name of the character, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. By hiding the information display section 002SG053 in the presentation mode, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the variable display and the notice presentation rather than the characters. It should be noted that not only the name displayed on the information display section 002SG053 but also the information display section 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in FIG. 33(E), the decoration pattern and the small pattern are different in variable display mode. For example, during the period in which the decorative patterns are scrolled and displayed at high speed, one decorative pattern passes through the frame-in display from the upper sides of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the frame-out display from the lower sides. A period Ta2 is required. That is, one decorative pattern is displayed, and it takes a period Ta2 until the display of the decorative pattern is finished. On the other hand, the small symbols are switched (updated) a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) to display the small symbols of the losing combination during the period Ta2.

Specifically, when the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30 FPS (displaying 30 frames (frames) of images per second), from the start of the display of one decorative pattern to the end of the display An image of 10 frames is displayed at , and the period Ta2 is about 0.3 seconds.

On the other hand, small symbols of different combinations (for example, "635", "175", "461", "532", "913", etc.) are displayed every two frames (period Ta1). That is, during the period Ta2 from when one decoration pattern is displayed to when the display of the decoration pattern is finished, the small patterns of the losing combination are switched five times and displayed for each period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). It should be noted that the small symbols of each lost combination are displayed for the period Ta1, but since it is only a moment (about 0.06 seconds), it is difficult to visually confirm.

In addition, when it is decided that the display result of the variable display will be the result of the display of failure, the effect control CPU 120 decides to stop display the fixed decorative pattern of the failure combination (for example, "326"). , after starting the variable display of the decoration pattern and before stopping and displaying the fixed decoration pattern (for example, "326") of the lost combination, the small pattern of the lost combination of "326", which is the same as the decorative pattern, is not displayed. Switching display is performed as follows. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fact that the decorative symbols of the lost combination will be stopped and displayed in advance from the small symbols of the lost combination.

In addition, in the scroll display in the first production mode, the second production mode and the fourth production mode, and the rotating display in the third production mode, the decorative pattern changes the variable display speed from low speed to high speed at the start of the variable display, When the variable display stops, it changes from high speed to low speed, that is, the variable display speed can be changed. ing.

(Various actions with decorative patterns)
Next, various operation displays of decorative patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing (A) a decorative symbol variation start action, (B) a variation stop action, and (C) a loop action.

As shown in FIGS. 34(A) to 34(C), the decorative patterns for the low base state are moved within the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R or displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for variable display. It rotates within the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but apart from such variable display movements, it is possible to execute various actions (movements) that change the number display portion 002SG051 and the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative design. .

(variable start action)
As shown in FIG. 34(A), when the variable display is started in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 in the decoration pattern is horizontally reversed. A "variation start action" that causes Specifically, the character is in a normal mode of putting both hands on the hips and facing diagonally forward right in the variation start action A1, and in a variation start action A2 with both hands spread upward and facing the front. In action A3, the character puts both hands on the waist and looks diagonally to the left. Here, for convenience of explanation, only three frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, and A3 are shown, but in reality, the character is displayed over several tens of frames within the variation start action period (A1 to A3). As a result, a variation start action (movement) is performed in which the orientation of the character's body changes in the order of diagonally forward right (A1), front (A2), and diagonally forward left (A3).

Next, after the character's body is turned diagonally forward to the left, the decoration pattern moves (rises) from the stop position to the side opposite to the scroll direction by a predetermined distance (A4), and then starts moving downward. to start the scroll display. These fluctuation start actions A1 to A4 are fluctuation start action period Tb1 (see FIG. 35) from when the variable display of the special symbols is started to when the scroll display of the decorative symbols (the downward movement of the decorative symbols) is started. is executed over

Here, for convenience of explanation, only four frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, A3, and A4 are shown. A change start action (movement) is performed by displaying the movement of the character over ten frames.

In the present embodiment, as the variation start action, a mode in which the orientation of the character's body is horizontally reversed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation start action is Modifications other than those described above are possible. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. At least one of the number display portion 002SG051, the character display portion 002SG052, the information display portion 002SG053, and the pedestal display portion 002SG054, which form the decoration pattern, should be the one that takes action. In other words, the variable start action is an action that is executed before the decorative pattern starts scrolling display or rotating display, and is an action that changes in the scrolling display, that is, a separate action that operates in a manner different from the scrolling display. be.

Further, in the first effect mode, the name of the character (character-related information) displayed in the information display section 002SG053 is erased (hidden) during the variable start action period Tb1. In this way, while the character name is easy to see when it is stopped, the character name is not displayed after the scroll display is started, so that attention can be drawn to the scroll display.

Specifically, the variable display period of the special symbols includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols is started until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols is started, and the scrolling display of the decorative symbols. and a variable post-display period after being initiated. The name of the character (character-related information) displayed on the information display section 002SG053 is displayed during the pre-variable display period, that is, when the change start action is being executed, and then the post-variable display period is started. , that is, before the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started. In this way, the name is erased before the variable start action period Tb1, that is, before the scroll display is started, so that the variable display, the advance notice effect, etc. can be noticed rather than the name.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols to the start of the scroll display of the decorative symbols is set as the pre-variable display period. However, the pre-variable display period is the period from when the condition for starting variable display is satisfied until the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, that is, the timing when the start winning occurs and the reserved memory. A period from when the variable display based on the display pattern is started to when the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started may be sufficient.

(fluctuation stop action)
As shown in FIG. 34(B), when the variable display ends in the first effect mode and the second effect mode (when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed), the decorative pattern is displayed on the character display portion 002SG052. "Variation stop action" is executed in which the character that is being displayed is enlarged and displayed.

Specifically, when the scroll-displayed decoration pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position, the character changes from the normal mode of placing the hand on the waist and facing diagonally forward to the right (fluctuation stop action B1) to the normal mode. After being enlarged and displayed so as to protrude far above the pedestal display portion 002SG054 (variation stop action B2), it is reduced and restored to the normal mode (variation stop action B3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, only three frames of the fluctuation stop actions B1, B2, and B3 are shown. A change stop action (movement) is performed by displaying the movement of the character over ten frames.

In the present embodiment, a mode in which a character is enlarged and displayed is exemplified as a variation stop action. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. At least one of the number display portion 002SG051, the character display portion 002SG052, the information display portion 002SG053, and the pedestal display portion 002SG054, which form the decoration pattern, may take action. In other words, the change stop action is an action that is executed when the scrolling display of the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped, and is a separate action from the changing action such as the scrolling display and the rotating display.

(loop action)
As shown in FIG. 34(C), when the variable display ends in the first production mode and the second production mode (from the temporary stop display of the decoration pattern to the stop display (design determination)), the decoration pattern Then, the character displayed on the character display portion 002SG052 is repeatedly reduced and restored, and the number display portion 002SG051 repeats horizontal rotation around the vertical rotation axis, which is called a "loop action".

Specifically, in the loop action C1, the character puts both hands on the waist and looks diagonally forward to the right, while the number display section 002SG051 faces the front. The characters are displayed in a reduced size so that they can be accommodated, and the number display portion 002SG051 is rotated about 45 degrees to the right. In the loop action C4, the character is displayed in a reduced size so that it fits on the pedestal display portion 002SG054, and the number display portion 002SG051 is rotated leftward by about 45 degrees. In this loop action, the loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 are sequentially executed over the loop action period Tb3, and after the loop action period Tb3 ends, the loop action C1 is returned to, and the actions of the loop actions C1 to C4 are executed again over the loop action period Tb3. is executed. That is, in loop actions, loop actions C1 to C4 are periodically executed.

Here, for convenience of explanation, only four frames of the loop actions C1 to C4 are displayed, but in reality, the character is restored after being displayed in reduced size, and the number display section 002SG051 is rotated and restored. During the loop action period Tb3 up to, the loop action (operation) is performed by displaying the character and number display portion 002SG051 over several tens of frames.

In the present embodiment, as the loop action, the character is displayed in a reduced size and the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of the loop action can be changed to a mode other than the above. For example, the character's hair or facial expression may change, or the body may move. At least one of the number display portion 002SG051, the character display portion 002SG052, the information display portion 002SG053, and the pedestal display portion 002SG054, which form the decoration pattern, should be the one that takes action. That is, the loop action is an action that is executed from when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position until it is stopped and displayed (design is confirmed), and is a separate action from the action that changes during the scroll display.

(Comparison of various action periods and light emission periods)
Next, various actions of decorative patterns and light emission control of lamps will be described with reference to FIG. 35, (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative patterns and periods of light emission control of lamps, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of lamps.

As shown in FIG. 35(A), the variation start actions A1 to A4 (see FIG. 34(A)) of decorative symbols have a variation start action period Tb1, which is an execution period, of about 1.5 seconds (variation start action period Tb1=approximately 1.5 seconds), consisting of images of approximately 45 frames. In addition, the variation stop action period B1 to B3 (see FIG. 34B) of the decorative symbols has a variation stop action period Tb2 of about 0.8 seconds (variation stop action period Tb2=about 0.8 seconds). ), consisting of about 28 frames of images. Also, the loop actions C1 to C4 (see FIG. 34(C)) of the decorative symbols have a loop action period Tb3, which is a period of 1, of about 1.8 seconds (loop action period Tb3=about 1.8 seconds). It consists of about 55 frames of images.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35(B), movable body lamps 9d provided on each of the movable body 32A provided on the upper part of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B provided on the lower part of the image display device 5, The main lamp 9a and the frame lamp 9b provided in the gaming machine frame 3 emit light based on the loop light emission control performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the game state is the low base state.

In this loop light emission control, for example, "white", "blue", and "yellow" are emitted in order over the loop light emission period Tb4, which is a period of 1, and after the end of the loop light emission period Tb4, the light returns to "white", and loop light emission is performed again. During the period Tb4, "white", "blue", and "yellow" are emitted in this order, and this is repeated periodically. That is, in the loop light emission control, "white", "blue", and "yellow" light emission is performed periodically.

The loop light emission period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4). In this way, in the low base state, the loop action is repeated in order to encourage the player to variably display the decorative symbols, while in the high base state, the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the low base state. can prevent the variable display from being excessively urged and making the user feel annoyed. In addition, since the loop action is repeated at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, the decorative pattern can be favorably highlighted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the loop light emission control has exemplified a form in which light emission of “white”, “blue”, and “yellow” is periodically executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission color and light emission pattern of the lamp in one period can be changed in various ways. A light emission pattern in which light is emitted in order may be performed periodically, or a light emission pattern in which light emission of four or more colors is emitted in order may be performed periodically.

Various actions of the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 35(A) are executed when the game state is controlled to the low base state and the effect mode is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. It is not executed when it is controlled to the high base state and the production mode is the third production mode or the fourth production mode. In the loop light emission control of the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b shown in FIG. 35(B), the game state is controlled to the low base state, and the effect mode is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. However, it is not executed when the game state is controlled to the high base state and the effect mode is the third effect mode or the fourth effect mode.

(hold display)
Next, the pending display will be described with reference to FIG. 36, (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an operation example of pending display.

As shown in FIG. 36 (A1), in the case of waiting for a game (reserved memory number "0"), the special figure reserved memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 and the active display area 5F , the pending display is not displayed. The special figure reservation storage display area 5U consists of four display areas, the first display area from the left corresponds to the buffer number "1-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A, and the second display from the left The area corresponds to buffer number "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-4". ing.

As shown in FIG. 36 (A2), when the start winning (for example, the first start winning) occurs during game standby, the first display area from the left in the special figure reservation storage display area 5U, the first reservation display 002SG101 is displayed. Next, the first suspension display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left (see FIG. 36A3), and then moves diagonally downward to the left toward the active display area 5F so as to draw a parabola. Then, when it reaches the active display area 5F, it is enlarged and displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 36A4).

That is, as shown in FIG. 36 (A2), when the start winning a prize occurs, the first holding display 002SG101 is displayed in the special figure holding storage display area 5U and is not displayed in the active display area 5F, but the first starting winning a prize When the first suspension display 002SG101 is displayed in the special figure suspension storage display area 5U based on the occurrence of , variable display of small symbols is started according to variable display of special symbols.

However, although the variable display has been started, as shown in FIG. 36 (A4), the first pending display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is active display Since the display has not been switched to the active display 002SG103 after moving to the area 5F, that is, the shift display has not ended, if the scrolling display of the decorative symbols is started in a state in which the shift display has not ended, either The player may not know whether the scroll display corresponding to the first suspension display 002SG101 has started, and the player may feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is moved and displayed to the active display area 5F, and the pending shift display until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 The scrolling display (variable display) of the decoration pattern does not start until the period ends, the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scrolling display (variable display) of the decoration pattern starts. It has become so.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(B1), when the decoration pattern is being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reserved memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of reserved memories is "2"), the image display device In the special figure reservation storage display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of 5, the first reservation display 002SG101 is displayed in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 is displayed in the active display area 5F. It is

As shown in FIG. 36(B2), when the variable display corresponding to the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F ends, the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F is erased. An erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

The erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased. Display starts and then disappears. In this way, by not creating a blank period of the effect until the next variable display is started after the end of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest of the effect from deteriorating. In addition, the erase effect 002SG110 makes the player aware that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display has been erased, and a new active display 002SG103 is displayed to indicate that a new variable display has started. can be recognized.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the first suspended display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left (Fig. 36 (B3)), moving diagonally downward to the left toward the active display area 5F so as to draw a parabola, and moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, thereby forming the active display 002SG103. Switching display is performed (see FIG. 36 (B4)).

Also, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left is horizontally moved to the left along with the movement of the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left. Start (see FIG. 36(B3)) and move from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 36(B4)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 36(B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased upon termination of the variable display, as shown in FIG. The first reserved display 002SG101 has not yet been moved to the active display area 5F, but when the moving display of the first reserved display 002SG101 is started, the variable display of the small symbols is started according to the variable display of the special symbols. .

However, although the variable display has been started, as shown in FIG. 36 (B4), the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is active display Since the movement to the area 5F (shift display) has not been completed, if the scroll display of the decoration pattern is started in this state, it is not known which scroll display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 is started. There is a possibility that the player will feel a sense of incompatibility.

Therefore, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 Hold shift display period Until the end of the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern, the above-mentioned fluctuation start action is executed before the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is started, and after the pending shift display period ends, the scroll display (variable display) of the decoration pattern It is supposed to start.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure reservation storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F are common in the first production mode to the fourth production mode, so that the shift display shown in FIG. Although it is designed to be executed in a common manner in the first production mode to the fourth production mode, for example, when providing a special figure reservation storage display area 5U and an active display area 5F corresponding to each production mode, each It may be possible to execute a shift display in a mode corresponding to the production mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, non-reach variation patterns, reach variation patterns, etc.) common operation mode (for example, active from the special figure pending storage display area 5U Shift display is executed to switch the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 to the active display 002SG103 in the aspect in which the pending display moves up to the display area 5F in a mountain locus, but it corresponds to each variation pattern and each production mode. It may be possible to execute the shift display of a plurality of types of operation modes. Further, it may be possible to execute a shift display with different operation modes depending on whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state.

In addition, the operation mode common to multiple types of variation patterns in the shift display is at least one of a plurality of elements such as the display mode until the pending display is switched to the active display, the display speed, and the shift display period. Including those that have elements in common.

In addition, in the present embodiment, with the occurrence of the start winning, after the first pending display 002SG101 (or second pending display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special figure pending storage display area 5U, Although the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) has been exemplified as being displayed (shifted) from the special figure pending storage display area 5U to the active display area 5F, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, if the number of pending memories is "0", the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) is not displayed in the special figure pending memory display area 5U with the occurrence of the start winning, active display The active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the area 5F.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first pending display 002SG101 is stored as a switching display (shift display) for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display along with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Although the display is exemplified by moving from the first display area from the left in the display area 5U toward the active display area 5F non-linearly (for example, in a mountainous manner), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display may be linearly moved toward the left. In addition, the switching display (shift display) is not only for sliding display of the pending display, but also the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F and the first display area from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U The first suspended display 002SG101 that was displayed in the active display area 5F may be erased once, and the display of the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the new variable display may be started in the active display area 5F.

(Example of operation of each part at the start of variable display)
Next, an operation example of each part at the start of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 46. FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first effect mode. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the second effect mode. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the details of the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols as Modification 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third effect mode. FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining how the decorative design looks. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the fourth effect mode.

In the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, the diagrams represented by lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed-dotted lines, dotted lines, etc.) and arrows without symbols are displayed on the display screen. It is not intended to show an image that has been processed, but to explain the movement of the image.

(Operation example of variable display in the first production mode)
First, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started in the first effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG.

FIG. 37(A) shows a state in which, in the first effect mode, the decorative designs scrolled in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2").

Then, as shown in FIG. 37(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in a combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as an active display. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 37(C), when variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, variable display of small symbols is started, The decorative design variation start action (see FIG. 34A) is started in the order of the left decorative design display area 5L, the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design display area. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 37(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) starts (see FIG. 37(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 37(D)).

The erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 37B continues for a while after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started. is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 37(E), when the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left ends the shift display to move to the active display area 5F, it is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L. When the actions A1 to A3 of the ornamental pattern that is displayed are finished, the action A4 of rising is started, and when the rising movement (action A4) is finished, as shown in FIG. Display starts.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are completed, the upward action A4 is started, and the upward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 37(G), downward movement is started and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C are completed, the upward action A4 is started, and the upward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 37(H), downward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started and the variable display of the small pattern is started, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, The variable display of the decoration symbols stopped and displayed is started in the order of the right decoration design display area 5R and the middle decoration design display area, but the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. Until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed, the scroll display of the decorative designs displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is not started.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity. Also, from the start of the shift display along with the start of the variable display to the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the variation start action is performed. can be recognized.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases proportionally, and fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100% at high speed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 37(F) and 37(G), the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are set at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and after passing through the medium speed shown in FIG. (I) becomes the high speed shown in (J) and (K). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases. Further, as shown in FIGS. 37(G) to 38(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5R are also slowed down immediately after the start of the variable display, and A fade-out display is executed in which the speed becomes faster and the transmittance increases with the acceleration.

(Operation example of variable display in the second production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started in the second effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG.

FIG. 39(A) shows a state in which, in the second effect mode, the decorative symbols scrolled in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2"). In addition, in the second effect mode, the name of the decorative design information display portion 002SG053 is always hidden, including when the decorative design is stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed in an active state. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 39(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of the small symbols is started, The decorative design variation start action (see FIG. 34A) is started in the order of the left decorative design display area 5L, the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design display area. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 39(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 39(C)), and the display area moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 39(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 39B continues for a while after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 39(E), when the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left ends the shift display to move to the active display area 5F, it is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L. After completing the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration pattern, the backward action A4 is started, and when the backward movement to the back side of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in FIG. is started to move and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and the backward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 39(G), forward movement is started and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C are completed, the backward action A4 is started, and the backward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 39(H), forward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started and the variable display of the small pattern is started, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, The variable display of the decoration symbols stopped and displayed is started in the order of the right decoration design display area 5R and the middle decoration design display area, but the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity. Also, from the start of the shift display along with the start of the variable display to the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the variation start action is performed. can be recognized.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases proportionally, and fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100% at high speed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 39(F) and 39(G), the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are set at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and after passing through the medium speed shown in FIG. (I) becomes the high speed shown in (J) and (K). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases. Further, as shown in FIGS. 39(G) to 40(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5R are also slowed immediately after the start of the variable display, and the middle A fade-out display is executed in which the speed becomes faster and the transmittance increases with the acceleration.

In this manner, the scroll display in the second effect mode is designed to move from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency) and disappear. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, in the scroll display, the decorative patterns move in a curved manner from the back side to the front side, so that the decorative pattern display area 5L, Between the frame-in display in 5C and 5R and the frame-out display, another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") positioned so as to partially overlap on the back side is displayed. A decorative design (for example, decorative design "3") may be visible through the decorative design "2". At this time, while the character of the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, the number ("3") of the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and the display of FIG. As shown, after the decoration pattern "2" is erased, the number ("3") of the number display portion 002SG051 of the decoration pattern "3" is displayed.

In addition, the other decorative pattern "3" positioned on the back side of the one decorative pattern "2" is visible through the one decorative pattern "2", but at this time, it is positioned on the far side. As for the other decorative pattern "3", the character of the character display portion 002SG052 is displayed, but the number of the number display portion 002SG051 is not displayed, and after the decorative pattern "2" is erased, the number of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. is displayed, the number "2" of one decorative pattern and the number "3" of the other decorative pattern are not overlapped and displayed, and the "2" of the decorative pattern positioned on the front side becomes difficult to understand. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41(A), after the decorative design is displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the frame is displayed out as shown in FIG. 41(C). Until the display speed is increased, the decorative patterns are moved and erased while increasing the transmittance (transparency). Since it is designed to be faded out, it is moved from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency) while being faded out according to the display speed. 41A to 41C from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display. Visual recognition of the decorative pattern becomes extremely difficult even on the side.

(Example of operation of variable display as modified example 1)
Next, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started as Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. FIG. In this modification 1, the ornamental patterns are scrolled in a curved manner in the same way as in the second production mode, but are moved from the front side of the screen to the back side, which is the opposite side of the second mode. there is

The flow of FIGS. 42A to 42D is the same as that of FIGS. 39A to 39D, and detailed description thereof is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 42(E), when the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left ends the shift display to move to the active display area 5F, it is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L. After completing the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration pattern, the backward action A4 is started, and when the forward movement to the front side of the display screen (action A4) is completed, as shown in FIG. is started to move and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decoration symbols displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are completed, the forward action A4 is started, and the forward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 42(G), backward movement is started and scroll display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(G), the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are completed, the forward action A4 is started, and the forward movement (action A4) is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 42(H), backward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started and the variable display of the small pattern is started, the left decorative pattern display area 5L, The variable display of the decoration symbols stopped and displayed is started in the order of the right decoration design display area 5R and the middle decoration design display area, but the first suspension display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity. Also, from the start of the shift display along with the start of the variable display to the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, the variation start action is performed. can be recognized.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. In proportion to this, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and when the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100%. For example, as shown in FIGS. 42(F) and 42(G), the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are set at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, and after passing through the medium speed shown in FIG. (I) becomes the high speed shown in (J) and (K). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases. Further, as shown in FIGS. 42(G) to 43(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5R are also slowed down immediately after the start of the variable display, and A fade-out display is performed in which the speed becomes faster and the transmittance increases as the speed increases.

In this manner, the scroll display as Modification 1 is configured to move from the front side of the screen to the back side while increasing the transmittance (transparency) and erase. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 42(G) and 42(H), in the scroll display, the decorative design moves in a curved shape from the front side to the back side, so the decorative design display area 5L, Between the frame-in display in 5C and 5R and the frame-out display, another decoration pattern (for example, decoration pattern "3") positioned so as to partially overlap on the far side with respect to one decoration pattern is displayed. A decorative design (for example, decorative design "2") may be visible through the decorative design "3". At this time, while the character of the character display portion 002SG052 of the decoration pattern "2" is displayed, the number ("2") of the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed).

In addition, the other decorative pattern "2" located on the back side of the one decorative pattern "3" is visible through the one decorative pattern "3", but at this time, it is positioned on the far side. As for the other decorative symbol "2", the character of the character display portion 002SG052 is displayed, but the number of the number display portion 002SG051 is not displayed, and after the decorative symbol "2" is erased, the number of the decorative symbol "3" is displayed. is displayed, the number "3" of one decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "2" are not displayed overlapping, and the decorative pattern "3" positioned on the front side becomes difficult to understand. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in the present modification 1, after the decorative patterns are frame-in displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and before they are framed-out, they are moved and erased while increasing the transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as described above, the decorative pattern is faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed. However, it is moved from the back side of the screen toward the front side while increasing the transmittance (transparency). 42(F) to 42(H) from the start of the scroll display to the high-speed display. Visual recognition of the decorative pattern becomes extremely difficult even on the side.

(Operation example of variable display in the third production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when variable display of decorative patterns is started in the third effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG.

FIG. 44(A) shows a state in which, in the third effect mode, the decorative patterns rotated and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-handed informing image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed as an active display. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 44(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of the small pattern is started, but the high Since it is in the base state, the decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 34(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 44(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) is started (see FIG. 44(C)), and the display area moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 44(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 44B continues for a while after the start of the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 44(F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, Rotating display of the decoration pattern displayed on 5R is started. In the high base state, the rotating display of the decorative designs displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. However, until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is moved to the active display area 5F, the decorative pattern display area 5L, Rotating display of decorative patterns displayed in 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends), and the rotating display is started after being displayed as the active display 002SG103. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity.

Further, when the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are started to rotate, the rotational display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases proportionally, and fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100% at high speed. For example, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. , the speed shown in FIG. 44(H). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases.

As shown in FIG. 45, the rotating display in the third effect mode is such that the decorative pattern is rotated and the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are displayed repeatedly. , becomes non-transmissive when the rotating display stops. During rotating display, the number display portion 002SG051 on the side of the first surface 5a of the decoration pattern that is in a semi-transparent state is displayed, while the number display portion 002SG051 on the side of the second surface 5b is not displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 45(A), in a translucent state in which the decorative design is rotated at a low speed and the transmittance is the first transmittance, it is displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As for the decorative pattern, the number "326" displayed on the first surface 5a is visible, but the number "437" displayed (to be displayed) on the second surface 5b, which is the back surface, is difficult to be visually recognized. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45(B), in a translucent state in which the decorative design is rotated and displayed at medium speed rotation and the transmittance is the second transmittance higher than the first transmittance, the decorative design display area 5L, As for the decorative patterns displayed on 5C and 5R, the number "437" displayed on the second surface 5b is visible, but the number "548" (to be displayed) displayed on the first surface 5a, which is the back side, is visible. ” is considered to be difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45(C), the decorative design is rotated at high speed and displayed, and in the translucent state where the transmittance is the third transmittance higher than the second transmittance, the decorative design display areas 5L and 5C are displayed. , 5R, the number "763" displayed on the first surface 5a is difficult but visible, and the number (to be displayed) displayed on the second surface 5b, which is the back surface "874" is in a state of being difficult to see. It should be noted that both the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are difficult to see during high-speed rotation display.

In this way, when the decorative pattern is rotated and the front and back sides of the decorative pattern are displayed repeatedly, the decorative pattern is in a semi-transparent state, so the surface of the decorative pattern (for example, the first surface 5a) is displayed. Not only the side but also the back side (for example, the second surface 5b) can be seen through. Since the numbers on the 2nd side 5b) side are not displayed, the numbers on the front side of the decorative pattern and the numbers on the back side are not displayed overlapping, preventing the numbers on the front side from becoming difficult to understand. can. Further, even when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed in the high base state, the light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow is based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 35(B)). may be repeatedly executed. By doing so, the control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d can be simplified.

(Operation example of variable display in the fourth production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when the variable display of decorative patterns is started in the fourth effect mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 46(A) shows a state in which, in the fourth effect mode, the decorative designs scrolled in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols is not finished yet, and the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first reserved displays 002SG101 are displayed in the special figure reserved storage display area 5U (first reserved storage number "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-handed informing image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See FIG. 34(A))

Then, as shown in FIG. 46(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped combination in a combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is displayed in an active state. Along with being erased from the area 5F, an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 46(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the variable display of the small pattern is started, but the high Since it is in the base state, the decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 34(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display is started in which the two first suspension displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left so as to draw a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 46(D)). In addition, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally to the left ( Shift display) starts (see FIG. 46(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 46(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 46B continues for a while after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 46(F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, The scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed on 5R is started. In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative designs displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. However, until the shift display in which the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, the scroll display of the decorative pattern display area 5L, The scrolling display of the decorative designs displayed in 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, after the movement of the first suspended display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and displayed as the active display 002SG103, the scrolling display is started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started without a sense of incongruity.

Further, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed. In proportion to this, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and when the speed increases, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance becomes almost 100%. For example, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. , the speed shown in FIG. 46(H). Since the transmittance also increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern when the speed increases.

As described above, in the low base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative symbol while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. The scroll display of decorative patterns is not started until the shift display for switching the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F as the active display 002SG103 is completed.

By doing so, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and during the shift display, the decorative symbols are displayed in a moving manner. By performing the variable start action to operate in a different mode, the period required for the shift display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is performed in the high base state which is more advantageous than the low base state, the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the high base state can be excited.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 in the effect control process processing of step S76, and the first type of variation pattern designation command ( For example, when variable display is executed based on a non-reach fluctuation pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of fluctuation pattern designation command (e.g., reach fluctuation pattern designation command), Since the common shift display can be performed, the common shift display is performed even when the variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, so the shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the low base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative symbol while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the special figure pending storage display. Until the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the area 5U is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F, the scroll display of the decoration pattern is not started, while in the high base state , The effect control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the decorative symbol variation start action is not performed when the pending shift display is performed with the start of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, In the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variation start action of the decorative pattern while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and the first from the left in the special figure pending storage display area 5U. The scrolling display of decorative patterns may not be started until the first suspended display 002SG101 displayed in the display area is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing so, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and during the shift display, the decorative symbols are displayed in a moving manner. By performing the variable start action to operate in a different mode, the period required for the shift display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is performed in the high base state which is more advantageous than the low base state, the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the high base state can be excited.

In addition, even in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display of the decoration pattern based on the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the effect control process processing of step S76. When variable display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern designation command (e.g., non-reach fluctuation pattern designation command) and the second type of fluctuation pattern designation command (e.g., reach fluctuation pattern designation command) Variable display is executed based on Since it is possible to perform a common shift display regardless of when the display is performed, a common shift display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, thereby reducing shift display patterns. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed, the left , right, and center, the scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special patterns Displayed in one of the left, right, and middle decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed along with the start of the variable display. If the scrolling display of the displayed decorative pattern is started, the scrolling display of any of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is started while the shift display is being performed. may

(Example of operation of each part at the time of symbol stop display)
Next, an example of operation of each part when symbols are stopped will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51. FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the first effect mode (second effect mode). FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols following FIG. FIG. 49, (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols when the number of pending memories is 3 in the first effect mode (second effect mode). 50(A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of stop display of decorative symbols in the fourth effect mode (third effect mode).

(Operation example of symbol stop display in the first production mode [holding memory number "2 or less"])
First, an operation example of each part when the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display based on the deviation variation pattern when the number of pending memories is 2 or less in the first production mode will be described based on FIGS. 47 and 48. do. It should be noted that the second effect mode is substantially the same as the first effect mode except for the background image, so detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47(A), in a state in which decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and scroll display is being performed, when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches, first, high speed display is performed. The display speed of the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L that has been displayed is reduced, and fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) is gradually reduced, and the visibility of the decorative patterns is improved. (See FIG. 47(B)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 47(C)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character display section 002SG052. (See FIG. 47(D)), and then a change stop action (see FIG. 34(B)) for restoring the original size is executed (see FIG. 47(E)). Then, the loop action (see FIG. 34(C)) is started in the state of the temporary stop display, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 47(F)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 47(G)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character display section 002SG052. (See FIG. 47(H)), and then the change stop action (See FIG. 34(B)) for restoring the original size is executed (See FIG. 48(I)). Then, the loop action (see FIG. 34(C)) is started in the state of the temporary stop display, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decoration symbols in the right decoration symbol display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 48(K)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 48(K)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), and the character display section 002SG052. (See FIG. 48(L)), and then a change stop action (see FIG. 34(B)) for restoring the original size is executed (see FIG. 48(M)). Then, the loop action (see FIG. 34(C)) is started in the state of the temporary stop display, and is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed, the small symbols are stopped and displayed, and the loop action of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is completed and stopped. Active display 002SG103 is erased (see FIG. 48(M)).

(Example of operation example of symbol stop display in the first effect mode [number of pending memories "3"])
Next, an operation example of each part when the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display when the number of pending memories is 3 in the first production mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 49(A) to (G). . Note that the second effect mode is substantially the same as the first effect mode except for the background image, so detailed description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 49(A), in a state in which decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and scroll display is being performed, when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches, first, high speed display is performed. The display speed of the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L that has been displayed is reduced, and fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) is gradually reduced, and the visibility of the decorative patterns is improved. (See FIG. 49(B)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 49(C)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display area 002SG052. The change stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 34(B)) is not executed. Also, after the temporary stop display, the loop action of the character (see FIG. 34(C)) is executed.

When the decorative design in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the display speed of the decorative design in the right decorative design display area 5R, which has been displayed at high speed, decreases, and the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases. A gradual fade-in display is executed, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 49(D)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 47(E)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display section 002SG052. The change stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 34(B)) is not executed. Also, after the temporary stop display, the loop action of the character (see FIG. 34(C)) is executed.

When the decorative symbols in the right decorative design display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display speed of the decorative designs in the middle decorative design display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, decreases, and the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases. A gradual fade-in display is executed, and the visibility of the decoration pattern is improved (see FIG. 49(F)).

Next, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 49(G)), the transmittance of the decorative design becomes almost 0% (opaque), but the character display section 002SG052. The change stop action of the character displayed in (see FIG. 34(B)) is not executed. Also, after the temporary stop display, the loop action of the character (see FIG. 34(C)) is executed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed, the small symbols are stopped and displayed, and the loop action of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is completed and stopped. The active display 002SG103 is erased (see FIG. 49(G)).

(Operation example of symbol stop display in the fourth production mode)
Next, an operation example of each part when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display in the fourth effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 50(A) and (B). Note that the third effect mode is substantially the same as the fourth effect mode except for the background image, so detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 50(A), in a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and scroll display is performed, when the stop display timing of each decorative pattern approaches, the decorative patterns are displayed at high speed. The display speed of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R decreases all at once, and a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, thereby improving the visibility of each decorative pattern. is improved (see FIG. 50(B)).

Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, the transmittance of the decoration pattern is almost 0% (opaque), but the movement stopping action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see FIG. 34B) is not executed. Also, the character's loop action (see FIG. 34C) is not executed after the temporary stop display.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished, the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are stopped and displayed, and the active display 002SG103 is erased. (See FIG. 50(C)).

Thus, in the low base state, depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less and the variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed), the decoration pattern is temporarily changed by the change stop action. While adding variation to the movement during the static display improves the interest, the high base makes it difficult to see the decorative patterns due to the short average variable display period and the number of retained memories being 3 in the low base state. In the state, if the variable display based on the shortened variation pattern is executed regardless of the number of retained memories, the display will be temporarily stopped while maintaining the size without executing the variation stop action, thereby impairing the visibility of the decoration pattern. can be stopped so that it does not

In the present embodiment, the data of animation (moving image) of various motions of decorative patterns are, for example, 1. From the start of the variable display to before the high-speed variable display, 2. high-speed variable display;3. 4. Low speed variable display to variable display stop; It is conceivable to create a video by combining materials for each period, such as a stop pattern. As for the high-speed variable display, as shown in FIGS. 31(A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2), the decorative pattern has a high transmittance and is almost transparent. Even if it can be recognized, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize which decorative pattern has passed (represented by arrows in FIGS. 31 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). there). Therefore, even if there is animation data for high-speed variable display for each type of decorative pattern (a type corresponding to which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display is started), it does not make much sense, and the capacity of the ROM 121 is used up. Since it is only pressing, it is preferable to use common data for the animation data of the high-speed variable display regardless of which decoration pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Example of background change operation)
Next, an example of background change operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 51, (A1) is a diagram showing the first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing the first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram for explaining background changes. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the flow of background change in the first effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the first rendering mode, the background images are a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 51A1) showing a view of the town in the daytime from a distance, and a view of the town in the daytime. can be displayed by switching between the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 51A2) showing The switching of the background image is triggered when a predetermined switching condition (for example, when the SP reach is lost) is satisfied. In this embodiment, the SP reach is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of variable display) in the next variable display after loss.

In the present embodiment, the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are switched and displayed in the first effect mode, but the present invention is limited to this. Alternatively, although not shown, three or more background images including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A may be selectively displayed by switching. Also, the fulfillment of the switching condition is not limited to the above. It may be established when it is selected by an operation.

In addition, the start timing of the switching display is the start timing of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before the decoration pattern becomes ready state. , any timing in the variable display period.

As shown in FIG. 51B, when switching display from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or switching display from the first predetermined background image 002SG081A to the first background image 002SG081), The first background image 002SG081 displayed with an opacity of 100% is faded out by gradually increasing the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081, while the first background image 002SG081 is hidden with an opacity of 0%. A fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) of the background image 002SG081A is gradually reduced. That is, a cross-fade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1=fade-in display period B1). . The fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are, for example, about 6 seconds, during which about 210 frames of images are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52A, the transmittance (transparency) increases with the passage of time from the state in which the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, making it difficult to see. (See FIG. 52(B)), the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A displayed in the lower layer of the first background image 002SG081 decreases and gradually becomes visible (see FIG. 52B). 52(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 decreases, and the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A increases (see FIGS. 52(D) and (E)). Finally, the first background image 002SG081 becomes transparent. When the rate becomes 100%, it is erased, while the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A becomes 0% and becomes easy to see (see FIG. 52(F)).

In this embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, that is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 have the same period. is not limited to this, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may partially overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may start after the fade-out display period A1 ends. may be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transmittance always increases at a constant rate in the fade-out display of the background image and the decorative pattern, and the transmittance always decreases at a constant rate in the fade-in display of the background image and the decorative pattern. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance in fade-out display or fade-in display of the background image is not necessarily limited to one that increases or decreases at a constant rate. Alternatively, the transmittance may slowly increase or decrease during the first period and then rapidly increase or decrease during the second period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the background image is switched and displayed in one rendering mode (for example, the first rendering mode or the second rendering mode) was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the first background image corresponding to the first rendering mode is switched to the second background image corresponding to the second rendering mode, and the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display of the second background image are also performed. It is also applicable to those whose periods are synchronized with each other.

(Example of operation of each part in variable display)
Next, an operation example of each part in variable display in each production mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. FIG. FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the first effect mode. FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the second effect mode. FIG. 55 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of variable display in the third production mode and the fourth production mode. FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first effect mode, (B) the second effect mode, and (C) the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode. .

(First production mode)
As shown in FIG. 53, in the first effect mode, when the variable display based on the variable pattern PA1-1 of non-reach loss is executed with the number of pending memories being "2" or less, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol , The small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. After that, the scroll display starts. In addition, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display is completed, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 56(A)).

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A21 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

Further, when the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is satisfied at the start of the variable display, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 is changed at the start of the variable display. While the fade-out display in which the (transparency) gradually increases is started, the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases to start the fade-in display in which it becomes opaque.

When the stop timing of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative design in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative design in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative design in the middle decorative design display area 5C are gradually decelerated in this order. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the display fades in. This fade-in display period B21 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative designs in the middle decorative design display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when the temporary stop display is displayed, the variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative pattern ends and is stopped and displayed. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

The fade-out display period A1 in which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is set to be longer than the fade-out display period A21 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the high-speed display. (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21).

Further, the fade-in display period B1 in which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is from the start of deceleration of the display speed in the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the temporary stop display. (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).

Further, when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are displayed in white and white based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 35(B)). A light emission pattern in the order of blue and yellow is repeatedly executed. Background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second production mode)
Next, as shown in FIG. 54, in the second effect mode, when the variable display based on the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is executed with the number of pending memories being "2" or less, the variable display of the special symbols is executed. Along with the start, the small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. After that, the scrolling display is started. In addition, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display is completed, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 56(B)).

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A22 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

Further, when the switching condition for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is satisfied at the start of the variable display, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 is changed at the start of the variable display. While the fade-out display in which the (transparency) gradually increases is started, the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases to start the fade-in display in which it becomes opaque.

When the stop timing of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative design in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative design in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative design in the middle decorative design display area 5C are gradually decelerated in this order. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the display fades in. This fade-in display period B22 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs in the right decorative design display area 5R, and the decorative designs in the middle decorative design display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when the temporary stop display is displayed, the variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is stopped and displayed, the loop action of the ornamental pattern is ended and stopped and displayed. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

The fade-out display period A1 in which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is set to be longer than the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the high-speed display. (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A22). By doing so, the fade-out display basically gives the impression that the fade-out display has disappeared abruptly in a short period of time. As for the fade-out display that may be executed at a certain time, etc.), it should be noted that the variable display of the decorative pattern is started by executing the fade-out display of the decorative pattern in a shorter period than the fade-out display of the background image. be able to.

Further, the fade-in display period B1 in which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is from the start of deceleration of the display speed in the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the temporary stop display. (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B22). By doing so, the fade-in display gives an impression that the fade-in display is basically performed in a short period of time, so that the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change occur at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped). Note that the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, and the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. can be made

Further, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second effect mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first effect mode (the fade-out display period A21 <Fade-out display period A22, see FIGS. 56A and 56B). By doing so, in the second production mode, not only is the mode of scroll display of the decorative patterns different from that in the first production mode, but the display becomes high-speed after the start of the scroll display, and the decorative patterns can be visually recognized. Since the fade-out display period A22 until it becomes difficult is lengthened, it is possible to draw attention to the decorative pattern for a long period of time.

In the present embodiment, as the variable display of decorative symbols in the second effect mode, as a special variable display that is different from the first scroll display that moves linearly from top to bottom in the first effect mode, Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the second scroll display is applied in which the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are curved from the back side to the front side, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first scroll display. The special variable display, which is different from the above, is not limited to moving the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in a curved shape from the back side to the front side as described above, as described in the first modification, Various scroll displays are applied, such as a scroll display that moves in a curved shape from the front side to the back side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, or a scroll display that moves in a straight line or curve from the bottom to the top. good too.

Further, when the non-reach loss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first effect mode and when the non-reach loss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second effect mode, fade-out display periods A21 and A22 different. By doing so, the player can predict that the determined variation pattern is the non-reach loss variation pattern PA1-1 because the fade-out display period is the same despite the different production modes. Since it becomes difficult, the amusement of the game is improved.

Also, the fade-out display period A1 in which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed and the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the high-speed display are different. That is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, at the start of the variable display), so that it becomes difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration pattern has started. can be prevented. Specifically, when the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first background image 002SG081 disappear together, making it difficult to understand that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. By erasing the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern can be made conspicuous.

Further, a fade-in display period B1 in which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed, and a period from the start of deceleration of the display speed in the scroll display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to the temporary stop display. That is, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped). It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand that the variable display has started. Specifically, when the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are synchronized, the decoration pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A appear together, making it difficult to understand that the variable display of the decoration pattern has been stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, the decorative pattern can be made conspicuous.

Further, when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are displayed in white and white based on the loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see FIG. 35(B)). A light emission pattern in the order of blue and yellow is repeatedly executed. Background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(3rd and 4th production modes)
Next, as shown in FIG. 55, in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode, when the variable display based on the shortened non-reach out variation pattern PA1-3 is executed, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol , the small patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all start rotating or scrolling without performing a variation start action. In addition, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display is completed, the scroll display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see FIG. 56(C)).

Further, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually accelerated after the start of the scroll display to display at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed to fade out display. It will be done. This fade-out display period A23 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative designs in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are gradually decelerated all at once to be displayed at low speed, and the transmittance is proportional to the decrease in speed. (Transparency) is also lowered and fade-in is displayed. This fade-in display period B23 is common to the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

After that, the decoration symbols in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed all at once. In other words, the variable stop action and the loop action such as those in the first production mode and the second production mode are not executed, and the variable display is terminated as it is, and the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed together with the small pattern. After that, the next variable display can be started after a pattern fixing period (for example, 500 ms).

Further, the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first effect mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when the scroll display is executed in the fourth effect mode or the rotating display in the third effect mode. In addition, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second effect mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first effect mode (fade-out). Display period A23<fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22 (see FIGS. 56A to 56C).

Further, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are controlled based on the light emission control corresponding to the pattern of the high-bass music, and the rhythm, melody, and beat of the high-bass music. It emits light according to the output such as. Also, high bass music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed in the high bass state, the movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, and the frame lamp 9b are controlled based on the light emission control corresponding to the high bass music pattern. , the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of a high-bass song are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. 35B), the light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow is repeatedly executed based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 35B) corresponding to the background pattern, and the background BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R. You may make it output. By doing so, the light emission control of the effect control CPU 120 can be simplified.

(Operation example of customer waiting demonstration)
Next, the customer waiting demonstration effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an operation example of the customer waiting demonstration effect. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an operation example when a starting prize is generated during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

As shown in FIG. 57, the "customer waiting demonstration effect" is an effect in which a customer waiting (game standby) state is notified. , is an effect started by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, although not shown, after the initial motions of the movable bodies 32A and 32B are executed in the initial motion control process when the power is turned on, the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed. is displayed (see FIG. 57(A)). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without the variable display being performed after the power is turned on, the menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 disappears, and the customer waiting demonstration image 002SG400 is displayed. It is displayed, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is started (see FIG. 57(B)).

In the customer waiting demo production, after a moving image introducing a plurality of friendly characters (which may include enemy character images) appearing in various productions and the contents of the contents in order is displayed (Fig. 57(B)- (E)), the movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position while the image of the teammates characters is displayed (see FIG. 57(F)), and rises to the origin position after a predetermined time elapses. (See FIGS. 57(G) to (H)), the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, and the process ends (see FIG. 57(I)). When the customer waiting demonstration effect ends, a menu/sound volume/light amount adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 57(J)).

When a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without the variable display being performed after the customer waiting demonstration effect is finished, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started again. Even after that, as long as the waiting state continues, the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed periodically. The customer waiting demonstration effect may be repeatedly executed a plurality of times in the standby state, or may not be executed after being executed a predetermined number of times. Also, the production mode of the customer waiting demonstration production as the waiting production is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

Further, during the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIGS. 57(B) to 57(H)), the small symbols are continuously stopped and displayed in the display area 5S, while the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, Decorative patterns are not displayed on 5R. In this way, the small symbols are displayed even when the decoration symbols are not displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

An operation example in the case where a starting prize is generated while such a customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), when the first start winning occurs (the conditions for starting the variable display are satisfied) while the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 58(B) , while the customer waiting demonstration image 002SG400 is being displayed, the variable display of the small symbols is started in the display area 5S.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(C), the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. . In addition, the special figure reservation storage display area 5U and the active display area 5F are displayed, and the first reservation display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special figure reservation storage display area 5U. Then, the movement display (shift display) from the special figure reservation storage display area 5U of the first reservation display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F is started, and the variation start action of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is left, Starts in order from right to middle.

As shown in FIG. 58(D), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F ends, as shown in FIG. The symbols move upward in order, the fluctuation start action ends, and the scroll display starts (see FIG. 58(F)).

In this way, when the starting winning occurs while the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, the variable display of the small patterns is started before the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, and then the customer waiting is performed. After the demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first effect mode), the decoration pattern is displayed. Scroll display is started.

That is, if the scrolling display of decorative patterns is started while the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is being displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand that the scrolling display has started with the occurrence of the first start winning. While starting the variable display of, after switching display from the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, the scroll display is started after the shift display of the pending display is finished. It is possible to make the player recognize that the scroll display has started with the occurrence of the first start winning. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is switched to the first background image 002SG081 and the scroll display is started after the shift display is finished, the time lag from the occurrence of the first start winning to the start of the scroll display is large. Therefore, the variable display of the small symbols is started before the customer waiting demonstration effect image 002SG400 is hidden, so that the display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols can be ensured.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(A), (I), and (J), after the customer waiting demonstration effect is completed, decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the case of the first effect mode or the second effect mode when the state is reached, the loop action of the decoration pattern displayed stopped (see FIG. 34(C)) is executed, and the main lamp 9a, the frame Loop light emission control (see FIG. 35B) is executed for the lamp 9b and the movable lamp 9d. On the other hand, in the case of the third effect mode or the fourth effect mode, the loop action (see FIG. 34(C)) of the ornamental pattern that is stopped and displayed is not executed, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp are not executed. In 9d, light emission control is executed in accordance with the rhythm, melody, time signature, etc. of the high bass music.

In this way, in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative pattern is repeatedly executed in a cycle shorter than that of the loop light emission control. That is, while it is possible to promote the resumption of the game, in the high base state, since neither the loop action of the decorative pattern nor the loop light emission control is executed, the production during the high base (third production mode and fourth production mode) can be brought to your attention that is being executed. It is not necessary to execute the loop action of the decoration design in the first production mode or the second production mode, or the loop action of the decoration design may be executed in the third production mode or the fourth production mode.

In addition, the loop action of the decoration pattern is not executed while the variable display is stopped in the high base state. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to take a seat just because the pachinko game machine 1 is in a non-operating state that is not variably displayed. Suppressed.

In addition, although the "loop action" of the present embodiment is focused on "movement", for example, the position of the decorative pattern changes, shakes, or deforms. However, animation or the like may be performed in which the highlight is moved and displayed in the decoration pattern while it is still displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, the fourth background image 002SG084, and effect images (not shown) such as character images displayed as background images in the high-bass state are displayed in accordance with the high-bass music. Alternatively, the background image may be displayed as an animation such that the background image is displayed moving at a predetermined moving speed. In this case, while the variable display is stopped in the high base state as described above, although the loop action of the ornamental pattern is not executed, the animation display of the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084 is continued. can be

(Example of operation of pseudo consecutive notice)
Next, an operation example of the pseudo continuous notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 60. FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the flow of pseudo consecutive notices. FIG. 60 shows (A) a diagram showing an example of pseudo-run count display and symbol colors, (B) a diagram showing pseudo-run count display and symbol color types, and (C) a pseudo-run count display color determination table. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing;

As shown in FIG. 59, the "pseudo recurrence notice" indicates that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is started. This is an effect that prompts whether or not to resume, that is, whether or not one variable display is simulated as multiple variable displays.

As shown in FIG. 60(A), the pseudo-continuous notice includes a "pseudo-continuous one-time pattern" in which the total number of times of variable display is two times, the first time variable display and one re-variable display, and the first time variable display and two times. It is possible to execute a "pseudo consecutive 2 times pattern" in which the total number of times of variable display is 3 times with re-variable display, and when the super reach (pseudo consecutive 1 time) variation pattern is selected The "pseudo-run 1-time pattern" is executed, and when the super reach (pseudo-run 2-time) variation pattern is selected, the "pseudo-run 2-time pattern" is executed. Incidentally, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the "pseudo-run 2-time pattern" than in the "pseudo-run 1-time pattern".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(A), when the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive notice is executed is started, the left decoration symbol display area A decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and then a decorative pattern having the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R to enter a ready-to-win state. After that (see FIG. 59(B)), the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern with the characters "NEXT!" ).

After that, in the case of the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous notice is executed, the pseudo-continuous decoration design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 59(D)), and the first re-variable display is performed. is started, that is, a pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 of "x2" indicating that the second variable display is started is displayed above the center decoration symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 59(F)). , the left decorative design display area 5L, the middle decorative design display area 5C, and the right decorative design display area 5R, the variable display of decorative designs is resumed (see FIG. 59(G)). In addition, in the case of variable display in which the pseudo-continuous notice is not executed, the pseudo-continuous symbol passes through the stop position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and one of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. A decorative pattern with a large number is displayed in a stopped state, and a variable display result of failure is displayed (see FIG. 59(E)).

In FIG. 59(G), after the variable display of decorative patterns is resumed, in the case of the pseudo-continuous notice of "pseudo-continuous one-time pattern", after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display is performed in the left decorative design display area 5L. 59(L)), and the decorative design with the same number as the decorative design temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. 59(M)), and develops into SP reach performance.

In addition, after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed in FIG. 59(G), in the case of the pseudo-continuous notice of "pseudo-continuous double pattern", the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L, and then , The decorative pattern with the same number as the one temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. The pseudo-continuous decoration pattern displayed with is decelerated and displayed before the stop position in the middle decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 59(H)).

Next, the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 59(I)), and the second re-variable display is started, that is, the third variable display is started. After the pseudo run number display 002SG213 of "x3" indicating that the display is started is displayed above the middle decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 59(J)), the left decoration design display area 5L, the middle decoration. The variable display of decorative designs is resumed in the design display area 5C and the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 59(K)).

After that, the decorative design that has been variably displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 59(L)), and the decoration with the same number as the decorative design temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L. The symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R to enter the ready-to-win state (see FIG. 59(M)), and the SP ready-to-win effect develops.

In addition, the pseudo-continuous notice is an introductory part as a period to instigate whether or not the variable display will be resumed (Fig. 59 (A) to (C), (G), (J), (K), (L) reference), and a result notification part (see FIGS. 59(D) to (F), (H), (I), and (M)) as a period for notifying the result of whether or not the variable display has been restarted. .

As shown in FIG. 60(B1), in the pseudo continuous notice, the variable display is restarted when the variable display is resumed after the pseudo continuous decoration symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration symbol display area 5C. A pseudo-run count display is displayed that allows you to specify the number of times you have played. Specifically, the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 (FIGS. 59(F) and (G)) of "×2" indicates that the first re-variable display is started, that is, the second variable display is started. ), or a pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 (see FIGS. 59(J) and 59(K)) that indicates that the second re-variable display is started, that is, that the third variable display is started. ) is displayed.

The pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 shown in FIG. 60(B1) and the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 shown in FIG. 60(B2) are sometimes displayed in blue and sometimes in red. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 30, the even-numbered normal symbols are "blue" and the odd-numbered odd-numbered symbols are "red". The display color of the pseudo-repeated number display is determined using the pseudo-repeated number display color determination table shown in FIG. be.

Specifically, in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, when the display color of the pseudo-running number display 002SG212 is determined, when the variable display result is "probable variable big hit", the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 is used. A display color that is not the same color (for example, the symbol color is blue and the pseudo-running number display color is red/the symbol color is red and the pseudo-running number display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 10%, and is determined in step 002 SGS276. A display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorated pattern (for example, the pattern color and the pseudo-running number display color are blue/the pattern color and the pseudo-running number display color are red) is determined at a rate of 90%.

Further, when the variable display result is "unprobable variable jackpot", a display color that is not the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002 SGS276 (for example, the symbol color is blue, and the pseudo consecutive number display color is blue). Red/symbol color is red, pseudo-running number display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 30%, and a display color that is the same as the symbol color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002 SGS276 (for example, symbol color and pseudo Blue for the consecutive number display color/red for the pattern color and pseudo consecutive number display color) is determined at a rate of 70%.

Further, when the variable display result is "miss", a display color that is not the same color as the decorative pattern color determined in step 002 SGS276 (for example, the pattern color is blue and the pseudo-running number display color is red/ The symbol color is red and the pseudo-run number display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the display color (for example, the symbol color and the pseudo-run number) is the same color as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276. The display color is blue/the pattern color and the pseudo-run number display color are red) is determined at a rate of 10%.

As described above, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display are the first combination of non-identical colors, and the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the pseudo consecutive number display are the first combination. There is a case where the display color becomes the second combination of the same color, and the case where the variable display is restarted with the second combination is more favorable than the case where the variable display is restarted with the first combination in the pseudo-continuous notice. The ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is high.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a big hit, when the normal symbol (blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS276, the number of pseudo-runs of the first pseudo-run and the second pseudo-run is displayed as follows. The rate of determination of the same color blue is higher than the rate of determination of the non-same color red. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a failure, when the normal symbol (blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the same color is used as the pseudo-run number display for the first and second pseudo-runs. A blue color is determined less frequently than the non-identical color red.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, when the probability variable symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS276, the same color is displayed as the number of pseudo-runs for the first and second pseudo-runs. A red color is determined more frequently than a non-identical blue color. On the other hand, when the variable display result is lost, when the probability variable symbol (red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS 276, the same color is displayed as the number of pseudo-runs for the first and second pseudo-runs. A red color is determined less frequently than the non-identical color blue.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a big hit, when the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276 (see FIG. 60(B1)), the pseudo-running number display 002SG212 is changed to " For the first pseudo run of "x2", the second combination ("x2", blue) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo run number display 002SG212 and the display color are the same type of blue are displayed. This is determined at a higher rate than the first combination ("x2", red) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo-running number display 002SG212 are of the same type, but the display color is red. .

In addition, for the second pseudo-run where the pseudo-run number display 002SG213 is "x3", the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo-run number display 002SG212 are different, but the display color is the same blue color. The 3 combination ("x3", blue) is better than the 4th combination ("x3", red) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 are red. Determined by a high percentage.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is lost, when the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the number of pseudo-runs of the first pseudo-run and the second pseudo-run is displayed. , the rate at which blue, which is the same color, is determined is lower than the rate at which red, which is the non-same color, is determined.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit, when the probability variable symbol ("3", red) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002SGS276, the pseudo-run number display 002SG212 becomes "x2" for the first pseudo-run. , the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo-running number display 002SG212 are different, but the third combination ("x2", red), which is the same kind of display color and is red, is displayed temporarily stopped. It is determined at a higher rate than the fourth combination ("x2", blue) in which the display color is different from the numbers of the decorative symbols and the number of pseudo-running display 002SG212.

In addition, for the second pseudo-run where the pseudo-run number display 002SG213 is "x3", the second combination ("x 3", red) is better than the first combination ("x3", blue) in which the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and the number of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 are the same type, but the display color is different blue. Determined by a high percentage.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is lost, when the normal symbol ("3", blue) is determined as the stop symbol in step 002 SGS276, the number of pseudo-runs of the first and second pseudo-runs is displayed. , the rate at which blue, which is the same color, is determined is lower than the rate at which red, which is the non-same color, is determined.

As described above, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the numbers of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 and 002SG213 are of the same type, and the display colors of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive number display are different. There are cases where it is the first combination, and cases where both the decoration symbol displayed temporarily and the number and display color of the pseudo-running number are the same type, and the first combination is the first combination in the pseudo-running notice. Whether or not the pseudo continuous notice is executed by increasing the ratio of control to the jackpot game state when the variable display is restarted with the second combination than when the variable display is restarted with the second combination. In addition, when executed, it is possible to draw attention to the combination of numbers and colors of the decorative symbols displayed temporarily and the numbers and colors of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pseudo-run announcement, the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher when the super reach variation pattern of two pseudo-runs is determined as the variation pattern than when the super reach variation pattern of one pseudo-run is determined. , The decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the second pseudo-run are more likely to be displayed in the second pseudo-run than when both the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the first pseudo-run and the number and display color of the pseudo-run number display are the same second combination. and the second combination of the same type in both the number and display color of the number of pseudo-runs, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher. It is possible to attract attention by the number of times displayed and the display color.

Also, in the second pseudo run, if both the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and the number and display color of the pseudo run number display are the same type of second combination, the decorative design becomes a variable pattern, so it is simulated as a variation pattern. The ratio of control to the probability variable big win game state may be higher when the super reach variation pattern of two pseudo-reams is determined than when the super reach variation pattern of one ream is determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display is exemplified by determining one of a plurality of colors according to the number of the ornamental symbol displayed temporarily, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display color of the display of the number of pseudo-runs is not limited, and may be a display color that is predetermined for each number of pseudo-runs.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, 002SG213, the form of "x2" or "x3" was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Display of the number of repetitions can be changed in various ways as long as the number of pseudo repetitions can be specified. It can be displayed in various forms such as.

In the present embodiment, the number of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol and the number of the pseudo consecutive number display are the same type and the same color in the pseudo consecutive notice. is a normal symbol (“2”, blue) and the number of pseudo-runs is indicated by 002SG212 (“x2”, blue) There were two patterns in the case of the number of times display 002SG213 (x 3, red), but in addition to the above, the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed is the normal pattern ("4", green), and the pseudo consecutive number display (x 4) , green) may be used, and the number color of the decoration pattern, the number color of the number of pseudo-runs, and the number of pseudo-runs can be changed variously.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive notice, even if the number of the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number of the pseudo consecutive number display, the pseudo consecutive notice It is decided whether or not the consecutive number display color should be the same color as the number of the decoration symbol displayed temporarily. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the numbers of the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed are numbers other than "2" and "3" corresponding to the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display. In some cases, a predetermined display color (for example, white) may be uniformly determined without determining the pseudo-repetition display color.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive notice, the decorative symbols of the same number as the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L are temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R to enter the reach state. After that, the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern with the characters "NEXT!" The present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo-continuous pattern can be changed variously. In addition, after a decorative design with a different number from the decorative design temporarily displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R, the left decorative design display area 5L or the right decorative design display area 5R. The re-variable display may be started by temporarily stopping and displaying the decoration pattern or the pseudo-continuous decoration pattern temporarily stopped at the stop position in the middle decoration design display area 5C.

Incidentally, the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the pseudo consecutive notice may not necessarily be the same as the fixed decoration symbols stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display. Further, for example, after the normal symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo-run, the probability variable symbols, that is, different symbols from the first pseudo-run may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the second pseudo-run. Also, the number of pseudo-runs is not limited to the above two times, and three or more pseudo-runs (re-variable display) may be executed.

(Operation example of reach production)
Next, an operation example of the ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect following FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an operation example of each part in the ready-to-win effect. In the following, an operation example of the ready-to-win effect in the first effect mode will be explained, but the same ready-to-win effect may be executed in the second to fourth effect modes as well.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), when the variable display based on the normal reach variation pattern or the super reach variation pattern is started, at the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the variable display was started, the left decoration symbol display area 5L The decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 61(B)), and then the decorative design with the same number as the decorative design temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R. Then, the mode of variable display of the decoration pattern becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 61(C)). At this time, decoration designs are displayed at high speed in the middle decoration design display area 5C. Also, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B are lit based on the aforementioned loop light emission control (see FIG. 35(B)).

In addition, in FIGS. 61(B) and 61(C), the form in which the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , and the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R may be temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 61(D), when the ready-to-win effect is started, the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decoration design display area 5L and the right decoration design display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, and the middle decoration design is displayed. A reach line effect display 002SG250 as a reach line suggesting image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the ornamental pattern (substantially transparent and invisible) being variably displayed in the area 5C, and the reach line suggesting effect is started. The reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display emphasizing the reach line connecting the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design is displayed on the reach line. This is a display suggesting that the decoration pattern in the area 5C will be stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 61(D), the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decoration design display area 5L and the right decoration design display area 5R are such that only the characters in the character display section 002SG052 are enlarged as in the above-described fluctuation stop action. Instead of being displayed, the number display portion 002SG051, character display portion 002SG052, information display portion 002SG053, and base display portion 002SG054 forming decorative patterns are all enlarged and displayed at the same ratio. In this manner, by providing an enlarged display that is different in mode from when the variable display is stopped, it is possible to make the user recognize that the variable display is not stopped but in the ready-to-reach mode.

The reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed in a small size near the stop position in the center decoration design display area 5C so as to be superimposed on the decoration design being variably displayed when the reach performance is started as shown in FIG. 61(D). 61(E)), and after reaching the left and right sides of the display screen (see FIG. 61 (F)), after the mode changes so that the vertical dimension expands (see FIG. 61 (G)), the transmittance (transparency) gradually increases due to fade-out display (see FIG. 61 (H)), and finally 62(I)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 61(F), it is possible to change (enlarge) the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 in the reach line suggestion production, and to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250. When changing, turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged around (near) the display screen of the image display device 5 makes the surroundings of the display screen darker than usual. , the reach line effect display 002SG250 can be made more conspicuous.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61(D), after the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, the left decorative design is moved to the left and the right decorative design is displayed. The decorative patterns start moving rightward, that is, in a direction away from each other (see FIG. 61(E)). In addition, while being spaced apart from each other, they are rotated by a predetermined angle around the rotation axis facing the vertical direction (see FIG. 61(F)), and when they reach the farthest spaced position on the left and right of the display screen, the movement and rotation display are completed. 61(G)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 61(H), the left and right decorative patterns displayed at the left and right separated positions while being enlarged are reduced and rotated from the separated positions toward the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. moved and restored to its normal viewing position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62(I), when the decorative patterns are restored in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and hidden, it is variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. The scroll display speed gradually decreases, and the transparency (transparency) gradually decreases to fade-in the decorative pattern (see FIGS. 62(J) to (K)). Finally, the decorative pattern becomes transparent. The rate becomes 0% (opaque), and scroll display is performed at a low speed (see FIG. 62(L)).

As shown in FIG. 63, when executing the reach line suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 expands and enlarges the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R. , and a separation display in which the decorative pattern is separated after the enlarged display is executed, and the separation display is started and ended before the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display. Since the second period te1 until the game is played is longer (td1<te1), the player can be made to recognize the decoration pattern forming the ready-to-win state.

In addition, the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to the end of the enlarged display is longer than the period tf1 until the enlarged decorative pattern is restored to the original figure (td2 < tf1 ), while allowing the player to recognize the decoration pattern forming the ready-to-win state, it can be quickly reduced in size when restored to prepare for the next performance.

In addition, when the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, attention is paid to which decorative design is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative design display area 5C. Since the left and right dimensions are narrowed and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative patterns, the left and right decorative patterns are moved away from each other. It is possible to make the user pay attention to the decorative design in the middle decorative design display area 5C.

In addition, the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been exemplified in a form displayed immediately after the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decoration design display area 5L and the right decoration design display area 5R and the reach state is reached. It is not limited to this, and may be displayed at the same time as the ready-to-reach mode.

Also, the movable body lamp 9d displays the decorative patterns temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R, and after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed. Although the form in which the lights are turned off when changing has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lights may be turned off simultaneously with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250. Further, the luminance is not limited to being extinguished, and the luminance may be lowered more than when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable bodies 32A and 32B provided above and below the image display device 5 are provided with built-in specific light emitting means that are turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of board-side lamps including an attacker lamp 9c provided on the game board, and a main lamp 9a provided on the game machine frame 3 , frame lamps 9b, etc., and particularly if the lamps are provided near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is made conspicuous by turning off the lamps. be able to.

Further, after execution of the reach line effect display 002SG250, the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being displayed in the middle decoration design display area 5C is set higher than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed. The second transmittance F2 with a low transmittance (transparency) is set to the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration design display area 5C, and is displayed variably in the center decoration design display area 5C. The decorative pattern inside does not interfere with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decoration design display area 5C, the transmittance of the decoration design in the middle decoration design display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display). However, the present invention is not limited to this. After the display 002SG250 is erased from the center decoration design display area 5C, the transmittance may change to the second transmittance F2 after a predetermined time has passed.

(Operation example of SP reach production)
Next, an operation example of the SP ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP ready-to-win effect. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP ready-to-win effect following FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an operation example of each part in the SP ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIG. 64 (A), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when it is controlled to the low base state, after becoming the reach mode described in FIG. 61 (C), the type of SP reach production The reach title display 002SG070 is displayed to notify the reach title, and the SP reach performance as a notification effect to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) ) is started (see FIGS. 64B and 64C). In the SP reach effect, a fifth background image 002SG085 representing the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed, which is different from the first background image 002SG081 and the second background image 002SG082 which are normal background images. In addition, the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image having a different aspect according to the type of the SP ready-to-win effect.

Next, during the period from the timing when the battle is settled until the predetermined operation validity period elapses, an operation promotion display 002SG071 consisting of characters "Press!!" prompting the operation of the push button 31B and a button display imitating the push button 31B. 002SG072 is displayed (see FIG. 64(D)).

Then, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation effective period, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period elapses, the operation prompting display 002SG071 and the button display 002SG072 are hidden, and the process ends. . Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined luminescent color while the movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect display 002SG073 that emphasizes the movable body 32B is displayed. At the same time, a predetermined production effect sound is output, and it is notified that the game state is controlled to a big hit (see FIG. 64(E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image. , a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 64(F)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 64(G), with the end of the SP ready-to-win effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. A combination of jackpot confirmation symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, a character 002SG074 appears with a lit ignition device in hand, and after displaying a frame-in from the lower right side of the display screen, it runs toward the left and temporarily appears in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The number display portions 002SG051 of the decoration symbols that are stopped and displayed are ignited (see FIG. 64(H)).

As shown in FIG. 66(A), a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame displayed by being ignited at a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display portion 002SG051 of each pattern is shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(D). , it increases along the periphery of the number display portion 002SG051 and is displayed near the number of the number display portion 002SG051. In addition, as for the flame images that constitute the specific image 002SG075, as shown in the middle enlarged view of FIG. By doing so, the movement is displayed as if the flame is swaying. Finally, the specific image 002SG075 is hidden, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped, and the big hit display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 64(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the effect position, and after the result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 64 (K)) In the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of confirmed symbols that are not a big hit combination (for example, "232 ”) is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 64(L)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 64(M), with the end of the notification effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden, the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed. is displayed, a combination of deviated confirmed symbols (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the small symbols and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the result of the misalignment display is derived and displayed (see FIG. 64(N)).

In addition, in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when it is controlled to the high base state, after the notification effect of notifying that it is controlled to the big hit game state is performed (see FIG. 64 (E)), When the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image in the notification effect after the result display (not shown) indicating that the character has won the battle with the enemy character is displayed. At the same time, a combination of big hit confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 65(O)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 65(P), with the end of the notification effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. is displayed, the combination of the big hit confirmed symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed without displaying the specific image 002SG075, and the big hit display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 65(Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the effect position, and after the result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 64 (K)) In the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of confirmed symbols that are not a big hit combination (for example, "232 ”) is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 65(R)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 65(S), when the notification effect (SP ready-to-win effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed. is displayed, a combination of deviated confirmed symbols (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the result of the display of deviation is derived and displayed (see FIG. 65(T)).

In this way, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in operation on the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmed decoration pattern displayed after the end of the notification effect. (See FIGS. 64(H) and (I)), in the high base state where the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in operation on the decorative pattern number display portion 002SG051 displayed after the end of the notification effect. (see FIG. 65(S)), it is possible to give a sense of speed to the variable display.

In the present embodiment, in the low base state, a specific image 002SG075 showing flames is displayed in close proximity to the numerical display portion 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmed decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP ready-to-win effect. Although the form was exemplified, the specific image is not limited to the specific image 002SG075 showing flames as described above, and images other than flames (for example, light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may be applied. good.

In addition, the movement display of the specific image may include not only the manner in which the flames fluctuate as described above, but also the specific image rotating around the number display portion 002SG051, or changing in form or display color. .

Further, in the present embodiment, the character 002SG074 acts on each of the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, so that the specific image 002SG075 is displayed around the number display portion 002SG051. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image is displayed without the character 002SG074 acting on the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. may be displayed.

(Modification 2)
Next, Modification 2 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 67, (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing Modification 2 of the present invention.

In the variable stop action in the above embodiment, the characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 are enlarged and displayed when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after passing through the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the decorative patterns are moved in the opposite direction and restored to the stopped positions. may be moved and displayed.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 67A1 and 67A2, the decorative pattern is displayed at a reduced speed toward the stop position, and gradually moves downward in the direction of the white arrow until it reaches the stop position. When the temporary stop display is performed (see FIG. 67 (A3)), the pedestal display portion 002SG054 and the information display portion 002SG053 remain temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, and the number display portion 002SG051 and the character display portion 002SG052 pass through the stop position. Then, the downward movement display is continued.

At this time, the movement distance L2 from when the number display portion 002SG051 passes the stop position until the temporary stop display is displayed is the movement distance from when the character display portion 002SG052 passes the stop position until the temporary stop display is displayed. It is larger than L1 (L1<L2).

After that, the number display portion 002SG051 and the character display portion 002SG052 that have passed the stop position move upward, and while the character display portion 002SG052 is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIG. 67A5), the character display portion 002SG052 The display unit 002SG052 passes the stop position again and moves upward (see FIG. 67(A6)). In this way, the movement distance L3 from when the number display portion 002SG051 passes the stop position upward until the temporary stop display is displayed is (L3<L2). Finally, the number display portion 002SG051 moves downward and is temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 67 (A7)).

Note that the action in which only the character display portion 002SG052 passes through the stop position and moves upward in FIG. It can be made to recognize the difference from the start action.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches the stop position, it is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing of arrival, but after at least a part of the plurality of seed display parts forming the decorative pattern has passed the stop position, the reverse display is performed. By moving to the side and returning to the stop position, it is possible to make it look as if a part of the display has passed by with momentum, so it can be made more realistic.

In addition, while the first display unit (for example, the base display unit 002SG054 and the information display unit 002SG053) among the plurality of display units is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, the other second display unit (for example, the number display unit 002SG051 and By causing the character display portion 002SG052) to pass through the stop position, movement can be given while the stop position is not ambiguous. Furthermore, by making the movement distances of the number display portion 002SG051 on one side and the character display portion 002SG052 on the other side of the second display portion different, it is possible to display the action according to the size and appearance of the display portion. .

(Modification 3)
Next, Modification 3 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 68(A) to (D) are diagrams showing a modification 3 of the present invention.

In the above-described embodiment, in the first effect mode, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIG. Although the decorative patterns before and after the stopped decorative pattern are not temporarily stopped and displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. Thus, when one of the decorative patterns (for example, decorative pattern "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, one of the preceding and following decorative patterns (for example, decorative pattern "2" and decorative pattern "4") The part may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, when one of the variably displayed decoration symbols (for example, decoration symbol "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position (see FIGS. 68A and 68B), the variation stop action is performed. In the case (see FIGS. 68C and 68D), the object to be subjected to the fluctuation stop action is the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in an area other than the stop position. It is preferable not to execute the fluctuation stop action for the decoration pattern.

By doing so, when a winning combination, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the result of the losing display, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, temporary stop display is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By temporarily enlarging and displaying the displayed decorative patterns, the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be made to attract the player's attention, and a combination that is originally meaningless to the player is derived. Even when the decoration pattern is displayed, the player's line of sight can be kept on the area where the decoration pattern is displayed. Further, when enlarging and displaying the temporarily stopped decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the decorative patterns that are not positioned in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are not displayed in an enlarged manner. It is possible to concentrate on the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and reduce the load of display control.

In addition, since the loop light emission control is continuously performed even when enlarging and displaying the decorative patterns to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIGS. 53 and 54), the main lamp 9a and the frame lamp 9b, the control of the movable lamp 9d can be simplified. Incidentally, when a plurality of effective stop positions are set, the fluctuation stop action may be executed for the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed at each effective stop position.

(Other modifications)
Further, after the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-win mode, when it develops into the SP ready-to-win effect, the left and right decorative patterns forming the ready-to-win mode move to the front side of the display screen in a first predetermined operation and to the back of the display screen. Only the number display part 002SG051 may be moved to a predetermined position (for example, upper left and right sides of the display screen) on the display screen where the SP reach effect is displayed by a specific action including a second predetermined action of moving to the side. In this case, it is preferable that the moving speed of the decorative pattern is faster in the second predetermined motion than in the first predetermined motion.

In addition, when the variable display is stopped, the decorative patterns are the number display portion 002SG051 and the information display portion 002SG053. In addition to being able to execute the variation start action for the information display section 002SG051, the information display section 002SG053 may also be made capable of executing the information display variation start action in conjunction with the number variation start action of the number display section 002SG051. In this case, the information display variation start action may be completed and the information display section 002SG053 may be erased before the number variation start action is completed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute either the first effect mode or the second effect mode in the low base state, the third effect mode in the low probability high base state, and the fourth effect in the high probability high base state Although the form in which the mode can be executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute three or more types of production modes in the low base state, or three or more types of effects in the high base state. The mode may be made executable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the first effect mode, the first scroll display in the vertical direction, in the second effect mode, the second scroll display that curves and moves from the back side to the front side, in the third effect mode, the rotating display, the fourth Although the form in which the third scrolling display in the vertical direction is executed in the production mode has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the form of variable display of decorative patterns in each production mode can be changed in various ways. .

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state is a time-saving state or a variable probability state. , Small hit game state and the like may be applied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal state and the low probability low base state, the special state with a short average variable display period and the low probability high base state and high probability low base state and the variable display is likely to be executed than the normal state However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state, and the special state may be a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the normal state (low base state), the time saving state (low probability high base state), the probability variable state (high probability high base state) are provided as the game state, and the time saving state or probability change at the end of the big hit game Although the form in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the state is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a part of the case where the variable display result is wrong in the low probability state. Therefore, it is possible to control the time saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, or it is advantageous in a low probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1) The present invention may be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays without being controlled by the state. In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after the big hit game is the time-saving state A, and in a low-probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1), it is predetermined without being controlled to the advantageous state. The time saving state controlled based on the number of times the variable display is performed is the time saving state B, a part of the case where the variable display result is lost in the low probability state, and the variable display result is displayed as a specific result. The time saving state controlled based on what is done should be the time saving state C.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine that can be controlled in the time-saving state C, a plurality of types of variable display results are provided for winning the time-saving state C, and depending on the type of variable display result when winning the time-saving state C You may vary the variable display frequency|count by which time saving control is performed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state corresponds to non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to big bonus, regular bonus, assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT).

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

1 pachinko machine 2 game board 4A first special symbol display device 4B second special symbol display device 5 image display device 9 game effect lamp 11 main substrate 12 effect control substrate 31B push button 31B
32 movable body 100 game control microcomputer 120 effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
game control means;
production control means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The game control means is
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium enters the starting area,
perform variable display of the specific identification information;
Based on the result of the determination, from among a plurality of variation patterns including a first variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state and a second variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state Determine any variation pattern,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means is
It is possible to perform variable display of a plurality of types of decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state with a specific reach,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
In one production mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed,
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, background fade-out display is performed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and the background fade-out display of the first background image is performed. is capable of executing a background fade-in display in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually reduced when executing
When starting variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decoration identification information is gradually increased and erased,
When ending the variable display of the decoration identification information, the identification information fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the decoration identification information,
an execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than an execution period of the identification information fade-in display;
The specific reach includes a title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified,
The display means is
After being notified that the specific reach is controlled to the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed;
displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer time than the title display corresponding to the specific reach;
The light emission control means is
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data;
in the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the title display part;
A game machine, wherein in the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the introductory part.

Images